* Re: [linux-kernel-mentees] [PATCH v2] Doc : doc-guide : Fix a typo
From: Sheriff Esseson @ 2019-06-28 7:43 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: skhan; +Cc: linux-kernel-mentees, linux-doc, linux-kernel, corbet
In-Reply-To: <20190628063342.27613-1-sheriffesseson@gmail.com>
On Fri, Jun 28, 2019 at 07:33:42AM +0100, Sheriff Esseson wrote:
> fix the disjunction by replacing "of" with "or".
>
> Signed-off-by: Sheriff Esseson <sheriffesseson@gmail.com>
> ---
>
> changes in v2:
> - cc-ed Corbet.
>
> Documentation/doc-guide/kernel-doc.rst | 2 +-
> 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
>
> diff --git a/Documentation/doc-guide/kernel-doc.rst b/Documentation/doc-guide/kernel-doc.rst
> index f96059767..192c36af3 100644
> --- a/Documentation/doc-guide/kernel-doc.rst
> +++ b/Documentation/doc-guide/kernel-doc.rst
> @@ -359,7 +359,7 @@ Domain`_ references.
> ``monospaced font``.
>
> Useful if you need to use special characters that would otherwise have some
> - meaning either by kernel-doc script of by reStructuredText.
> + meaning either by kernel-doc script or by reStructuredText.
>
> This is particularly useful if you need to use things like ``%ph`` inside
> a function description.
> --
> 2.22.0
>
make respose inline.
^ permalink raw reply
* Re: [PATCH v5 17/18] kernel/sysctl-test: Add null pointer test for sysctl.c:proc_dointvec()
From: Brendan Higgins @ 2019-06-28 8:01 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Luis Chamberlain
Cc: Iurii Zaikin, linux-api, Michael Kerrisk (man-pages),
Frank Rowand, Greg KH, Josh Poimboeuf, Kees Cook, Kieran Bingham,
Peter Zijlstra, Rob Herring, Stephen Boyd, shuah,
Theodore Ts'o, Masahiro Yamada, devicetree, dri-devel,
kunit-dev, open list:DOCUMENTATION, linux-fsdevel, linux-kbuild,
Linux Kernel Mailing List, open list:KERNEL SELFTEST FRAMEWORK,
linux-nvdimm, linux-um, Sasha Levin, Bird, Timothy,
Amir Goldstein, Dan Carpenter, Daniel Vetter, Jeff Dike,
Joel Stanley, Julia Lawall, Kevin Hilman, Knut Omang,
Logan Gunthorpe, Michael Ellerman, Petr Mladek, Randy Dunlap,
Richard Weinberger, David Rientjes, Steven Rostedt, wfg
In-Reply-To: <20190627061021.GE19023@42.do-not-panic.com>
On Wed, Jun 26, 2019 at 11:10 PM Luis Chamberlain <mcgrof@kernel.org> wrote:
>
> On Wed, Jun 26, 2019 at 09:07:43PM -0700, Iurii Zaikin wrote:
> > On Tue, Jun 25, 2019 at 7:17 PM Luis Chamberlain <mcgrof@kernel.org> wrote:
> > > > +static void sysctl_test_dointvec_table_maxlen_unset(struct kunit *test)
> > > > +{
> > > > + struct ctl_table table = {
> > > > + .procname = "foo",
> > > > + .data = &test_data.int_0001,
> > > > + .maxlen = 0,
> > > > + .mode = 0644,
> > > > + .proc_handler = proc_dointvec,
> > > > + .extra1 = &i_zero,
> > > > + .extra2 = &i_one_hundred,
> > > > + };
> > > > + void *buffer = kunit_kzalloc(test, sizeof(int), GFP_USER);
> > > > + size_t len;
> > > > + loff_t pos;
> > > > +
> > > > + len = 1234;
> > > > + KUNIT_EXPECT_EQ(test, 0, proc_dointvec(&table, 0, buffer, &len, &pos));
> > > > + KUNIT_EXPECT_EQ(test, (size_t)0, len);
> > > > + len = 1234;
> > > > + KUNIT_EXPECT_EQ(test, 0, proc_dointvec(&table, 1, buffer, &len, &pos));
> > > > + KUNIT_EXPECT_EQ(test, (size_t)0, len);
> > > > +}
> > >
> > > In a way this is also testing for general kernel API changes. This is and the
> > > last one were good examples. So this is not just testing functionality
> > > here. There is no wrong or write answer if 0 or -EINVAL was returned
> > > other than the fact that we have been doing this for years.
> > >
> > > Its a perhaps small but important difference for some of these tests. I
> > > *do* think its worth clarifying through documentation which ones are
> > > testing for API consistency Vs proper correctness.
> >
> > You make a good point that the test codifies the existing behavior of
> > the function in lieu of formal documentation. However, the test cases
> > were derived from examining the source code of the function under test
> > and attempting to cover all branches. The assertions were added only
> > for the values that appeared to be set deliberately in the
> > implementation. And it makes sense to me to test that the code does
> > exactly what the implementation author intended.
>
> I'm not arguing against adding them. I'm suggesting that it is different
> to test for API than for correctness of intended functionality, and
> it would be wise to make it clear which test cases are for API and which
> for correctness.
I see later on that some of the API stuff you are talking about is
public APIs from the standpoint of user (outside of LInux) visible. To
be clear, is that what you mean by public APIs throughout, or would
you distinguish between correctness tests, internal API tests, and
external API tests?
> This will come up later for other kunit tests and it would be great
> to set precendent so that other kunit tests can follow similar
> practices to ensure its clear what is API realted Vs correctness of
> intended functionality.
>
> In fact, I'm not yet sure if its possible to test public kernel API to
> userspace with kunit, but if it is possible... well, that could make
> linux-api folks happy as they could enable us to codify interpreation of
> what is expected into kunit test cases, and we'd ensure that the
> codified interpretation is not only documented in man pages but also
> through formal kunit test cases.
>
> A regression in linux-api then could be formalized through a proper
> kunit tests case. And if an API evolves, it would force developers to
> update the respective kunit which codifies that contract.
Yep, I think that is long term hope. Some of the file system interface
stuff that requires a filesystem to be mounted somewhere might get a
little weird/difficult, but I suspect we should be able to do it
eventually. I mean it's all just C code right? Should mostly boil down
to someone figuring out how to do it the first time.
> > > > +static void sysctl_test_dointvec_single_less_int_min(struct kunit *test)
> > > > +{
> > > > + struct ctl_table table = {
> > > > + .procname = "foo",
> > > > + .data = &test_data.int_0001,
> > > > + .maxlen = sizeof(int),
> > > > + .mode = 0644,
> > > > + .proc_handler = proc_dointvec,
> > > > + .extra1 = &i_zero,
> > > > + .extra2 = &i_one_hundred,
> > > > + };
> > > > + char input[32];
> > > > + size_t len = sizeof(input) - 1;
> > > > + loff_t pos = 0;
> > > > + unsigned long abs_of_less_than_min = (unsigned long)INT_MAX
> > > > + - (INT_MAX + INT_MIN) + 1;
> > > > +
> > > > + KUNIT_EXPECT_LT(test,
> > > > + (size_t)snprintf(input, sizeof(input), "-%lu",
> > > > + abs_of_less_than_min),
> > > > + sizeof(input));
> > > > +
> > > > + table.data = kunit_kzalloc(test, sizeof(int), GFP_USER);
> > > > + KUNIT_EXPECT_EQ(test, -EINVAL,
> > > > + proc_dointvec(&table, 1, input, &len, &pos));
> > > > + KUNIT_EXPECT_EQ(test, sizeof(input) - 1, len);
> > > > + KUNIT_EXPECT_EQ(test, 0, ((int *)table.data)[0]);
> > > > +}
> > >
> > > API test.
> > >
> > Not sure why.
>
> Because you are codifying that we *definitely* return -EINVAL on
> overlow. Some parts of the kernel return -ERANGE for overflows for
> instance.
>
> It would be a generic test for overflow if it would just test
> for any error.
>
> It is a fine and good test to keep. All these tests are good to keep.
>
> > I believe there has been a real bug with int overflow in
> > proc_dointvec.
> > Covering it with test seems like a good idea.
>
> Oh definitely.
>
> > > > +static void sysctl_test_dointvec_single_greater_int_max(struct kunit *test)
> > > > +{
> > > > + struct ctl_table table = {
> > > > + .procname = "foo",
> > > > + .data = &test_data.int_0001,
> > > > + .maxlen = sizeof(int),
> > > > + .mode = 0644,
> > > > + .proc_handler = proc_dointvec,
> > > > + .extra1 = &i_zero,
> > > > + .extra2 = &i_one_hundred,
> > > > + };
> > > > + char input[32];
> > > > + size_t len = sizeof(input) - 1;
> > > > + loff_t pos = 0;
> > > > + unsigned long greater_than_max = (unsigned long)INT_MAX + 1;
> > > > +
> > > > + KUNIT_EXPECT_GT(test, greater_than_max, (unsigned long)INT_MAX);
> > > > + KUNIT_EXPECT_LT(test, (size_t)snprintf(input, sizeof(input), "%lu",
> > > > + greater_than_max),
> > > > + sizeof(input));
> > > > + table.data = kunit_kzalloc(test, sizeof(int), GFP_USER);
> > > > + KUNIT_EXPECT_EQ(test, -EINVAL,
> > > > + proc_dointvec(&table, 1, input, &len, &pos));
> > > > + KUNIT_EXPECT_EQ(test, sizeof(input) - 1, len);
> > > > + KUNIT_EXPECT_EQ(test, 0, ((int *)table.data)[0]);
> > > > +}
> > > > +
> > >
> > > API test.
> > >
> > > > +static struct kunit_case sysctl_test_cases[] = {
> > > > + KUNIT_CASE(sysctl_test_dointvec_null_tbl_data),
> > > > + KUNIT_CASE(sysctl_test_dointvec_table_maxlen_unset),
> > > > + KUNIT_CASE(sysctl_test_dointvec_table_len_is_zero),
> > > > + KUNIT_CASE(sysctl_test_dointvec_table_read_but_position_set),
> > > > + KUNIT_CASE(sysctl_test_dointvec_happy_single_positive),
> > > > + KUNIT_CASE(sysctl_test_dointvec_happy_single_negative),
> > > > + KUNIT_CASE(sysctl_test_dointvec_single_less_int_min),
> > > > + KUNIT_CASE(sysctl_test_dointvec_single_greater_int_max),
> > > > + {}
> > > > +};
> > >
> > > Oh all are API tests.. perhaps then just rename then
> > > sysctl_test_cases to sysctl_api_test_cases.
> > >
> > > Would be good to add at least *two* other tests cases for this
> > > example, one which does a valid read and one which does a valid write.
> > Added valid reads. There already are 2 valid writes.
>
> Thanks.
>
> > > If that is done either we add another kunit test module for correctness
> > > or just extend the above and use prefix / postfixes on the functions
> > > to distinguish between API / correctness somehow.
> > >
> > > > +
> > > > +static struct kunit_module sysctl_test_module = {
> > > > + .name = "sysctl_test",
> > > > + .test_cases = sysctl_test_cases,
> > > > +};
> > > > +
> > > > +module_test(sysctl_test_module);
> > > > diff --git a/lib/Kconfig.debug b/lib/Kconfig.debug
> > > > index cbdfae3798965..389b8986f5b77 100644
> > > > --- a/lib/Kconfig.debug
> > > > +++ b/lib/Kconfig.debug
> > > > @@ -1939,6 +1939,16 @@ config TEST_SYSCTL
> > > >
> > > > If unsure, say N.
> > > >
> > > > +config SYSCTL_KUNIT_TEST
> > > > + bool "KUnit test for sysctl"
> > > > + depends on KUNIT
> > > > + help
> > > > + This builds the proc sysctl unit test, which runs on boot. For more
> > > > + information on KUnit and unit tests in general please refer to the
> > > > + KUnit documentation in Documentation/dev-tools/kunit/.
> > >
> > > A little more description here would help. It is testing for API and
> > > hopefully also correctness (if extended with those two examples I
> > > mentioned).
> > >
> > Added "Tests the API contract and implementation correctness of sysctl."
>
> Yes, much clearer, thanks!
Cheers!
^ permalink raw reply
* Re: [PATCH v5 01/18] kunit: test: add KUnit test runner core
From: Brendan Higgins @ 2019-06-28 8:09 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Stephen Boyd
Cc: Frank Rowand, Greg KH, Josh Poimboeuf, Kees Cook, Kieran Bingham,
Luis Chamberlain, Peter Zijlstra, Rob Herring, shuah,
Theodore Ts'o, Masahiro Yamada, devicetree, dri-devel,
kunit-dev, open list:DOCUMENTATION, linux-fsdevel, linux-kbuild,
Linux Kernel Mailing List, open list:KERNEL SELFTEST FRAMEWORK,
linux-nvdimm, linux-um, Sasha Levin, Bird, Timothy,
Amir Goldstein, Dan Carpenter, Daniel Vetter, Jeff Dike,
Joel Stanley, Julia Lawall, Kevin Hilman, Knut Omang,
Logan Gunthorpe, Michael Ellerman, Petr Mladek, Randy Dunlap,
Richard Weinberger, David Rientjes, Steven Rostedt, wfg
In-Reply-To: <20190627181636.5EA752064A@mail.kernel.org>
On Thu, Jun 27, 2019 at 11:16 AM Stephen Boyd <sboyd@kernel.org> wrote:
>
> Quoting Brendan Higgins (2019-06-26 16:00:40)
> > On Tue, Jun 25, 2019 at 8:41 PM Stephen Boyd <sboyd@kernel.org> wrote:
> >
> > > scenario like below, but where it is a problem. There could be three
> > > CPUs, or even one CPU and three threads if you want to describe the
> > > extra thread scenario.
> > >
> > > Here's my scenario where it isn't needed:
> > >
> > > CPU0 CPU1
> > > ---- ----
> > > kunit_run_test(&test)
> > > test_case_func()
> > > ....
> > > [mock hardirq]
> > > kunit_set_success(&test)
> > > [hardirq ends]
> > > ...
> > > complete(&test_done)
> > > wait_for_completion(&test_done)
> > > kunit_get_success(&test)
> > >
> > > We don't need to care about having locking here because success or
> > > failure only happens in one place and it's synchronized with the
> > > completion.
> >
> > Here is the scenario I am concerned about:
> >
> > CPU0 CPU1 CPU2
> > ---- ---- ----
> > kunit_run_test(&test)
> > test_case_func()
> > ....
> > schedule_work(foo_func)
> > [mock hardirq] foo_func()
> > ... ...
> > kunit_set_success(false) kunit_set_success(false)
> > [hardirq ends] ...
> > ...
> > complete(&test_done)
> > wait_for_completion(...)
> > kunit_get_success(&test)
> >
> > In my scenario, since both CPU1 and CPU2 update the success status of
> > the test simultaneously, even though they are setting it to the same
> > value. If my understanding is correct, this could result in a
> > write-tear on some architectures in some circumstances. I suppose we
> > could just make it an atomic boolean, but I figured locking is also
> > fine, and generally preferred.
>
> This is what we have WRITE_ONCE() and READ_ONCE() for. Maybe you could
> just use that in the getter and setters and remove the lock if it isn't
> used for anything else.
>
> It may also be a good idea to have a kunit_fail_test() API that fails
> the test passed in with a WRITE_ONCE(false). Otherwise, the test is
> assumed successful and it isn't even possible for a test to change the
> state from failure to success due to a logical error because the API
> isn't available. Then we don't really need to have a generic
> kunit_set_success() function at all. We could have a kunit_test_failed()
> function too that replaces the kunit_get_success() function. That would
> read better in an if condition.
You know what, I think you are right.
Sorry, for not realizing this earlier, I think you mentioned something
along these lines a long time ago.
Thanks for your patience!
> >
> > Also, to be clear, I am onboard with dropping then IRQ stuff for now.
> > I am fine moving to a mutex for the time being.
> >
>
> Ok.
Thanks!
^ permalink raw reply
* Re: [PATCH 2/2] drivers/perf: Add CCPI2 PMU support in ThunderX2 UNCORE driver.
From: Will Deacon @ 2019-06-28 9:08 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Ganapatrao Kulkarni
Cc: Ganapatrao Kulkarni, linux-doc@vger.kernel.org,
linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org,
linux-arm-kernel@lists.infradead.org, Will.Deacon@arm.com,
mark.rutland@arm.com, corbet@lwn.net, jnair, rrichter, jglauber
In-Reply-To: <CAKTKpr7PXFzQBHrJt+Ko=JaB+-5FdpNu+ByfkWmAm8OeiPem3w@mail.gmail.com>
Hi again, Ganapat,
Thanks for the quick reply.
On Fri, Jun 28, 2019 at 11:09:33AM +0530, Ganapatrao Kulkarni wrote:
> On Thu, Jun 27, 2019 at 3:27 PM Will Deacon <will@kernel.org> wrote:
> > On Fri, Jun 14, 2019 at 05:42:46PM +0000, Ganapatrao Kulkarni wrote:
> > > CCPI2 is a low-latency high-bandwidth serial interface for connecting
> > > ThunderX2 processors. This patch adds support to capture CCPI2 perf events.
> > >
> > > Signed-off-by: Ganapatrao Kulkarni <gkulkarni@marvell.com>
> > > ---
> > > drivers/perf/thunderx2_pmu.c | 179 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++-----
> > > 1 file changed, 157 insertions(+), 22 deletions(-)
> > >
> > > diff --git a/drivers/perf/thunderx2_pmu.c b/drivers/perf/thunderx2_pmu.c
> > > index 43d76c85da56..3791ac9b897d 100644
> > > --- a/drivers/perf/thunderx2_pmu.c
> > > +++ b/drivers/perf/thunderx2_pmu.c
> > > @@ -16,7 +16,9 @@
> > > * they need to be sampled before overflow(i.e, at every 2 seconds).
> > > */
> > >
> > > -#define TX2_PMU_MAX_COUNTERS 4
> > > +#define TX2_PMU_DMC_L3C_MAX_COUNTERS 4
> >
> > I find it odd that you rename this...
>
> i am not sure, how to avoid this since dmc/l3c have 4 counters and ccpi2 has 8.
> i will try to make this better in v2.
> >
> > > +#define TX2_PMU_CCPI2_MAX_COUNTERS 8
> > > +
> > > #define TX2_PMU_DMC_CHANNELS 8
> > > #define TX2_PMU_L3_TILES 16
> > >
> > > @@ -28,11 +30,22 @@
> > > */
> > > #define DMC_EVENT_CFG(idx, val) ((val) << (((idx) * 8) + 1))
> > >
> > > +#define GET_EVENTID_CCPI2(ev) ((ev->hw.config) & 0x1ff)
> > > +/* bits[3:0] to select counters, starts from 8, bit[3] set always. */
> > > +#define GET_COUNTERID_CCPI2(ev) ((ev->hw.idx) & 0x7)
> > > +#define CCPI2_COUNTER_OFFSET 8
> >
> >
> > ... but leave GET_EVENTID alone, even though it only applies to DMC/L3C
> > events. Saying that, if you have the event you can figure out its type,
> > so could you avoid the need for additional macros entirely and just use
> > the correct masks based on the corresponding PMU type? That might also
> > avoid some of the conditional control flow you're introducing elsewhere.
>
> sure, i will add mask as argument to macro.
> >
> > > #define L3C_COUNTER_CTL 0xA8
> > > #define L3C_COUNTER_DATA 0xAC
> > > #define DMC_COUNTER_CTL 0x234
> > > #define DMC_COUNTER_DATA 0x240
> > >
> > > +#define CCPI2_PERF_CTL 0x108
> > > +#define CCPI2_COUNTER_CTL 0x10C
> > > +#define CCPI2_COUNTER_SEL 0x12c
> > > +#define CCPI2_COUNTER_DATA_L 0x130
> > > +#define CCPI2_COUNTER_DATA_H 0x134
> > > +
> > > /* L3C event IDs */
> > > #define L3_EVENT_READ_REQ 0xD
> > > #define L3_EVENT_WRITEBACK_REQ 0xE
> > > @@ -51,9 +64,16 @@
> > > #define DMC_EVENT_READ_TXNS 0xF
> > > #define DMC_EVENT_MAX 0x10
> > >
> > > +#define CCPI2_EVENT_REQ_PKT_SENT 0x3D
> > > +#define CCPI2_EVENT_SNOOP_PKT_SENT 0x65
> > > +#define CCPI2_EVENT_DATA_PKT_SENT 0x105
> > > +#define CCPI2_EVENT_GIC_PKT_SENT 0x12D
> > > +#define CCPI2_EVENT_MAX 0x200
> > > +
> > > enum tx2_uncore_type {
> > > PMU_TYPE_L3C,
> > > PMU_TYPE_DMC,
> > > + PMU_TYPE_CCPI2,
> > > PMU_TYPE_INVALID,
> > > };
> > >
> > > @@ -73,8 +93,8 @@ struct tx2_uncore_pmu {
> > > u32 max_events;
> > > u64 hrtimer_interval;
> > > void __iomem *base;
> > > - DECLARE_BITMAP(active_counters, TX2_PMU_MAX_COUNTERS);
> > > - struct perf_event *events[TX2_PMU_MAX_COUNTERS];
> > > + DECLARE_BITMAP(active_counters, TX2_PMU_CCPI2_MAX_COUNTERS);
> > > + struct perf_event *events[TX2_PMU_DMC_L3C_MAX_COUNTERS];
> >
> > Hmm, that looks very odd. Why are they now different sizes?
>
> events[ ] is used to hold reference to active events to use in timer
> callback, which is not applicable to ccpi2, hence 4.
> active_counters is set to max of both. i.e, 8. i will try to make it
> better readable in v2.
Thanks. I suspect renaming the field would help a lot, or perhaps reworking
your data structures so that you have a union of ccpi2 and dmc/l2c
structures where necessary.
> > > struct device *dev;
> > > struct hrtimer hrtimer;
> > > const struct attribute_group **attr_groups;
> > > @@ -92,7 +112,21 @@ static inline struct tx2_uncore_pmu *pmu_to_tx2_pmu(struct pmu *pmu)
> > > return container_of(pmu, struct tx2_uncore_pmu, pmu);
> > > }
> > >
> > > -PMU_FORMAT_ATTR(event, "config:0-4");
> > > +#define TX2_PMU_FORMAT_ATTR(_var, _name, _format) \
> > > +static ssize_t \
> > > +__tx2_pmu_##_var##_show(struct device *dev, \
> > > + struct device_attribute *attr, \
> > > + char *page) \
> > > +{ \
> > > + BUILD_BUG_ON(sizeof(_format) >= PAGE_SIZE); \
> > > + return sprintf(page, _format "\n"); \
> > > +} \
> > > + \
> > > +static struct device_attribute format_attr_##_var = \
> > > + __ATTR(_name, 0444, __tx2_pmu_##_var##_show, NULL)
> > > +
> > > +TX2_PMU_FORMAT_ATTR(event, event, "config:0-4");
> > > +TX2_PMU_FORMAT_ATTR(event_ccpi2, event, "config:0-9");
> >
> > This doesn't look right. Can perf deal with overlapping fields? It seems
> > wrong that we'd allow the user to specify both, for example.
>
> I am not sure what is the issue here? both are different PMUs
> root@SBR-26> cat /sys/bus/event_source/devices/uncore_dmc_0/format/event
> config:0-4
> root@SBR-26> cat /sys/bus/event_source/devices/uncore_ccpi2_0/format/event
> config:0-9
Ah, sorry about that. I got _var and _name the wrong way around and thought
you were introducing a file called event_ccpi2! What you have looks fine.
Will
^ permalink raw reply
* [PATCH 3/9] docs: signal: fix a kernel-doc markup
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-28 12:12 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet
In-Reply-To: <cover.1561723736.git.mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
The kernel-doc parser doesn't handle expressions with %foo*.
Instead, when an asterisk should be part of a constant, it
uses an alternative notation: `foo*`.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
kernel/signal.c | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/kernel/signal.c b/kernel/signal.c
index 91b789dd6e72..10a826855b59 100644
--- a/kernel/signal.c
+++ b/kernel/signal.c
@@ -349,7 +349,7 @@ void task_clear_jobctl_pending(struct task_struct *task, unsigned long mask)
* @task has %JOBCTL_STOP_PENDING set and is participating in a group stop.
* Group stop states are cleared and the group stop count is consumed if
* %JOBCTL_STOP_CONSUME was set. If the consumption completes the group
- * stop, the appropriate %SIGNAL_* flags are set.
+ * stop, the appropriate `SIGNAL_*` flags are set.
*
* CONTEXT:
* Must be called with @task->sighand->siglock held.
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related
* [PATCH 0/9] Some doc fixes
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-28 12:12 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet, Maarten Lankhorst, linux-leds, kvm,
Radim Krčmář, dri-devel, intel-gfx,
Joonas Lahtinen, Rob Herring, platform-driver-x86, Paolo Bonzini,
Sean Paul, Darren Hart, Jacek Anaszewski, linux-i2c, Ajay Gupta,
Jani Nikula, Thomas Gleixner, David Airlie, Mark Rutland,
Pavel Machek, Maxime Ripard, Dan Murphy, devicetree,
Andy Shevchenko, Rodrigo Vivi, Daniel Vetter
This patch series is against linux-next (next-20190627). I doubt those
would apply cleanly against docs next tree.
So, please apply it via the subsystem trees. Otherwise, they could
be pushed by the end of the merge window or for -rc1 via a docs tree.
Most, if not all were I already sent.
Mauro Carvalho Chehab (9):
hrtimer: Use a bullet for the returns bullet list
docs: trace: fix a broken label
docs: signal: fix a kernel-doc markup
dt: leds-lm36274.txt: fix a broken reference to ti-lmu.txt
docs: fix some broken references due to txt->rst renames
docs: virtual: there are two orphan docs there
docs: gpu: add msm-crash-dump.rst to the index.rst file
drm: fix a reference for a renamed file: fb/modedb.rst
platform: x86: get rid of a non-existent document
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/idle-states.txt | 2 +-
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-lm36274.txt | 2 +-
Documentation/gpu/drivers.rst | 1 +
Documentation/gpu/msm-crash-dump.rst | 2 --
Documentation/trace/kprobetrace.rst | 1 +
Documentation/virtual/kvm/amd-memory-encryption.rst | 2 ++
Documentation/virtual/kvm/vcpu-requests.rst | 2 ++
drivers/gpu/drm/drm_modes.c | 2 +-
drivers/gpu/drm/i915/intel_runtime_pm.h | 2 +-
drivers/i2c/busses/i2c-nvidia-gpu.c | 2 +-
drivers/platform/x86/Kconfig | 3 ---
kernel/signal.c | 2 +-
kernel/time/hrtimer.c | 7 ++++---
13 files changed, 16 insertions(+), 14 deletions(-)
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply
* [PATCH 6/9] docs: virtual: there are two orphan docs there
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-28 12:12 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet, Paolo Bonzini, Radim Krčmář, kvm
In-Reply-To: <cover.1561723736.git.mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
Documentation/virtual/kvm/amd-memory-encryption.rst | 2 ++
Documentation/virtual/kvm/vcpu-requests.rst | 2 ++
2 files changed, 4 insertions(+)
diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/amd-memory-encryption.rst b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/amd-memory-encryption.rst
index d18c97b4e140..6c37ff9a0a3c 100644
--- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/amd-memory-encryption.rst
+++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/amd-memory-encryption.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,5 @@
+:orphan:
+
======================================
Secure Encrypted Virtualization (SEV)
======================================
diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/vcpu-requests.rst b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/vcpu-requests.rst
index 5feb3706a7ae..c1807a1b92e6 100644
--- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/vcpu-requests.rst
+++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/vcpu-requests.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,5 @@
+:orphan:
+
=================
KVM VCPU Requests
=================
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related
* [PATCH 5/9] docs: fix some broken references due to txt->rst renames
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-28 12:12 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet, Rob Herring, Mark Rutland, Jani Nikula,
Joonas Lahtinen, Rodrigo Vivi, David Airlie, Daniel Vetter,
Ajay Gupta, devicetree, intel-gfx, dri-devel, linux-i2c,
Wolfram Sang, Daniel Vetter
In-Reply-To: <cover.1561723736.git.mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
There are three left-overs from the recent file renames,
probably due to some other conflicting patch.
Fix them.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
Acked-by: Wolfram Sang <wsa@the-dreams.de>
Acked-by: Daniel Vetter <daniel.vetter@ffwll.ch>
---
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/idle-states.txt | 2 +-
drivers/gpu/drm/i915/intel_runtime_pm.h | 2 +-
drivers/i2c/busses/i2c-nvidia-gpu.c | 2 +-
3 files changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/idle-states.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/idle-states.txt
index 3bdbe675b9e6..d8d9aa7167e8 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/idle-states.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/idle-states.txt
@@ -703,4 +703,4 @@ cpus {
https://www.devicetree.org/specifications/
[6] ARM Linux Kernel documentation - Booting AArch64 Linux
- Documentation/arm64/booting.txt
+ Documentation/arm64/booting.rst
diff --git a/drivers/gpu/drm/i915/intel_runtime_pm.h b/drivers/gpu/drm/i915/intel_runtime_pm.h
index 473c4850c01d..2ee8f9522e05 100644
--- a/drivers/gpu/drm/i915/intel_runtime_pm.h
+++ b/drivers/gpu/drm/i915/intel_runtime_pm.h
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ enum i915_drm_suspend_mode {
* to be disabled. This shouldn't happen and we'll print some error messages in
* case it happens.
*
- * For more, read the Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt.
+ * For more, read the Documentation/power/runtime_pm.rst.
*/
struct intel_runtime_pm {
atomic_t wakeref_count;
diff --git a/drivers/i2c/busses/i2c-nvidia-gpu.c b/drivers/i2c/busses/i2c-nvidia-gpu.c
index cfc76b5de726..5a1235fd86bb 100644
--- a/drivers/i2c/busses/i2c-nvidia-gpu.c
+++ b/drivers/i2c/busses/i2c-nvidia-gpu.c
@@ -364,7 +364,7 @@ static void gpu_i2c_remove(struct pci_dev *pdev)
/*
* We need gpu_i2c_suspend() even if it is stub, for runtime pm to work
* correctly. Without it, lspci shows runtime pm status as "D0" for the card.
- * Documentation/power/pci.txt also insists for driver to provide this.
+ * Documentation/power/pci.rst also insists for driver to provide this.
*/
static __maybe_unused int gpu_i2c_suspend(struct device *dev)
{
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related
* [PATCH 7/9] docs: gpu: add msm-crash-dump.rst to the index.rst file
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-28 12:12 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet, David Airlie, Daniel Vetter, Maarten Lankhorst,
Maxime Ripard, Sean Paul, dri-devel
In-Reply-To: <cover.1561723736.git.mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
This file is currently orphaned.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
Documentation/gpu/drivers.rst | 1 +
Documentation/gpu/msm-crash-dump.rst | 2 --
2 files changed, 1 insertion(+), 2 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/gpu/drivers.rst b/Documentation/gpu/drivers.rst
index 4bfb7068e9f7..6c88c57b90cf 100644
--- a/Documentation/gpu/drivers.rst
+++ b/Documentation/gpu/drivers.rst
@@ -20,6 +20,7 @@ GPU Driver Documentation
xen-front
afbc
komeda-kms
+ msm-crash-dump
.. only:: subproject and html
diff --git a/Documentation/gpu/msm-crash-dump.rst b/Documentation/gpu/msm-crash-dump.rst
index 240ef200f76c..757cd257e0d8 100644
--- a/Documentation/gpu/msm-crash-dump.rst
+++ b/Documentation/gpu/msm-crash-dump.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,3 @@
-:orphan:
-
=====================
MSM Crash Dump Format
=====================
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related
* [PATCH 8/9] drm: fix a reference for a renamed file: fb/modedb.rst
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-28 12:12 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet, Maarten Lankhorst, Maxime Ripard, Sean Paul,
David Airlie, Daniel Vetter, dri-devel
In-Reply-To: <cover.1561723736.git.mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
Due to two patches being applied about the same time, the
reference for modedb.rst file got wrong:
Documentation/fb/modedb.txt is now Documentation/fb/modedb.rst.
Fixes: 1bf4e09227c3 ("drm/modes: Allow to specify rotation and reflection on the commandline")
Fixes: ab42b818954c ("docs: fb: convert docs to ReST and rename to *.rst")
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
drivers/gpu/drm/drm_modes.c | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/drivers/gpu/drm/drm_modes.c b/drivers/gpu/drm/drm_modes.c
index 57e6408288c8..4645af681ef8 100644
--- a/drivers/gpu/drm/drm_modes.c
+++ b/drivers/gpu/drm/drm_modes.c
@@ -1680,7 +1680,7 @@ static int drm_mode_parse_cmdline_options(char *str, size_t len,
*
* Additionals options can be provided following the mode, using a comma to
* separate each option. Valid options can be found in
- * Documentation/fb/modedb.txt.
+ * Documentation/fb/modedb.rst.
*
* The intermediate drm_cmdline_mode structure is required to store additional
* options from the command line modline like the force-enable/disable flag.
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related
* [PATCH 1/9] hrtimer: Use a bullet for the returns bullet list
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-28 12:12 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet, Thomas Gleixner
In-Reply-To: <cover.1561723736.git.mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
That gets rid of this warning:
./kernel/time/hrtimer.c:1119: WARNING: Block quote ends without a blank line; unexpected unindent.
and displays nicely both at the source code and at the produced
documentation.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
kernel/time/hrtimer.c | 7 ++++---
1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-)
diff --git a/kernel/time/hrtimer.c b/kernel/time/hrtimer.c
index edb230aba3d1..5ee77f1a8a92 100644
--- a/kernel/time/hrtimer.c
+++ b/kernel/time/hrtimer.c
@@ -1114,9 +1114,10 @@ EXPORT_SYMBOL_GPL(hrtimer_start_range_ns);
* @timer: hrtimer to stop
*
* Returns:
- * 0 when the timer was not active
- * 1 when the timer was active
- * -1 when the timer is currently executing the callback function and
+ *
+ * * 0 when the timer was not active
+ * * 1 when the timer was active
+ * * -1 when the timer is currently executing the callback function and
* cannot be stopped
*/
int hrtimer_try_to_cancel(struct hrtimer *timer)
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related
* [PATCH 4/9] dt: leds-lm36274.txt: fix a broken reference to ti-lmu.txt
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-28 12:12 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet, Jacek Anaszewski, Pavel Machek, Dan Murphy,
Rob Herring, Mark Rutland, linux-leds, devicetree
In-Reply-To: <cover.1561723736.git.mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
There's a typo there:
ti_lmu.txt -> ti-lmu.txt
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
Acked-by: Pavel Machek <pavel@ucw.cz>
Acked-by: Dan Murphy <dmurphy@ti.com>
---
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-lm36274.txt | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-lm36274.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-lm36274.txt
index 456a589c65f0..39c230d59a4d 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-lm36274.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-lm36274.txt
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ up to 29V total output voltage. The 11-bit LED current is programmable via
the I2C bus and/or controlled via a logic level PWM input from 60 uA to 30 mA.
Parent device properties are documented in
-Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/ti_lmu.txt
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/ti-lmu.txt
Regulator properties are documented in
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/lm363x-regulator.txt
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related
* [PATCH 9/9] platform: x86: get rid of a non-existent document
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-28 12:12 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet, Darren Hart, Andy Shevchenko,
platform-driver-x86
In-Reply-To: <cover.1561723736.git.mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
Changeset 163ede97a9a2 ("Documentation: platform: Delete x86-laptop-drivers.txt")
removed the x86-laptop-drivers.txt file, but forgot to update its
Kconfig.
Fixes: 163ede97a9a2 ("Documentation: platform: Delete x86-laptop-drivers.txt")
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
drivers/platform/x86/Kconfig | 3 ---
1 file changed, 3 deletions(-)
diff --git a/drivers/platform/x86/Kconfig b/drivers/platform/x86/Kconfig
index bd15b47abcb4..c318501773bc 100644
--- a/drivers/platform/x86/Kconfig
+++ b/drivers/platform/x86/Kconfig
@@ -433,9 +433,6 @@ config COMPAL_LAPTOP
It adds support for rfkill, Bluetooth, WLAN, LCD brightness, hwmon
and battery charging level control.
- For a (possibly incomplete) list of supported laptops, please refer
- to: Documentation/platform/x86-laptop-drivers.txt
-
config SONY_LAPTOP
tristate "Sony Laptop Extras"
depends on ACPI
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related
* [PATCH 2/9] docs: trace: fix a broken label
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-28 12:12 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet, Masami Hiramatsu
In-Reply-To: <cover.1561723736.git.mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
Sphinx warnings about his:
Documentation/trace/kprobetrace.rst:68: WARNING: undefined label: user_mem_access (if the link has no caption the label must precede a section header)
The problem is quite simple: Sphinx wants a blank line after
references.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
Acked-by: Masami Hiramatsu <mhiramat@kernel.org>
---
Documentation/trace/kprobetrace.rst | 1 +
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+)
diff --git a/Documentation/trace/kprobetrace.rst b/Documentation/trace/kprobetrace.rst
index fbb314bfa112..89ba487d4399 100644
--- a/Documentation/trace/kprobetrace.rst
+++ b/Documentation/trace/kprobetrace.rst
@@ -96,6 +96,7 @@ which shows given pointer in "symbol+offset" style.
For $comm, the default type is "string"; any other type is invalid.
.. _user_mem_access:
+
User Memory Access
------------------
Kprobe events supports user-space memory access. For that purpose, you can use
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related
* [PATCH 08/43] docs: lp855x-driver.txt: convert to ReST and move to kernel-api
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-28 12:20 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet
In-Reply-To: <cover.1561723979.git.mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
This small file seems to be an attempt to start documenting
backlight drivers.
It contains descriptions of the controls for the driver
with could sound as an somewhat user-faced description, but
it's main focus is to describe, instead, the data that should
be passed via platform data and some driver-specific stuff.
While this is not part of the driver-api book, mark it as
:orphan:, in order to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
Documentation/backlight/lp855x-driver.rst | 83 +++++++++++++++++++++++
Documentation/backlight/lp855x-driver.txt | 66 ------------------
MAINTAINERS | 2 +-
3 files changed, 84 insertions(+), 67 deletions(-)
create mode 100644 Documentation/backlight/lp855x-driver.rst
delete mode 100644 Documentation/backlight/lp855x-driver.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/backlight/lp855x-driver.rst b/Documentation/backlight/lp855x-driver.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..62b7ed847a77
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/backlight/lp855x-driver.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+:orphan:
+
+====================
+Kernel driver lp855x
+====================
+
+Backlight driver for LP855x ICs
+
+Supported chips:
+
+ Texas Instruments LP8550, LP8551, LP8552, LP8553, LP8555, LP8556 and
+ LP8557
+
+Author: Milo(Woogyom) Kim <milo.kim@ti.com>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+* Brightness control
+
+ Brightness can be controlled by the pwm input or the i2c command.
+ The lp855x driver supports both cases.
+
+* Device attributes
+
+ 1) bl_ctl_mode
+
+ Backlight control mode.
+
+ Value: pwm based or register based
+
+ 2) chip_id
+
+ The lp855x chip id.
+
+ Value: lp8550/lp8551/lp8552/lp8553/lp8555/lp8556/lp8557
+
+Platform data for lp855x
+------------------------
+
+For supporting platform specific data, the lp855x platform data can be used.
+
+* name:
+ Backlight driver name. If it is not defined, default name is set.
+* device_control:
+ Value of DEVICE CONTROL register.
+* initial_brightness:
+ Initial value of backlight brightness.
+* period_ns:
+ Platform specific PWM period value. unit is nano.
+ Only valid when brightness is pwm input mode.
+* size_program:
+ Total size of lp855x_rom_data.
+* rom_data:
+ List of new eeprom/eprom registers.
+
+Examples
+========
+
+1) lp8552 platform data: i2c register mode with new eeprom data::
+
+ #define EEPROM_A5_ADDR 0xA5
+ #define EEPROM_A5_VAL 0x4f /* EN_VSYNC=0 */
+
+ static struct lp855x_rom_data lp8552_eeprom_arr[] = {
+ {EEPROM_A5_ADDR, EEPROM_A5_VAL},
+ };
+
+ static struct lp855x_platform_data lp8552_pdata = {
+ .name = "lcd-bl",
+ .device_control = I2C_CONFIG(LP8552),
+ .initial_brightness = INITIAL_BRT,
+ .size_program = ARRAY_SIZE(lp8552_eeprom_arr),
+ .rom_data = lp8552_eeprom_arr,
+ };
+
+2) lp8556 platform data: pwm input mode with default rom data::
+
+ static struct lp855x_platform_data lp8556_pdata = {
+ .device_control = PWM_CONFIG(LP8556),
+ .initial_brightness = INITIAL_BRT,
+ .period_ns = 1000000,
+ };
diff --git a/Documentation/backlight/lp855x-driver.txt b/Documentation/backlight/lp855x-driver.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 01bce243d3d7..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/backlight/lp855x-driver.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,66 +0,0 @@
-Kernel driver lp855x
-====================
-
-Backlight driver for LP855x ICs
-
-Supported chips:
- Texas Instruments LP8550, LP8551, LP8552, LP8553, LP8555, LP8556 and
- LP8557
-
-Author: Milo(Woogyom) Kim <milo.kim@ti.com>
-
-Description
------------
-
-* Brightness control
-
-Brightness can be controlled by the pwm input or the i2c command.
-The lp855x driver supports both cases.
-
-* Device attributes
-
-1) bl_ctl_mode
-Backlight control mode.
-Value : pwm based or register based
-
-2) chip_id
-The lp855x chip id.
-Value : lp8550/lp8551/lp8552/lp8553/lp8555/lp8556/lp8557
-
-Platform data for lp855x
-------------------------
-
-For supporting platform specific data, the lp855x platform data can be used.
-
-* name : Backlight driver name. If it is not defined, default name is set.
-* device_control : Value of DEVICE CONTROL register.
-* initial_brightness : Initial value of backlight brightness.
-* period_ns : Platform specific PWM period value. unit is nano.
- Only valid when brightness is pwm input mode.
-* size_program : Total size of lp855x_rom_data.
-* rom_data : List of new eeprom/eprom registers.
-
-example 1) lp8552 platform data : i2c register mode with new eeprom data
-
-#define EEPROM_A5_ADDR 0xA5
-#define EEPROM_A5_VAL 0x4f /* EN_VSYNC=0 */
-
-static struct lp855x_rom_data lp8552_eeprom_arr[] = {
- {EEPROM_A5_ADDR, EEPROM_A5_VAL},
-};
-
-static struct lp855x_platform_data lp8552_pdata = {
- .name = "lcd-bl",
- .device_control = I2C_CONFIG(LP8552),
- .initial_brightness = INITIAL_BRT,
- .size_program = ARRAY_SIZE(lp8552_eeprom_arr),
- .rom_data = lp8552_eeprom_arr,
-};
-
-example 2) lp8556 platform data : pwm input mode with default rom data
-
-static struct lp855x_platform_data lp8556_pdata = {
- .device_control = PWM_CONFIG(LP8556),
- .initial_brightness = INITIAL_BRT,
- .period_ns = 1000000,
-};
diff --git a/MAINTAINERS b/MAINTAINERS
index 1606f6cac24d..e909436a2fa3 100644
--- a/MAINTAINERS
+++ b/MAINTAINERS
@@ -15906,7 +15906,7 @@ F: sound/soc/codecs/isabelle*
TI LP855x BACKLIGHT DRIVER
M: Milo Kim <milo.kim@ti.com>
S: Maintained
-F: Documentation/backlight/lp855x-driver.txt
+F: Documentation/backlight/lp855x-driver.rst
F: drivers/video/backlight/lp855x_bl.c
F: include/linux/platform_data/lp855x.h
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related
* [PATCH 20/43] docs: rbtree.txt: fix Sphinx build warnings
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-28 12:20 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet
In-Reply-To: <cover.1561723979.git.mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
Ths file is already at ReST format. Yet, some recent changes
made it to produce a few warnings when building it with
Sphinx.
Those are trivially fixed by marking some literal blocks.
Fix them before adding it to the docs building system.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
Documentation/rbtree.txt | 6 +++---
1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/rbtree.txt b/Documentation/rbtree.txt
index c42a21b99046..523d54b60087 100644
--- a/Documentation/rbtree.txt
+++ b/Documentation/rbtree.txt
@@ -204,21 +204,21 @@ potentially expensive tree iterations. This is done at negligible runtime
overhead for maintanence; albeit larger memory footprint.
Similar to the rb_root structure, cached rbtrees are initialized to be
-empty via:
+empty via::
struct rb_root_cached mytree = RB_ROOT_CACHED;
Cached rbtree is simply a regular rb_root with an extra pointer to cache the
leftmost node. This allows rb_root_cached to exist wherever rb_root does,
which permits augmented trees to be supported as well as only a few extra
-interfaces:
+interfaces::
struct rb_node *rb_first_cached(struct rb_root_cached *tree);
void rb_insert_color_cached(struct rb_node *, struct rb_root_cached *, bool);
void rb_erase_cached(struct rb_node *node, struct rb_root_cached *);
Both insert and erase calls have their respective counterpart of augmented
-trees:
+trees::
void rb_insert_augmented_cached(struct rb_node *node, struct rb_root_cached *,
bool, struct rb_augment_callbacks *);
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related
* [PATCH 11/43] docs: console.txt: convert docs to ReST and rename to *.rst
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-28 12:20 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet, Bartlomiej Zolnierkiewicz, Greg Kroah-Hartman,
Jiri Slaby, dri-devel, linux-fbdev
In-Reply-To: <cover.1561723979.git.mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
Convert this small file to ReST in preparation for adding it to
the driver-api book.
While this is not part of the driver-api book, mark it as
:orphan:, in order to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
Acked-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org>
---
.../console/{console.txt => console.rst} | 63 ++++++++++---------
Documentation/fb/fbcon.rst | 4 +-
drivers/tty/Kconfig | 2 +-
3 files changed, 38 insertions(+), 31 deletions(-)
rename Documentation/console/{console.txt => console.rst} (80%)
diff --git a/Documentation/console/console.txt b/Documentation/console/console.rst
similarity index 80%
rename from Documentation/console/console.txt
rename to Documentation/console/console.rst
index d73c2ab4beda..b374141b027e 100644
--- a/Documentation/console/console.txt
+++ b/Documentation/console/console.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,6 @@
+:orphan:
+
+===============
Console Drivers
===============
@@ -17,25 +20,26 @@ of driver occupying the consoles.) They can only take over the console that is
occupied by the system driver. In the same token, if the modular driver is
released by the console, the system driver will take over.
-Modular drivers, from the programmer's point of view, have to call:
+Modular drivers, from the programmer's point of view, have to call::
do_take_over_console() - load and bind driver to console layer
give_up_console() - unload driver; it will only work if driver
is fully unbound
-In newer kernels, the following are also available:
+In newer kernels, the following are also available::
do_register_con_driver()
do_unregister_con_driver()
If sysfs is enabled, the contents of /sys/class/vtconsole can be
examined. This shows the console backends currently registered by the
-system which are named vtcon<n> where <n> is an integer from 0 to 15. Thus:
+system which are named vtcon<n> where <n> is an integer from 0 to 15.
+Thus::
ls /sys/class/vtconsole
. .. vtcon0 vtcon1
-Each directory in /sys/class/vtconsole has 3 files:
+Each directory in /sys/class/vtconsole has 3 files::
ls /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon0
. .. bind name uevent
@@ -46,27 +50,29 @@ What do these files signify?
read, or acts to bind or unbind the driver to the virtual consoles
when written to. The possible values are:
- 0 - means the driver is not bound and if echo'ed, commands the driver
+ 0
+ - means the driver is not bound and if echo'ed, commands the driver
to unbind
- 1 - means the driver is bound and if echo'ed, commands the driver to
+ 1
+ - means the driver is bound and if echo'ed, commands the driver to
bind
- 2. name - read-only file. Shows the name of the driver in this format:
+ 2. name - read-only file. Shows the name of the driver in this format::
- cat /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon0/name
- (S) VGA+
+ cat /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon0/name
+ (S) VGA+
- '(S)' stands for a (S)ystem driver, i.e., it cannot be directly
- commanded to bind or unbind
+ '(S)' stands for a (S)ystem driver, i.e., it cannot be directly
+ commanded to bind or unbind
- 'VGA+' is the name of the driver
+ 'VGA+' is the name of the driver
- cat /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon1/name
- (M) frame buffer device
+ cat /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon1/name
+ (M) frame buffer device
- In this case, '(M)' stands for a (M)odular driver, one that can be
- directly commanded to bind or unbind.
+ In this case, '(M)' stands for a (M)odular driver, one that can be
+ directly commanded to bind or unbind.
3. uevent - ignore this file
@@ -75,14 +81,17 @@ driver takes over the consoles vacated by the driver. Binding, on the other
hand, will bind the driver to the consoles that are currently occupied by a
system driver.
-NOTE1: Binding and unbinding must be selected in Kconfig. It's under:
+NOTE1:
+ Binding and unbinding must be selected in Kconfig. It's under::
-Device Drivers -> Character devices -> Support for binding and unbinding
-console drivers
+ Device Drivers ->
+ Character devices ->
+ Support for binding and unbinding console drivers
-NOTE2: If any of the virtual consoles are in KD_GRAPHICS mode, then binding or
-unbinding will not succeed. An example of an application that sets the console
-to KD_GRAPHICS is X.
+NOTE2:
+ If any of the virtual consoles are in KD_GRAPHICS mode, then binding or
+ unbinding will not succeed. An example of an application that sets the
+ console to KD_GRAPHICS is X.
How useful is this feature? This is very useful for console driver
developers. By unbinding the driver from the console layer, one can unload the
@@ -92,10 +101,10 @@ framebuffer console to VGA console and vice versa, this feature also makes
this possible. (NOTE NOTE NOTE: Please read fbcon.txt under Documentation/fb
for more details.)
-Notes for developers:
-=====================
+Notes for developers
+====================
-do_take_over_console() is now broken up into:
+do_take_over_console() is now broken up into::
do_register_con_driver()
do_bind_con_driver() - private function
@@ -104,7 +113,7 @@ give_up_console() is a wrapper to do_unregister_con_driver(), and a driver must
be fully unbound for this call to succeed. con_is_bound() will check if the
driver is bound or not.
-Guidelines for console driver writers:
+Guidelines for console driver writers
=====================================
In order for binding to and unbinding from the console to properly work,
@@ -140,6 +149,4 @@ The current crop of console drivers should still work correctly, but binding
and unbinding them may cause problems. With minimal fixes, these drivers can
be made to work correctly.
-==========================
Antonino Daplas <adaplas@pol.net>
-
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/fbcon.rst b/Documentation/fb/fbcon.rst
index 1da65b9000de..26bc5cdaabab 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/fbcon.rst
+++ b/Documentation/fb/fbcon.rst
@@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ the hardware. Thus, in a VGA console::
Assuming the VGA driver can be unloaded, one must first unbind the VGA driver
from the console layer before unloading the driver. The VGA driver cannot be
unloaded if it is still bound to the console layer. (See
-Documentation/console/console.txt for more information).
+Documentation/console/console.rst for more information).
This is more complicated in the case of the framebuffer console (fbcon),
because fbcon is an intermediate layer between the console and the drivers::
@@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ fbcon. Thus, there is no need to explicitly unbind the fbdev drivers from
fbcon.
So, how do we unbind fbcon from the console? Part of the answer is in
-Documentation/console/console.txt. To summarize:
+Documentation/console/console.rst. To summarize:
Echo a value to the bind file that represents the framebuffer console
driver. So assuming vtcon1 represents fbcon, then::
diff --git a/drivers/tty/Kconfig b/drivers/tty/Kconfig
index 0e3e4dacbc12..1cb50f19d58c 100644
--- a/drivers/tty/Kconfig
+++ b/drivers/tty/Kconfig
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ config VT_HW_CONSOLE_BINDING
select the console driver that will serve as the backend for the
virtual terminals.
- See <file:Documentation/console/console.txt> for more
+ See <file:Documentation/console/console.rst> for more
information. For framebuffer console users, please refer to
<file:Documentation/fb/fbcon.rst>.
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related
* [PATCH 42/43] docs: move gcc_plugins.txt to core-api and rename to .rst
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-28 12:20 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet, Kees Cook, Emese Revfy
In-Reply-To: <cover.1561723979.git.mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
The gcc_plugins.txt file is already a ReST file. Move it
to the core-api book while renaming it.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
Documentation/{gcc-plugins.txt => core-api/gcc-plugins.rst} | 0
Documentation/core-api/index.rst | 2 +-
MAINTAINERS | 2 +-
scripts/gcc-plugins/Kconfig | 2 +-
4 files changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-)
rename Documentation/{gcc-plugins.txt => core-api/gcc-plugins.rst} (100%)
diff --git a/Documentation/gcc-plugins.txt b/Documentation/core-api/gcc-plugins.rst
similarity index 100%
rename from Documentation/gcc-plugins.txt
rename to Documentation/core-api/gcc-plugins.rst
diff --git a/Documentation/core-api/index.rst b/Documentation/core-api/index.rst
index 2466a4c51031..d1e5b95bf86d 100644
--- a/Documentation/core-api/index.rst
+++ b/Documentation/core-api/index.rst
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ Core utilities
boot-time-mm
memory-hotplug
protection-keys
-
+ gcc-plugins
Interfaces for kernel debugging
===============================
diff --git a/MAINTAINERS b/MAINTAINERS
index 2cf8abf6d48e..7ba6d174f49f 100644
--- a/MAINTAINERS
+++ b/MAINTAINERS
@@ -6609,7 +6609,7 @@ S: Maintained
F: scripts/gcc-plugins/
F: scripts/gcc-plugin.sh
F: scripts/Makefile.gcc-plugins
-F: Documentation/gcc-plugins.txt
+F: Documentation/core-api/gcc-plugins.rst
GASKET DRIVER FRAMEWORK
M: Rob Springer <rspringer@google.com>
diff --git a/scripts/gcc-plugins/Kconfig b/scripts/gcc-plugins/Kconfig
index e9c677a53c74..d33de0b9f4f5 100644
--- a/scripts/gcc-plugins/Kconfig
+++ b/scripts/gcc-plugins/Kconfig
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ config GCC_PLUGINS
GCC plugins are loadable modules that provide extra features to the
compiler. They are useful for runtime instrumentation and static analysis.
- See Documentation/gcc-plugins.txt for details.
+ See Documentation/core-api/gcc-plugins.rst for details.
menu "GCC plugins"
depends on GCC_PLUGINS
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related
* [PATCH 36/43] docs: rapidio: convert to ReST
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-28 12:20 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet, Matt Porter, Alexandre Bounine
In-Reply-To: <cover.1561723979.git.mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
Rename the rapidio documentation files to ReST, add an
index for them and adjust in order to produce a nice html
output via the Sphinx build system.
At its new index.rst, let's add a :orphan: while this is not linked to
the main index.rst file, in order to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
Documentation/rapidio/index.rst | 15 +++++
.../{mport_cdev.txt => mport_cdev.rst} | 47 ++++++-------
.../rapidio/{rapidio.txt => rapidio.rst} | 39 +++++++----
.../rapidio/{rio_cm.txt => rio_cm.rst} | 66 ++++++++++++-------
.../rapidio/{sysfs.txt => sysfs.rst} | 4 ++
.../rapidio/{tsi721.txt => tsi721.rst} | 45 ++++++++-----
drivers/rapidio/Kconfig | 2 +-
7 files changed, 141 insertions(+), 77 deletions(-)
create mode 100644 Documentation/rapidio/index.rst
rename Documentation/rapidio/{mport_cdev.txt => mport_cdev.rst} (84%)
rename Documentation/rapidio/{rapidio.txt => rapidio.rst} (97%)
rename Documentation/rapidio/{rio_cm.txt => rio_cm.rst} (76%)
rename Documentation/rapidio/{sysfs.txt => sysfs.rst} (75%)
rename Documentation/rapidio/{tsi721.txt => tsi721.rst} (79%)
diff --git a/Documentation/rapidio/index.rst b/Documentation/rapidio/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ab7b5541b346
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/rapidio/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+:orphan:
+
+===========================
+The Linux RapidIO Subsystem
+===========================
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 1
+
+ rapidio
+ sysfs
+
+ tsi721
+ mport_cdev
+ rio_cm
diff --git a/Documentation/rapidio/mport_cdev.txt b/Documentation/rapidio/mport_cdev.rst
similarity index 84%
rename from Documentation/rapidio/mport_cdev.txt
rename to Documentation/rapidio/mport_cdev.rst
index a53f786ee2e9..df77a7f7be7d 100644
--- a/Documentation/rapidio/mport_cdev.txt
+++ b/Documentation/rapidio/mport_cdev.rst
@@ -1,13 +1,9 @@
+==================================================================
RapidIO subsystem mport character device driver (rio_mport_cdev.c)
==================================================================
-Version History:
-----------------
- 1.0.0 - Initial driver release.
-
-==================================================================
-
-I. Overview
+1. Overview
+===========
This device driver is the result of collaboration within the RapidIO.org
Software Task Group (STG) between Texas Instruments, Freescale,
@@ -29,40 +25,41 @@ Using available set of ioctl commands user-space applications can perform
following RapidIO bus and subsystem operations:
- Reads and writes from/to configuration registers of mport devices
- (RIO_MPORT_MAINT_READ_LOCAL/RIO_MPORT_MAINT_WRITE_LOCAL)
+ (RIO_MPORT_MAINT_READ_LOCAL/RIO_MPORT_MAINT_WRITE_LOCAL)
- Reads and writes from/to configuration registers of remote RapidIO devices.
This operations are defined as RapidIO Maintenance reads/writes in RIO spec.
- (RIO_MPORT_MAINT_READ_REMOTE/RIO_MPORT_MAINT_WRITE_REMOTE)
+ (RIO_MPORT_MAINT_READ_REMOTE/RIO_MPORT_MAINT_WRITE_REMOTE)
- Set RapidIO Destination ID for mport devices (RIO_MPORT_MAINT_HDID_SET)
- Set RapidIO Component Tag for mport devices (RIO_MPORT_MAINT_COMPTAG_SET)
- Query logical index of mport devices (RIO_MPORT_MAINT_PORT_IDX_GET)
- Query capabilities and RapidIO link configuration of mport devices
- (RIO_MPORT_GET_PROPERTIES)
+ (RIO_MPORT_GET_PROPERTIES)
- Enable/Disable reporting of RapidIO doorbell events to user-space applications
- (RIO_ENABLE_DOORBELL_RANGE/RIO_DISABLE_DOORBELL_RANGE)
+ (RIO_ENABLE_DOORBELL_RANGE/RIO_DISABLE_DOORBELL_RANGE)
- Enable/Disable reporting of RIO port-write events to user-space applications
- (RIO_ENABLE_PORTWRITE_RANGE/RIO_DISABLE_PORTWRITE_RANGE)
+ (RIO_ENABLE_PORTWRITE_RANGE/RIO_DISABLE_PORTWRITE_RANGE)
- Query/Control type of events reported through this driver: doorbells,
port-writes or both (RIO_SET_EVENT_MASK/RIO_GET_EVENT_MASK)
- Configure/Map mport's outbound requests window(s) for specific size,
RapidIO destination ID, hopcount and request type
- (RIO_MAP_OUTBOUND/RIO_UNMAP_OUTBOUND)
+ (RIO_MAP_OUTBOUND/RIO_UNMAP_OUTBOUND)
- Configure/Map mport's inbound requests window(s) for specific size,
RapidIO base address and local memory base address
- (RIO_MAP_INBOUND/RIO_UNMAP_INBOUND)
+ (RIO_MAP_INBOUND/RIO_UNMAP_INBOUND)
- Allocate/Free contiguous DMA coherent memory buffer for DMA data transfers
to/from remote RapidIO devices (RIO_ALLOC_DMA/RIO_FREE_DMA)
- Initiate DMA data transfers to/from remote RapidIO devices (RIO_TRANSFER).
Supports blocking, asynchronous and posted (a.k.a 'fire-and-forget') data
transfer modes.
- Check/Wait for completion of asynchronous DMA data transfer
- (RIO_WAIT_FOR_ASYNC)
+ (RIO_WAIT_FOR_ASYNC)
- Manage device objects supported by RapidIO subsystem (RIO_DEV_ADD/RIO_DEV_DEL).
This allows implementation of various RapidIO fabric enumeration algorithms
as user-space applications while using remaining functionality provided by
kernel RapidIO subsystem.
-II. Hardware Compatibility
+2. Hardware Compatibility
+=========================
This device driver uses standard interfaces defined by kernel RapidIO subsystem
and therefore it can be used with any mport device driver registered by RapidIO
@@ -78,29 +75,35 @@ functionality of their platform when planning to use this driver:
specific DMA engine support and therefore DMA data transfers mport_cdev driver
are not available.
-III. Module parameters
+3. Module parameters
+====================
-- 'dma_timeout' - DMA transfer completion timeout (in msec, default value 3000).
+- 'dma_timeout'
+ - DMA transfer completion timeout (in msec, default value 3000).
This parameter set a maximum completion wait time for SYNC mode DMA
transfer requests and for RIO_WAIT_FOR_ASYNC ioctl requests.
-- 'dbg_level' - This parameter allows to control amount of debug information
+- 'dbg_level'
+ - This parameter allows to control amount of debug information
generated by this device driver. This parameter is formed by set of
bit masks that correspond to the specific functional blocks.
For mask definitions see 'drivers/rapidio/devices/rio_mport_cdev.c'
This parameter can be changed dynamically.
Use CONFIG_RAPIDIO_DEBUG=y to enable debug output at the top level.
-IV. Known problems
+4. Known problems
+=================
None.
-V. User-space Applications and API
+5. User-space Applications and API
+==================================
API library and applications that use this device driver are available from
RapidIO.org.
-VI. TODO List
+6. TODO List
+============
- Add support for sending/receiving "raw" RapidIO messaging packets.
- Add memory mapped DMA data transfers as an option when RapidIO-specific DMA
diff --git a/Documentation/rapidio/rapidio.txt b/Documentation/rapidio/rapidio.rst
similarity index 97%
rename from Documentation/rapidio/rapidio.txt
rename to Documentation/rapidio/rapidio.rst
index 28fbd877f85a..fb8942d3ba85 100644
--- a/Documentation/rapidio/rapidio.txt
+++ b/Documentation/rapidio/rapidio.rst
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
- The Linux RapidIO Subsystem
-
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+============
+Introduction
+============
The RapidIO standard is a packet-based fabric interconnect standard designed for
use in embedded systems. Development of the RapidIO standard is directed by the
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ This document describes the basics of the Linux RapidIO subsystem and provides
information on its major components.
1 Overview
-----------
+==========
Because the RapidIO subsystem follows the Linux device model it is integrated
into the kernel similarly to other buses by defining RapidIO-specific device and
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ architecture-specific interfaces that provide support for common RapidIO
subsystem operations.
2. Core Components
-------------------
+==================
A typical RapidIO network is a combination of endpoints and switches.
Each of these components is represented in the subsystem by an associated data
@@ -30,6 +30,7 @@ structure. The core logical components of the RapidIO subsystem are defined
in include/linux/rio.h file.
2.1 Master Port
+---------------
A master port (or mport) is a RapidIO interface controller that is local to the
processor executing the Linux code. A master port generates and receives RapidIO
@@ -46,6 +47,7 @@ includes rio_ops data structure which contains pointers to hardware specific
implementations of RapidIO functions.
2.2 Device
+----------
A RapidIO device is any endpoint (other than mport) or switch in the network.
All devices are presented in the RapidIO subsystem by corresponding rio_dev data
@@ -53,6 +55,7 @@ structure. Devices form one global device list and per-network device lists
(depending on number of available mports and networks).
2.3 Switch
+----------
A RapidIO switch is a special class of device that routes packets between its
ports towards their final destination. The packet destination port within a
@@ -66,6 +69,7 @@ specific switch drivers that are designed to provide hardware-specific
implementation of common switch management routines.
2.4 Network
+-----------
A RapidIO network is a combination of interconnected endpoint and switch devices.
Each RapidIO network known to the system is represented by corresponding rio_net
@@ -74,11 +78,13 @@ ports that form the same network. It also contains a pointer to the default
master port that is used to communicate with devices within the network.
2.5 Device Drivers
+------------------
RapidIO device-specific drivers follow Linux Kernel Driver Model and are
intended to support specific RapidIO devices attached to the RapidIO network.
2.6 Subsystem Interfaces
+------------------------
RapidIO interconnect specification defines features that may be used to provide
one or more common service layers for all participating RapidIO devices. These
@@ -90,7 +96,7 @@ subsystem interfaces. This allows to have multiple common services attached to
the same device without blocking attachment of a device-specific driver.
3. Subsystem Initialization
----------------------------
+===========================
In order to initialize the RapidIO subsystem, a platform must initialize and
register at least one master port within the RapidIO network. To register mport
@@ -105,7 +111,7 @@ RapidIO subsystem can be configured to be built as a statically linked or
modular component of the kernel (see details below).
4. Enumeration and Discovery
-----------------------------
+============================
4.1 Overview
------------
@@ -168,14 +174,16 @@ on RapidIO subsystem build configuration:
(b) If the RapidIO subsystem core is built as a loadable module, in addition
to the method shown above, the host destination ID(s) can be specified using
traditional methods of passing module parameter "hdid=" during its loading:
+
- from command line: "modprobe rapidio hdid=-1,7", or
- from modprobe configuration file using configuration command "options",
like in this example: "options rapidio hdid=-1,7". An example of modprobe
configuration file is provided in the section below.
- NOTES:
+NOTES:
(i) if "hdid=" parameter is omitted all available mport will be assigned
destination ID = -1;
+
(ii) the "hdid=" parameter in systems with multiple mports can have
destination ID assignments omitted from the end of list (default = -1).
@@ -317,8 +325,7 @@ must ensure that they are loaded before the enumeration/discovery starts.
This process can be automated by specifying pre- or post- dependencies in the
RapidIO-specific modprobe configuration file as shown in the example below.
- File /etc/modprobe.d/rapidio.conf:
- ----------------------------------
+File /etc/modprobe.d/rapidio.conf::
# Configure RapidIO subsystem modules
@@ -335,17 +342,21 @@ RapidIO-specific modprobe configuration file as shown in the example below.
--------------------------
-NOTE: In the example above, one of "softdep" commands must be removed or
-commented out to keep required module loading sequence.
+NOTE:
+ In the example above, one of "softdep" commands must be removed or
+ commented out to keep required module loading sequence.
-A. References
--------------
+5. References
+=============
[1] RapidIO Trade Association. RapidIO Interconnect Specifications.
http://www.rapidio.org.
+
[2] Rapidio TA. Technology Comparisons.
http://www.rapidio.org/education/technology_comparisons/
+
[3] RapidIO support for Linux.
http://lwn.net/Articles/139118/
+
[4] Matt Porter. RapidIO for Linux. Ottawa Linux Symposium, 2005
http://www.kernel.org/doc/ols/2005/ols2005v2-pages-43-56.pdf
diff --git a/Documentation/rapidio/rio_cm.txt b/Documentation/rapidio/rio_cm.rst
similarity index 76%
rename from Documentation/rapidio/rio_cm.txt
rename to Documentation/rapidio/rio_cm.rst
index 27aa401f1126..5294430a7a74 100644
--- a/Documentation/rapidio/rio_cm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/rapidio/rio_cm.rst
@@ -1,13 +1,10 @@
+==========================================================================
RapidIO subsystem Channelized Messaging character device driver (rio_cm.c)
==========================================================================
-Version History:
-----------------
- 1.0.0 - Initial driver release.
-==========================================================================
-
-I. Overview
+1. Overview
+===========
This device driver is the result of collaboration within the RapidIO.org
Software Task Group (STG) between Texas Instruments, Prodrive Technologies,
@@ -41,79 +38,98 @@ in /dev directory common for all registered RapidIO mport devices.
Following ioctl commands are available to user-space applications:
-- RIO_CM_MPORT_GET_LIST : Returns to caller list of local mport devices that
+- RIO_CM_MPORT_GET_LIST:
+ Returns to caller list of local mport devices that
support messaging operations (number of entries up to RIO_MAX_MPORTS).
Each list entry is combination of mport's index in the system and RapidIO
destination ID assigned to the port.
-- RIO_CM_EP_GET_LIST_SIZE : Returns number of messaging capable remote endpoints
+- RIO_CM_EP_GET_LIST_SIZE:
+ Returns number of messaging capable remote endpoints
in a RapidIO network associated with the specified mport device.
-- RIO_CM_EP_GET_LIST : Returns list of RapidIO destination IDs for messaging
+- RIO_CM_EP_GET_LIST:
+ Returns list of RapidIO destination IDs for messaging
capable remote endpoints (peers) available in a RapidIO network associated
with the specified mport device.
-- RIO_CM_CHAN_CREATE : Creates RapidIO message exchange channel data structure
+- RIO_CM_CHAN_CREATE:
+ Creates RapidIO message exchange channel data structure
with channel ID assigned automatically or as requested by a caller.
-- RIO_CM_CHAN_BIND : Binds the specified channel data structure to the specified
+- RIO_CM_CHAN_BIND:
+ Binds the specified channel data structure to the specified
mport device.
-- RIO_CM_CHAN_LISTEN : Enables listening for connection requests on the specified
+- RIO_CM_CHAN_LISTEN:
+ Enables listening for connection requests on the specified
channel.
-- RIO_CM_CHAN_ACCEPT : Accepts a connection request from peer on the specified
+- RIO_CM_CHAN_ACCEPT:
+ Accepts a connection request from peer on the specified
channel. If wait timeout for this request is specified by a caller it is
a blocking call. If timeout set to 0 this is non-blocking call - ioctl
handler checks for a pending connection request and if one is not available
exits with -EGAIN error status immediately.
-- RIO_CM_CHAN_CONNECT : Sends a connection request to a remote peer/channel.
-- RIO_CM_CHAN_SEND : Sends a data message through the specified channel.
+- RIO_CM_CHAN_CONNECT:
+ Sends a connection request to a remote peer/channel.
+- RIO_CM_CHAN_SEND:
+ Sends a data message through the specified channel.
The handler for this request assumes that message buffer specified by
a caller includes the reserved space for a packet header required by
this driver.
-- RIO_CM_CHAN_RECEIVE : Receives a data message through a connected channel.
+- RIO_CM_CHAN_RECEIVE:
+ Receives a data message through a connected channel.
If the channel does not have an incoming message ready to return this ioctl
handler will wait for new message until timeout specified by a caller
expires. If timeout value is set to 0, ioctl handler uses a default value
defined by MAX_SCHEDULE_TIMEOUT.
-- RIO_CM_CHAN_CLOSE : Closes a specified channel and frees associated buffers.
+- RIO_CM_CHAN_CLOSE:
+ Closes a specified channel and frees associated buffers.
If the specified channel is in the CONNECTED state, sends close notification
to the remote peer.
The ioctl command codes and corresponding data structures intended for use by
user-space applications are defined in 'include/uapi/linux/rio_cm_cdev.h'.
-II. Hardware Compatibility
+2. Hardware Compatibility
+=========================
This device driver uses standard interfaces defined by kernel RapidIO subsystem
and therefore it can be used with any mport device driver registered by RapidIO
subsystem with limitations set by available mport HW implementation of messaging
mailboxes.
-III. Module parameters
+3. Module parameters
+====================
-- 'dbg_level' - This parameter allows to control amount of debug information
+- 'dbg_level'
+ - This parameter allows to control amount of debug information
generated by this device driver. This parameter is formed by set of
bit masks that correspond to the specific functional block.
For mask definitions see 'drivers/rapidio/devices/rio_cm.c'
This parameter can be changed dynamically.
Use CONFIG_RAPIDIO_DEBUG=y to enable debug output at the top level.
-- 'cmbox' - Number of RapidIO mailbox to use (default value is 1).
+- 'cmbox'
+ - Number of RapidIO mailbox to use (default value is 1).
This parameter allows to set messaging mailbox number that will be used
within entire RapidIO network. It can be used when default mailbox is
used by other device drivers or is not supported by some nodes in the
RapidIO network.
-- 'chstart' - Start channel number for dynamic assignment. Default value - 256.
+- 'chstart'
+ - Start channel number for dynamic assignment. Default value - 256.
Allows to exclude channel numbers below this parameter from dynamic
allocation to avoid conflicts with software components that use
reserved predefined channel numbers.
-IV. Known problems
+4. Known problems
+=================
None.
-V. User-space Applications and API Library
+5. User-space Applications and API Library
+==========================================
Messaging API library and applications that use this device driver are available
from RapidIO.org.
-VI. TODO List
+6. TODO List
+============
- Add support for system notification messages (reserved channel 0).
diff --git a/Documentation/rapidio/sysfs.txt b/Documentation/rapidio/sysfs.rst
similarity index 75%
rename from Documentation/rapidio/sysfs.txt
rename to Documentation/rapidio/sysfs.rst
index a1adac888e6e..540f72683496 100644
--- a/Documentation/rapidio/sysfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/rapidio/sysfs.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+=============
+Sysfs entries
+=============
+
The RapidIO sysfs files have moved to:
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-rapidio and
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-rapidio
diff --git a/Documentation/rapidio/tsi721.txt b/Documentation/rapidio/tsi721.rst
similarity index 79%
rename from Documentation/rapidio/tsi721.txt
rename to Documentation/rapidio/tsi721.rst
index cd2a2935d51d..42aea438cd20 100644
--- a/Documentation/rapidio/tsi721.txt
+++ b/Documentation/rapidio/tsi721.rst
@@ -1,7 +1,9 @@
+=========================================================================
RapidIO subsystem mport driver for IDT Tsi721 PCI Express-to-SRIO bridge.
=========================================================================
-I. Overview
+1. Overview
+===========
This driver implements all currently defined RapidIO mport callback functions.
It supports maintenance read and write operations, inbound and outbound RapidIO
@@ -17,7 +19,9 @@ into the corresponding message queue. Messaging callbacks are implemented to be
fully compatible with RIONET driver (Ethernet over RapidIO messaging services).
1. Module parameters:
-- 'dbg_level' - This parameter allows to control amount of debug information
+
+- 'dbg_level'
+ - This parameter allows to control amount of debug information
generated by this device driver. This parameter is formed by set of
This parameter can be changed bit masks that correspond to the specific
functional block.
@@ -25,37 +29,44 @@ fully compatible with RIONET driver (Ethernet over RapidIO messaging services).
This parameter can be changed dynamically.
Use CONFIG_RAPIDIO_DEBUG=y to enable debug output at the top level.
-- 'dma_desc_per_channel' - This parameter defines number of hardware buffer
+- 'dma_desc_per_channel'
+ - This parameter defines number of hardware buffer
descriptors allocated for each registered Tsi721 DMA channel.
Its default value is 128.
-- 'dma_txqueue_sz' - DMA transactions queue size. Defines number of pending
+- 'dma_txqueue_sz'
+ - DMA transactions queue size. Defines number of pending
transaction requests that can be accepted by each DMA channel.
Default value is 16.
-- 'dma_sel' - DMA channel selection mask. Bitmask that defines which hardware
+- 'dma_sel'
+ - DMA channel selection mask. Bitmask that defines which hardware
DMA channels (0 ... 6) will be registered with DmaEngine core.
If bit is set to 1, the corresponding DMA channel will be registered.
DMA channels not selected by this mask will not be used by this device
driver. Default value is 0x7f (use all channels).
-- 'pcie_mrrs' - override value for PCIe Maximum Read Request Size (MRRS).
+- 'pcie_mrrs'
+ - override value for PCIe Maximum Read Request Size (MRRS).
This parameter gives an ability to override MRRS value set during PCIe
configuration process. Tsi721 supports read request sizes up to 4096B.
Value for this parameter must be set as defined by PCIe specification:
0 = 128B, 1 = 256B, 2 = 512B, 3 = 1024B, 4 = 2048B and 5 = 4096B.
Default value is '-1' (= keep platform setting).
-- 'mbox_sel' - RIO messaging MBOX selection mask. This is a bitmask that defines
+- 'mbox_sel'
+ - RIO messaging MBOX selection mask. This is a bitmask that defines
messaging MBOXes are managed by this device driver. Mask bits 0 - 3
correspond to MBOX0 - MBOX3. MBOX is under driver's control if the
corresponding bit is set to '1'. Default value is 0x0f (= all).
-II. Known problems
+2. Known problems
+=================
None.
-III. DMA Engine Support
+3. DMA Engine Support
+=====================
Tsi721 mport driver supports DMA data transfers between local system memory and
remote RapidIO devices. This functionality is implemented according to SLAVE
@@ -68,17 +79,21 @@ One BDMA channel is reserved for generation of maintenance read/write requests.
If Tsi721 mport driver have been built with RAPIDIO_DMA_ENGINE support included,
this driver will accept DMA-specific module parameter:
- "dma_desc_per_channel" - defines number of hardware buffer descriptors used by
+
+ "dma_desc_per_channel"
+ - defines number of hardware buffer descriptors used by
each BDMA channel of Tsi721 (by default - 128).
-IV. Version History
+4. Version History
- 1.1.0 - DMA operations re-worked to support data scatter/gather lists larger
+ ===== ====================================================================
+ 1.1.0 DMA operations re-worked to support data scatter/gather lists larger
than hardware buffer descriptors ring.
- 1.0.0 - Initial driver release.
+ 1.0.0 Initial driver release.
+ ===== ====================================================================
-V. License
------------------------------------------------
+5. License
+===========
Copyright(c) 2011 Integrated Device Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
diff --git a/drivers/rapidio/Kconfig b/drivers/rapidio/Kconfig
index fadafc64705f..467e8fa06904 100644
--- a/drivers/rapidio/Kconfig
+++ b/drivers/rapidio/Kconfig
@@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ config RAPIDIO_CHMAN
This option includes RapidIO channelized messaging driver which
provides socket-like interface to allow sharing of single RapidIO
messaging mailbox between multiple user-space applications.
- See "Documentation/rapidio/rio_cm.txt" for driver description.
+ See "Documentation/rapidio/rio_cm.rst" for driver description.
config RAPIDIO_MPORT_CDEV
tristate "RapidIO /dev mport device driver"
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related
* [PATCH 41/43] docs: extcon: convert it to ReST and move to acpi dir
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-28 12:20 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet, MyungJoo Ham, Chanwoo Choi, Rafael J. Wysocki,
Len Brown, linux-acpi
In-Reply-To: <cover.1561723979.git.mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
The intel-int3496.txt file is a documentation for an ACPI driver.
There's no reason to keep it on a separate directory.
So, instead of keeping it on some random location, move it
to a sub-directory inside the ACPI documentation dir,
renaming it to .rst.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
.../acpi/extcon-intel-int3496.rst} | 14 ++++++++++----
Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/index.rst | 1 +
MAINTAINERS | 6 +++---
3 files changed, 14 insertions(+), 7 deletions(-)
rename Documentation/{extcon/intel-int3496.txt => firmware-guide/acpi/extcon-intel-int3496.rst} (66%)
diff --git a/Documentation/extcon/intel-int3496.txt b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/extcon-intel-int3496.rst
similarity index 66%
rename from Documentation/extcon/intel-int3496.txt
rename to Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/extcon-intel-int3496.rst
index 8155dbc7fad3..5137ca834b54 100644
--- a/Documentation/extcon/intel-int3496.txt
+++ b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/extcon-intel-int3496.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
+=====================================================
Intel INT3496 ACPI device extcon driver documentation
------------------------------------------------------
+=====================================================
The Intel INT3496 ACPI device extcon driver is a driver for ACPI
devices with an acpi-id of INT3496, such as found for example on
@@ -13,15 +14,20 @@ between an USB host and an USB peripheral controller.
The ACPI devices exposes this functionality by returning an array with up
to 3 gpio descriptors from its ACPI _CRS (Current Resource Settings) call:
-Index 0: The input gpio for the id-pin, this is always present and valid
-Index 1: The output gpio for enabling Vbus output from the device to the otg
+======= =====================================================================
+Index 0 The input gpio for the id-pin, this is always present and valid
+Index 1 The output gpio for enabling Vbus output from the device to the otg
port, write 1 to enable the Vbus output (this gpio descriptor may
be absent or invalid)
-Index 2: The output gpio for muxing of the data pins between the USB host and
+Index 2 The output gpio for muxing of the data pins between the USB host and
the USB peripheral controller, write 1 to mux to the peripheral
controller
+======= =====================================================================
There is a mapping between indices and GPIO connection IDs as follows
+
+ ======= =======
id index 0
vbus index 1
mux index 2
+ ======= =======
diff --git a/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/index.rst b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/index.rst
index ae609eec4679..90c90d42d9ad 100644
--- a/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/index.rst
+++ b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/index.rst
@@ -24,3 +24,4 @@ ACPI Support
acpi-lid
lpit
video_extension
+ extcon-intel-int3496
diff --git a/MAINTAINERS b/MAINTAINERS
index fd6fab0dec77..2cf8abf6d48e 100644
--- a/MAINTAINERS
+++ b/MAINTAINERS
@@ -321,7 +321,7 @@ F: drivers/pnp/pnpacpi/
F: include/linux/acpi.h
F: include/linux/fwnode.h
F: include/acpi/
-F: Documentation/acpi/
+F: Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/
F: Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-acpi
F: Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-acpi
F: drivers/pci/*acpi*
@@ -4896,7 +4896,7 @@ S: Maintained
F: Documentation/
F: scripts/kernel-doc
X: Documentation/ABI/
-X: Documentation/acpi/
+X: Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/
X: Documentation/devicetree/
X: Documentation/i2c/
X: Documentation/media/
@@ -6073,7 +6073,7 @@ S: Maintained
F: drivers/extcon/
F: include/linux/extcon/
F: include/linux/extcon.h
-F: Documentation/extcon/
+F: Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/extcon-intel-int3496.rst
F: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/extcon/
EXYNOS DP DRIVER
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related
* [PATCH 25/43] docs: laptops: convert to ReST
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-28 12:20 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet, Arnd Bergmann, Greg Kroah-Hartman, Darren Hart,
Andy Shevchenko, platform-driver-x86, Andy Shevchenko
In-Reply-To: <cover.1561723979.git.mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
Rename the laptops documentation files to ReST, add an
index for them and adjust in order to produce a nice html
output via the Sphinx build system.
At its new index.rst, let's add a :orphan: while this is not linked to
the main index.rst file, in order to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
Acked-by: Andy Shevchenko <andy.shevchenko@gmail.com>
---
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block-device | 2 +-
.../ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-laptop | 2 +-
.../admin-guide/kernel-parameters.txt | 2 +-
.../{asus-laptop.txt => asus-laptop.rst} | 92 ++--
...otection.txt => disk-shock-protection.rst} | 32 +-
Documentation/laptops/index.rst | 17 +
.../{laptop-mode.txt => laptop-mode.rst} | 509 +++++++++---------
.../{sony-laptop.txt => sony-laptop.rst} | 58 +-
.../laptops/{sonypi.txt => sonypi.rst} | 28 +-
.../{thinkpad-acpi.txt => thinkpad-acpi.rst} | 363 ++++++++-----
.../{toshiba_haps.txt => toshiba_haps.rst} | 47 +-
Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt | 4 +-
MAINTAINERS | 2 +-
drivers/char/Kconfig | 2 +-
drivers/platform/x86/Kconfig | 4 +-
15 files changed, 660 insertions(+), 504 deletions(-)
rename Documentation/laptops/{asus-laptop.txt => asus-laptop.rst} (84%)
rename Documentation/laptops/{disk-shock-protection.txt => disk-shock-protection.rst} (91%)
create mode 100644 Documentation/laptops/index.rst
rename Documentation/laptops/{laptop-mode.txt => laptop-mode.rst} (62%)
rename Documentation/laptops/{sony-laptop.txt => sony-laptop.rst} (85%)
rename Documentation/laptops/{sonypi.txt => sonypi.rst} (87%)
rename Documentation/laptops/{thinkpad-acpi.txt => thinkpad-acpi.rst} (89%)
rename Documentation/laptops/{toshiba_haps.txt => toshiba_haps.rst} (60%)
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block-device b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block-device
index 82ef6eab042d..0d57bbb4fddc 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block-device
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block-device
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ Description:
- Values below -2 are rejected with -EINVAL
For more information, see
- Documentation/laptops/disk-shock-protection.txt
+ Documentation/laptops/disk-shock-protection.rst
What: /sys/block/*/device/ncq_prio_enable
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-laptop b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-laptop
index cd9d667c3da2..d67fa4bafa70 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-laptop
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-laptop
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ Description:
To control the LED display, use the following :
echo 0x0T000DDD > /sys/devices/platform/asus_laptop/
where T control the 3 letters display, and DDD the 3 digits display.
- The DDD table can be found in Documentation/laptops/asus-laptop.txt
+ The DDD table can be found in Documentation/laptops/asus-laptop.rst
What: /sys/devices/platform/asus_laptop/bluetooth
Date: January 2007
diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.txt
index e5eb04f673ae..92d335837c52 100644
--- a/Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.txt
+++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.txt
@@ -4373,7 +4373,7 @@
Format: <integer>
sonypi.*= [HW] Sony Programmable I/O Control Device driver
- See Documentation/laptops/sonypi.txt
+ See Documentation/laptops/sonypi.rst
spectre_v2= [X86] Control mitigation of Spectre variant 2
(indirect branch speculation) vulnerability.
diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/asus-laptop.txt b/Documentation/laptops/asus-laptop.rst
similarity index 84%
rename from Documentation/laptops/asus-laptop.txt
rename to Documentation/laptops/asus-laptop.rst
index 5f2858712aa0..95176321a25a 100644
--- a/Documentation/laptops/asus-laptop.txt
+++ b/Documentation/laptops/asus-laptop.rst
@@ -1,6 +1,9 @@
+==================
Asus Laptop Extras
+==================
Version 0.1
+
August 6, 2009
Corentin Chary <corentincj@iksaif.net>
@@ -10,11 +13,12 @@ http://acpi4asus.sf.net/
It may also support some MEDION, JVC or VICTOR laptops (such as MEDION 9675 or
VICTOR XP7210 for example). It makes all the extra buttons generate input
events (like keyboards).
+
On some models adds support for changing the display brightness and output,
switching the LCD backlight on and off, and most importantly, allows you to
blink those fancy LEDs intended for reporting mail and wireless status.
-This driver supercedes the old asus_acpi driver.
+This driver supersedes the old asus_acpi driver.
Requirements
------------
@@ -49,7 +53,7 @@ Usage
see some lines like this :
Asus Laptop Extras version 0.42
- L2D model detected.
+ - L2D model detected.
If it is not the output you have on your laptop, send it (and the laptop's
DSDT) to me.
@@ -68,9 +72,12 @@ Usage
LEDs
----
- You can modify LEDs be echoing values to /sys/class/leds/asus::*/brightness :
+ You can modify LEDs be echoing values to `/sys/class/leds/asus/*/brightness`::
+
echo 1 > /sys/class/leds/asus::mail/brightness
+
will switch the mail LED on.
+
You can also know if they are on/off by reading their content and use
kernel triggers like disk-activity or heartbeat.
@@ -81,7 +88,7 @@ Backlight
/sys/class/backlight/asus-laptop/. Brightness Values are between 0 and 15.
Wireless devices
----------------
+----------------
You can turn the internal Bluetooth adapter on/off with the bluetooth entry
(only on models with Bluetooth). This usually controls the associated LED.
@@ -93,18 +100,20 @@ Display switching
Note: the display switching code is currently considered EXPERIMENTAL.
Switching works for the following models:
- L3800C
- A2500H
- L5800C
- M5200N
- W1000N (albeit with some glitches)
- M6700R
- A6JC
- F3J
+
+ - L3800C
+ - A2500H
+ - L5800C
+ - M5200N
+ - W1000N (albeit with some glitches)
+ - M6700R
+ - A6JC
+ - F3J
Switching doesn't work for the following:
- M3700N
- L2X00D (locks the laptop under certain conditions)
+
+ - M3700N
+ - L2X00D (locks the laptop under certain conditions)
To switch the displays, echo values from 0 to 15 to
/sys/devices/platform/asus-laptop/display. The significance of those values
@@ -113,48 +122,51 @@ Display switching
+-------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
| Bin | Val | DVI | TV | CRT | LCD |
+-------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
- + 0000 + 0 + + + + +
+ | 0000 | 0 | | | | |
+-------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
- + 0001 + 1 + + + + X +
+ | 0001 | 1 | | | | X |
+-------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
- + 0010 + 2 + + + X + +
+ | 0010 | 2 | | | X | |
+-------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
- + 0011 + 3 + + + X + X +
+ | 0011 | 3 | | | X | X |
+-------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
- + 0100 + 4 + + X + + +
+ | 0100 | 4 | | X | | |
+-------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
- + 0101 + 5 + + X + + X +
+ | 0101 | 5 | | X | | X |
+-------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
- + 0110 + 6 + + X + X + +
+ | 0110 | 6 | | X | X | |
+-------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
- + 0111 + 7 + + X + X + X +
+ | 0111 | 7 | | X | X | X |
+-------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
- + 1000 + 8 + X + + + +
+ | 1000 | 8 | X | | | |
+-------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
- + 1001 + 9 + X + + + X +
+ | 1001 | 9 | X | | | X |
+-------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
- + 1010 + 10 + X + + X + +
+ | 1010 | 10 | X | | X | |
+-------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
- + 1011 + 11 + X + + X + X +
+ | 1011 | 11 | X | | X | X |
+-------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
- + 1100 + 12 + X + X + + +
+ | 1100 | 12 | X | X | | |
+-------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
- + 1101 + 13 + X + X + + X +
+ | 1101 | 13 | X | X | | X |
+-------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
- + 1110 + 14 + X + X + X + +
+ | 1110 | 14 | X | X | X | |
+-------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
- + 1111 + 15 + X + X + X + X +
+ | 1111 | 15 | X | X | X | X |
+-------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
In most cases, the appropriate displays must be plugged in for the above
combinations to work. TV-Out may need to be initialized at boot time.
Debugging:
+
1) Check whether the Fn+F8 key:
+
a) does not lock the laptop (try a boot with noapic / nolapic if it does)
b) generates events (0x6n, where n is the value corresponding to the
configuration above)
c) actually works
+
Record the disp value at every configuration.
2) Echo values from 0 to 15 to /sys/devices/platform/asus-laptop/display.
Record its value, note any change. If nothing changes, try a broader range,
@@ -164,7 +176,7 @@ Display switching
Note: on some machines (e.g. L3C), after the module has been loaded, only 0x6n
events are generated and no actual switching occurs. In such a case, a line
- like:
+ like::
echo $((10#$arg-60)) > /sys/devices/platform/asus-laptop/display
@@ -180,15 +192,16 @@ LED display
several items of information.
LED display works for the following models:
- W1000N
- W1J
- To control the LED display, use the following :
+ - W1000N
+ - W1J
+
+ To control the LED display, use the following::
echo 0x0T000DDD > /sys/devices/platform/asus-laptop/
where T control the 3 letters display, and DDD the 3 digits display,
- according to the tables below.
+ according to the tables below::
DDD (digits)
000 to 999 = display digits
@@ -208,8 +221,8 @@ LED display
For example "echo 0x01000001 >/sys/devices/platform/asus-laptop/ledd"
would display "DVD001".
-Driver options:
----------------
+Driver options
+--------------
Options can be passed to the asus-laptop driver using the standard
module argument syntax (<param>=<value> when passing the option to the
@@ -219,6 +232,7 @@ Driver options:
wapf: WAPF defines the behavior of the Fn+Fx wlan key
The significance of values is yet to be found, but
most of the time:
+
- 0x0 should do nothing
- 0x1 should allow to control the device with Fn+Fx key.
- 0x4 should send an ACPI event (0x88) while pressing the Fn+Fx key
@@ -237,7 +251,7 @@ Unsupported models
- ASUS L7300G
- ASUS L8400
-Patches, Errors, Questions:
+Patches, Errors, Questions
--------------------------
I appreciate any success or failure
@@ -253,5 +267,5 @@ Patches, Errors, Questions:
Any other comments or patches are also more than welcome.
acpi4asus-user@lists.sourceforge.net
+
http://sourceforge.net/projects/acpi4asus
-
diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/disk-shock-protection.txt b/Documentation/laptops/disk-shock-protection.rst
similarity index 91%
rename from Documentation/laptops/disk-shock-protection.txt
rename to Documentation/laptops/disk-shock-protection.rst
index 0e6ba2663834..e97c5f78d8c3 100644
--- a/Documentation/laptops/disk-shock-protection.txt
+++ b/Documentation/laptops/disk-shock-protection.rst
@@ -1,17 +1,18 @@
+==========================
Hard disk shock protection
==========================
Author: Elias Oltmanns <eo@nebensachen.de>
+
Last modified: 2008-10-03
-0. Contents
------------
+.. 0. Contents
-1. Intro
-2. The interface
-3. References
-4. CREDITS
+ 1. Intro
+ 2. The interface
+ 3. References
+ 4. CREDITS
1. Intro
@@ -36,8 +37,8 @@ that).
----------------
For each ATA device, the kernel exports the file
-block/*/device/unload_heads in sysfs (here assumed to be mounted under
-/sys). Access to /sys/block/*/device/unload_heads is denied with
+`block/*/device/unload_heads` in sysfs (here assumed to be mounted under
+/sys). Access to `/sys/block/*/device/unload_heads` is denied with
-EOPNOTSUPP if the device does not support the unload feature.
Otherwise, writing an integer value to this file will take the heads
of the respective drive off the platter and block all I/O operations
@@ -54,18 +55,18 @@ cancel a previously set timeout and resume normal operation
immediately by specifying a timeout of 0. Values below -2 are rejected
with -EINVAL (see below for the special meaning of -1 and -2). If the
timeout specified for a recent head park request has not yet expired,
-reading from /sys/block/*/device/unload_heads will report the number
+reading from `/sys/block/*/device/unload_heads` will report the number
of milliseconds remaining until normal operation will be resumed;
otherwise, reading the unload_heads attribute will return 0.
For example, do the following in order to park the heads of drive
-/dev/sda and stop all I/O operations for five seconds:
+/dev/sda and stop all I/O operations for five seconds::
-# echo 5000 > /sys/block/sda/device/unload_heads
+ # echo 5000 > /sys/block/sda/device/unload_heads
-A simple
+A simple::
-# cat /sys/block/sda/device/unload_heads
+ # cat /sys/block/sda/device/unload_heads
will show you how many milliseconds are left before normal operation
will be resumed.
@@ -112,9 +113,9 @@ unload_heads attribute. If you know that your device really does
support the unload feature (for instance, because the vendor of your
laptop or the hard drive itself told you so), then you can tell the
kernel to enable the usage of this feature for that drive by writing
-the special value -1 to the unload_heads attribute:
+the special value -1 to the unload_heads attribute::
-# echo -1 > /sys/block/sda/device/unload_heads
+ # echo -1 > /sys/block/sda/device/unload_heads
will enable the feature for /dev/sda, and giving -2 instead of -1 will
disable it again.
@@ -135,6 +136,7 @@ for use. Please feel free to add projects that have been the victims
of my ignorance.
- http://www.thinkwiki.org/wiki/HDAPS
+
See this page for information about Linux support of the hard disk
active protection system as implemented in IBM/Lenovo Thinkpads.
diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/index.rst b/Documentation/laptops/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..001a30910d09
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/laptops/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+:orphan:
+
+==============
+Laptop Drivers
+==============
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 1
+
+ asus-laptop
+ disk-shock-protection
+ laptop-mode
+ lg-laptop
+ sony-laptop
+ sonypi
+ thinkpad-acpi
+ toshiba_haps
diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/laptop-mode.txt b/Documentation/laptops/laptop-mode.rst
similarity index 62%
rename from Documentation/laptops/laptop-mode.txt
rename to Documentation/laptops/laptop-mode.rst
index 1c707fc9b141..c984c4262f2e 100644
--- a/Documentation/laptops/laptop-mode.txt
+++ b/Documentation/laptops/laptop-mode.rst
@@ -1,8 +1,11 @@
+===============================================
How to conserve battery power using laptop-mode
------------------------------------------------
+===============================================
Document Author: Bart Samwel (bart@samwel.tk)
+
Date created: January 2, 2004
+
Last modified: December 06, 2004
Introduction
@@ -12,17 +15,16 @@ Laptop mode is used to minimize the time that the hard disk needs to be spun up,
to conserve battery power on laptops. It has been reported to cause significant
power savings.
-Contents
---------
+.. Contents
-* Introduction
-* Installation
-* Caveats
-* The Details
-* Tips & Tricks
-* Control script
-* ACPI integration
-* Monitoring tool
+ * Introduction
+ * Installation
+ * Caveats
+ * The Details
+ * Tips & Tricks
+ * Control script
+ * ACPI integration
+ * Monitoring tool
Installation
@@ -33,7 +35,7 @@ or anything. Simply install all the files included in this document, and
laptop mode will automatically be started when you're on battery. For
your convenience, a tarball containing an installer can be downloaded at:
-http://www.samwel.tk/laptop_mode/laptop_mode/
+ http://www.samwel.tk/laptop_mode/laptop_mode/
To configure laptop mode, you need to edit the configuration file, which is
located in /etc/default/laptop-mode on Debian-based systems, or in
@@ -209,7 +211,7 @@ Tips & Tricks
this on powerbooks too. I hope that this is a piece of information that
might be useful to the Laptop Mode patch or its users."
-* In syslog.conf, you can prefix entries with a dash ``-'' to omit syncing the
+* In syslog.conf, you can prefix entries with a dash `-` to omit syncing the
file after every logging. When you're using laptop-mode and your disk doesn't
spin down, this is a likely culprit.
@@ -233,83 +235,82 @@ configuration file
It should be installed as /etc/default/laptop-mode on Debian, and as
/etc/sysconfig/laptop-mode on Red Hat, SUSE, Mandrake, and other work-alikes.
---------------------CONFIG FILE BEGIN-------------------------------------------
-# Maximum time, in seconds, of hard drive spindown time that you are
-# comfortable with. Worst case, it's possible that you could lose this
-# amount of work if your battery fails you while in laptop mode.
-#MAX_AGE=600
+Config file::
-# Automatically disable laptop mode when the number of minutes of battery
-# that you have left goes below this threshold.
-MINIMUM_BATTERY_MINUTES=10
+ # Maximum time, in seconds, of hard drive spindown time that you are
+ # comfortable with. Worst case, it's possible that you could lose this
+ # amount of work if your battery fails you while in laptop mode.
+ #MAX_AGE=600
-# Read-ahead, in 512-byte sectors. You can spin down the disk while playing MP3/OGG
-# by setting the disk readahead to 8MB (READAHEAD=16384). Effectively, the disk
-# will read a complete MP3 at once, and will then spin down while the MP3/OGG is
-# playing.
-#READAHEAD=4096
+ # Automatically disable laptop mode when the number of minutes of battery
+ # that you have left goes below this threshold.
+ MINIMUM_BATTERY_MINUTES=10
-# Shall we remount journaled fs. with appropriate commit interval? (1=yes)
-#DO_REMOUNTS=1
+ # Read-ahead, in 512-byte sectors. You can spin down the disk while playing MP3/OGG
+ # by setting the disk readahead to 8MB (READAHEAD=16384). Effectively, the disk
+ # will read a complete MP3 at once, and will then spin down while the MP3/OGG is
+ # playing.
+ #READAHEAD=4096
-# And shall we add the "noatime" option to that as well? (1=yes)
-#DO_REMOUNT_NOATIME=1
+ # Shall we remount journaled fs. with appropriate commit interval? (1=yes)
+ #DO_REMOUNTS=1
-# Dirty synchronous ratio. At this percentage of dirty pages the process
-# which
-# calls write() does its own writeback
-#DIRTY_RATIO=40
+ # And shall we add the "noatime" option to that as well? (1=yes)
+ #DO_REMOUNT_NOATIME=1
-#
-# Allowed dirty background ratio, in percent. Once DIRTY_RATIO has been
-# exceeded, the kernel will wake flusher threads which will then reduce the
-# amount of dirty memory to dirty_background_ratio. Set this nice and low,
-# so once some writeout has commenced, we do a lot of it.
-#
-#DIRTY_BACKGROUND_RATIO=5
+ # Dirty synchronous ratio. At this percentage of dirty pages the process
+ # which
+ # calls write() does its own writeback
+ #DIRTY_RATIO=40
-# kernel default dirty buffer age
-#DEF_AGE=30
-#DEF_UPDATE=5
-#DEF_DIRTY_BACKGROUND_RATIO=10
-#DEF_DIRTY_RATIO=40
-#DEF_XFS_AGE_BUFFER=15
-#DEF_XFS_SYNC_INTERVAL=30
-#DEF_XFS_BUFD_INTERVAL=1
+ #
+ # Allowed dirty background ratio, in percent. Once DIRTY_RATIO has been
+ # exceeded, the kernel will wake flusher threads which will then reduce the
+ # amount of dirty memory to dirty_background_ratio. Set this nice and low,
+ # so once some writeout has commenced, we do a lot of it.
+ #
+ #DIRTY_BACKGROUND_RATIO=5
-# This must be adjusted manually to the value of HZ in the running kernel
-# on 2.4, until the XFS people change their 2.4 external interfaces to work in
-# centisecs. This can be automated, but it's a work in progress that still
-# needs# some fixes. On 2.6 kernels, XFS uses USER_HZ instead of HZ for
-# external interfaces, and that is currently always set to 100. So you don't
-# need to change this on 2.6.
-#XFS_HZ=100
+ # kernel default dirty buffer age
+ #DEF_AGE=30
+ #DEF_UPDATE=5
+ #DEF_DIRTY_BACKGROUND_RATIO=10
+ #DEF_DIRTY_RATIO=40
+ #DEF_XFS_AGE_BUFFER=15
+ #DEF_XFS_SYNC_INTERVAL=30
+ #DEF_XFS_BUFD_INTERVAL=1
-# Should the maximum CPU frequency be adjusted down while on battery?
-# Requires CPUFreq to be setup.
-# See Documentation/admin-guide/pm/cpufreq.rst for more info
-#DO_CPU=0
+ # This must be adjusted manually to the value of HZ in the running kernel
+ # on 2.4, until the XFS people change their 2.4 external interfaces to work in
+ # centisecs. This can be automated, but it's a work in progress that still
+ # needs# some fixes. On 2.6 kernels, XFS uses USER_HZ instead of HZ for
+ # external interfaces, and that is currently always set to 100. So you don't
+ # need to change this on 2.6.
+ #XFS_HZ=100
-# When on battery what is the maximum CPU speed that the system should
-# use? Legal values are "slowest" for the slowest speed that your
-# CPU is able to operate at, or a value listed in:
-# /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu0/cpufreq/scaling_available_frequencies
-# Only applicable if DO_CPU=1.
-#CPU_MAXFREQ=slowest
+ # Should the maximum CPU frequency be adjusted down while on battery?
+ # Requires CPUFreq to be setup.
+ # See Documentation/admin-guide/pm/cpufreq.rst for more info
+ #DO_CPU=0
-# Idle timeout for your hard drive (man hdparm for valid values, -S option)
-# Default is 2 hours on AC (AC_HD=244) and 20 seconds for battery (BATT_HD=4).
-#AC_HD=244
-#BATT_HD=4
+ # When on battery what is the maximum CPU speed that the system should
+ # use? Legal values are "slowest" for the slowest speed that your
+ # CPU is able to operate at, or a value listed in:
+ # /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu0/cpufreq/scaling_available_frequencies
+ # Only applicable if DO_CPU=1.
+ #CPU_MAXFREQ=slowest
-# The drives for which to adjust the idle timeout. Separate them by a space,
-# e.g. HD="/dev/hda /dev/hdb".
-#HD="/dev/hda"
+ # Idle timeout for your hard drive (man hdparm for valid values, -S option)
+ # Default is 2 hours on AC (AC_HD=244) and 20 seconds for battery (BATT_HD=4).
+ #AC_HD=244
+ #BATT_HD=4
-# Set the spindown timeout on a hard drive?
-#DO_HD=1
+ # The drives for which to adjust the idle timeout. Separate them by a space,
+ # e.g. HD="/dev/hda /dev/hdb".
+ #HD="/dev/hda"
---------------------CONFIG FILE END---------------------------------------------
+ # Set the spindown timeout on a hard drive?
+ #DO_HD=1
Control script
@@ -318,125 +319,126 @@ Control script
Please note that this control script works for the Linux 2.4 and 2.6 series (thanks
to Kiko Piris).
---------------------CONTROL SCRIPT BEGIN----------------------------------------
-#!/bin/bash
+Control script::
-# start or stop laptop_mode, best run by a power management daemon when
-# ac gets connected/disconnected from a laptop
-#
-# install as /sbin/laptop_mode
-#
-# Contributors to this script: Kiko Piris
-# Bart Samwel
-# Micha Feigin
-# Andrew Morton
-# Herve Eychenne
-# Dax Kelson
-#
-# Original Linux 2.4 version by: Jens Axboe
+ #!/bin/bash
-#############################################################################
+ # start or stop laptop_mode, best run by a power management daemon when
+ # ac gets connected/disconnected from a laptop
+ #
+ # install as /sbin/laptop_mode
+ #
+ # Contributors to this script: Kiko Piris
+ # Bart Samwel
+ # Micha Feigin
+ # Andrew Morton
+ # Herve Eychenne
+ # Dax Kelson
+ #
+ # Original Linux 2.4 version by: Jens Axboe
-# Source config
-if [ -f /etc/default/laptop-mode ] ; then
+ #############################################################################
+
+ # Source config
+ if [ -f /etc/default/laptop-mode ] ; then
# Debian
. /etc/default/laptop-mode
-elif [ -f /etc/sysconfig/laptop-mode ] ; then
+ elif [ -f /etc/sysconfig/laptop-mode ] ; then
# Others
- . /etc/sysconfig/laptop-mode
-fi
+ . /etc/sysconfig/laptop-mode
+ fi
-# Don't raise an error if the config file is incomplete
-# set defaults instead:
+ # Don't raise an error if the config file is incomplete
+ # set defaults instead:
-# Maximum time, in seconds, of hard drive spindown time that you are
-# comfortable with. Worst case, it's possible that you could lose this
-# amount of work if your battery fails you while in laptop mode.
-MAX_AGE=${MAX_AGE:-'600'}
+ # Maximum time, in seconds, of hard drive spindown time that you are
+ # comfortable with. Worst case, it's possible that you could lose this
+ # amount of work if your battery fails you while in laptop mode.
+ MAX_AGE=${MAX_AGE:-'600'}
-# Read-ahead, in kilobytes
-READAHEAD=${READAHEAD:-'4096'}
+ # Read-ahead, in kilobytes
+ READAHEAD=${READAHEAD:-'4096'}
-# Shall we remount journaled fs. with appropriate commit interval? (1=yes)
-DO_REMOUNTS=${DO_REMOUNTS:-'1'}
+ # Shall we remount journaled fs. with appropriate commit interval? (1=yes)
+ DO_REMOUNTS=${DO_REMOUNTS:-'1'}
-# And shall we add the "noatime" option to that as well? (1=yes)
-DO_REMOUNT_NOATIME=${DO_REMOUNT_NOATIME:-'1'}
+ # And shall we add the "noatime" option to that as well? (1=yes)
+ DO_REMOUNT_NOATIME=${DO_REMOUNT_NOATIME:-'1'}
-# Shall we adjust the idle timeout on a hard drive?
-DO_HD=${DO_HD:-'1'}
+ # Shall we adjust the idle timeout on a hard drive?
+ DO_HD=${DO_HD:-'1'}
-# Adjust idle timeout on which hard drive?
-HD="${HD:-'/dev/hda'}"
+ # Adjust idle timeout on which hard drive?
+ HD="${HD:-'/dev/hda'}"
-# spindown time for HD (hdparm -S values)
-AC_HD=${AC_HD:-'244'}
-BATT_HD=${BATT_HD:-'4'}
+ # spindown time for HD (hdparm -S values)
+ AC_HD=${AC_HD:-'244'}
+ BATT_HD=${BATT_HD:-'4'}
-# Dirty synchronous ratio. At this percentage of dirty pages the process which
-# calls write() does its own writeback
-DIRTY_RATIO=${DIRTY_RATIO:-'40'}
+ # Dirty synchronous ratio. At this percentage of dirty pages the process which
+ # calls write() does its own writeback
+ DIRTY_RATIO=${DIRTY_RATIO:-'40'}
-# cpu frequency scaling
-# See Documentation/admin-guide/pm/cpufreq.rst for more info
-DO_CPU=${CPU_MANAGE:-'0'}
-CPU_MAXFREQ=${CPU_MAXFREQ:-'slowest'}
+ # cpu frequency scaling
+ # See Documentation/admin-guide/pm/cpufreq.rst for more info
+ DO_CPU=${CPU_MANAGE:-'0'}
+ CPU_MAXFREQ=${CPU_MAXFREQ:-'slowest'}
-#
-# Allowed dirty background ratio, in percent. Once DIRTY_RATIO has been
-# exceeded, the kernel will wake flusher threads which will then reduce the
-# amount of dirty memory to dirty_background_ratio. Set this nice and low,
-# so once some writeout has commenced, we do a lot of it.
-#
-DIRTY_BACKGROUND_RATIO=${DIRTY_BACKGROUND_RATIO:-'5'}
+ #
+ # Allowed dirty background ratio, in percent. Once DIRTY_RATIO has been
+ # exceeded, the kernel will wake flusher threads which will then reduce the
+ # amount of dirty memory to dirty_background_ratio. Set this nice and low,
+ # so once some writeout has commenced, we do a lot of it.
+ #
+ DIRTY_BACKGROUND_RATIO=${DIRTY_BACKGROUND_RATIO:-'5'}
-# kernel default dirty buffer age
-DEF_AGE=${DEF_AGE:-'30'}
-DEF_UPDATE=${DEF_UPDATE:-'5'}
-DEF_DIRTY_BACKGROUND_RATIO=${DEF_DIRTY_BACKGROUND_RATIO:-'10'}
-DEF_DIRTY_RATIO=${DEF_DIRTY_RATIO:-'40'}
-DEF_XFS_AGE_BUFFER=${DEF_XFS_AGE_BUFFER:-'15'}
-DEF_XFS_SYNC_INTERVAL=${DEF_XFS_SYNC_INTERVAL:-'30'}
-DEF_XFS_BUFD_INTERVAL=${DEF_XFS_BUFD_INTERVAL:-'1'}
+ # kernel default dirty buffer age
+ DEF_AGE=${DEF_AGE:-'30'}
+ DEF_UPDATE=${DEF_UPDATE:-'5'}
+ DEF_DIRTY_BACKGROUND_RATIO=${DEF_DIRTY_BACKGROUND_RATIO:-'10'}
+ DEF_DIRTY_RATIO=${DEF_DIRTY_RATIO:-'40'}
+ DEF_XFS_AGE_BUFFER=${DEF_XFS_AGE_BUFFER:-'15'}
+ DEF_XFS_SYNC_INTERVAL=${DEF_XFS_SYNC_INTERVAL:-'30'}
+ DEF_XFS_BUFD_INTERVAL=${DEF_XFS_BUFD_INTERVAL:-'1'}
-# This must be adjusted manually to the value of HZ in the running kernel
-# on 2.4, until the XFS people change their 2.4 external interfaces to work in
-# centisecs. This can be automated, but it's a work in progress that still needs
-# some fixes. On 2.6 kernels, XFS uses USER_HZ instead of HZ for external
-# interfaces, and that is currently always set to 100. So you don't need to
-# change this on 2.6.
-XFS_HZ=${XFS_HZ:-'100'}
+ # This must be adjusted manually to the value of HZ in the running kernel
+ # on 2.4, until the XFS people change their 2.4 external interfaces to work in
+ # centisecs. This can be automated, but it's a work in progress that still needs
+ # some fixes. On 2.6 kernels, XFS uses USER_HZ instead of HZ for external
+ # interfaces, and that is currently always set to 100. So you don't need to
+ # change this on 2.6.
+ XFS_HZ=${XFS_HZ:-'100'}
-#############################################################################
+ #############################################################################
-KLEVEL="$(uname -r |
- {
+ KLEVEL="$(uname -r |
+ {
IFS='.' read a b c
echo $a.$b
}
-)"
-case "$KLEVEL" in
+ )"
+ case "$KLEVEL" in
"2.4"|"2.6")
;;
*)
echo "Unhandled kernel version: $KLEVEL ('uname -r' = '$(uname -r)')" >&2
exit 1
;;
-esac
+ esac
-if [ ! -e /proc/sys/vm/laptop_mode ] ; then
+ if [ ! -e /proc/sys/vm/laptop_mode ] ; then
echo "Kernel is not patched with laptop_mode patch." >&2
exit 1
-fi
+ fi
-if [ ! -w /proc/sys/vm/laptop_mode ] ; then
+ if [ ! -w /proc/sys/vm/laptop_mode ] ; then
echo "You do not have enough privileges to enable laptop_mode." >&2
exit 1
-fi
+ fi
-# Remove an option (the first parameter) of the form option=<number> from
-# a mount options string (the rest of the parameters).
-parse_mount_opts () {
+ # Remove an option (the first parameter) of the form option=<number> from
+ # a mount options string (the rest of the parameters).
+ parse_mount_opts () {
OPT="$1"
shift
echo ",$*," | sed \
@@ -444,11 +446,11 @@ parse_mount_opts () {
-e 's/,,*/,/g' \
-e 's/^,//' \
-e 's/,$//'
-}
+ }
-# Remove an option (the first parameter) without any arguments from
-# a mount option string (the rest of the parameters).
-parse_nonumber_mount_opts () {
+ # Remove an option (the first parameter) without any arguments from
+ # a mount option string (the rest of the parameters).
+ parse_nonumber_mount_opts () {
OPT="$1"
shift
echo ",$*," | sed \
@@ -456,20 +458,20 @@ parse_nonumber_mount_opts () {
-e 's/,,*/,/g' \
-e 's/^,//' \
-e 's/,$//'
-}
+ }
-# Find out the state of a yes/no option (e.g. "atime"/"noatime") in
-# fstab for a given filesystem, and use this state to replace the
-# value of the option in another mount options string. The device
-# is the first argument, the option name the second, and the default
-# value the third. The remainder is the mount options string.
-#
-# Example:
-# parse_yesno_opts_wfstab /dev/hda1 atime atime defaults,noatime
-#
-# If fstab contains, say, "rw" for this filesystem, then the result
-# will be "defaults,atime".
-parse_yesno_opts_wfstab () {
+ # Find out the state of a yes/no option (e.g. "atime"/"noatime") in
+ # fstab for a given filesystem, and use this state to replace the
+ # value of the option in another mount options string. The device
+ # is the first argument, the option name the second, and the default
+ # value the third. The remainder is the mount options string.
+ #
+ # Example:
+ # parse_yesno_opts_wfstab /dev/hda1 atime atime defaults,noatime
+ #
+ # If fstab contains, say, "rw" for this filesystem, then the result
+ # will be "defaults,atime".
+ parse_yesno_opts_wfstab () {
L_DEV="$1"
OPT="$2"
DEF_OPT="$3"
@@ -491,21 +493,21 @@ parse_yesno_opts_wfstab () {
# option not specified in fstab -- choose the default.
echo "$PARSEDOPTS1,$DEF_OPT"
fi
-}
+ }
-# Find out the state of a numbered option (e.g. "commit=NNN") in
-# fstab for a given filesystem, and use this state to replace the
-# value of the option in another mount options string. The device
-# is the first argument, and the option name the second. The
-# remainder is the mount options string in which the replacement
-# must be done.
-#
-# Example:
-# parse_mount_opts_wfstab /dev/hda1 commit defaults,commit=7
-#
-# If fstab contains, say, "commit=3,rw" for this filesystem, then the
-# result will be "rw,commit=3".
-parse_mount_opts_wfstab () {
+ # Find out the state of a numbered option (e.g. "commit=NNN") in
+ # fstab for a given filesystem, and use this state to replace the
+ # value of the option in another mount options string. The device
+ # is the first argument, and the option name the second. The
+ # remainder is the mount options string in which the replacement
+ # must be done.
+ #
+ # Example:
+ # parse_mount_opts_wfstab /dev/hda1 commit defaults,commit=7
+ #
+ # If fstab contains, say, "commit=3,rw" for this filesystem, then the
+ # result will be "rw,commit=3".
+ parse_mount_opts_wfstab () {
L_DEV="$1"
OPT="$2"
shift 2
@@ -523,9 +525,9 @@ parse_mount_opts_wfstab () {
# option not specified in fstab: set it to 0
echo "$PARSEDOPTS1,$OPT=0"
fi
-}
+ }
-deduce_fstype () {
+ deduce_fstype () {
MP="$1"
# My root filesystem unfortunately has
# type "unknown" in /etc/mtab. If we encounter
@@ -538,13 +540,13 @@ deduce_fstype () {
exit 0
fi
done
-}
+ }
-if [ $DO_REMOUNT_NOATIME -eq 1 ] ; then
+ if [ $DO_REMOUNT_NOATIME -eq 1 ] ; then
NOATIME_OPT=",noatime"
-fi
+ fi
-case "$1" in
+ case "$1" in
start)
AGE=$((100*$MAX_AGE))
XFS_AGE=$(($XFS_HZ*$MAX_AGE))
@@ -687,10 +689,9 @@ case "$1" in
exit 1
;;
-esac
+ esac
-exit 0
---------------------CONTROL SCRIPT END------------------------------------------
+ exit 0
ACPI integration
@@ -701,78 +702,76 @@ kick off the laptop_mode script and run hdparm. The part that
automatically disables laptop mode when the battery is low was
written by Jan Topinski.
------------------/etc/acpi/events/ac_adapter BEGIN------------------------------
-event=ac_adapter
-action=/etc/acpi/actions/ac.sh %e
-----------------/etc/acpi/events/ac_adapter END---------------------------------
+/etc/acpi/events/ac_adapter::
+ event=ac_adapter
+ action=/etc/acpi/actions/ac.sh %e
------------------/etc/acpi/events/battery BEGIN---------------------------------
-event=battery.*
-action=/etc/acpi/actions/battery.sh %e
-----------------/etc/acpi/events/battery END------------------------------------
+/etc/acpi/events/battery::
+ event=battery.*
+ action=/etc/acpi/actions/battery.sh %e
-----------------/etc/acpi/actions/ac.sh BEGIN-----------------------------------
-#!/bin/bash
+/etc/acpi/actions/ac.sh::
-# ac on/offline event handler
+ #!/bin/bash
-status=`awk '/^state: / { print $2 }' /proc/acpi/ac_adapter/$2/state`
+ # ac on/offline event handler
-case $status in
- "on-line")
- /sbin/laptop_mode stop
- exit 0
- ;;
- "off-line")
- /sbin/laptop_mode start
- exit 0
- ;;
-esac
----------------------------/etc/acpi/actions/ac.sh END--------------------------
+ status=`awk '/^state: / { print $2 }' /proc/acpi/ac_adapter/$2/state`
+ case $status in
+ "on-line")
+ /sbin/laptop_mode stop
+ exit 0
+ ;;
+ "off-line")
+ /sbin/laptop_mode start
+ exit 0
+ ;;
+ esac
----------------------------/etc/acpi/actions/battery.sh BEGIN-------------------
-#! /bin/bash
-# Automatically disable laptop mode when the battery almost runs out.
+/etc/acpi/actions/battery.sh::
-BATT_INFO=/proc/acpi/battery/$2/state
+ #! /bin/bash
-if [[ -f /proc/sys/vm/laptop_mode ]]
-then
- LM=`cat /proc/sys/vm/laptop_mode`
- if [[ $LM -gt 0 ]]
- then
- if [[ -f $BATT_INFO ]]
+ # Automatically disable laptop mode when the battery almost runs out.
+
+ BATT_INFO=/proc/acpi/battery/$2/state
+
+ if [[ -f /proc/sys/vm/laptop_mode ]]
+ then
+ LM=`cat /proc/sys/vm/laptop_mode`
+ if [[ $LM -gt 0 ]]
then
- # Source the config file only now that we know we need
- if [ -f /etc/default/laptop-mode ] ; then
- # Debian
- . /etc/default/laptop-mode
- elif [ -f /etc/sysconfig/laptop-mode ] ; then
- # Others
- . /etc/sysconfig/laptop-mode
- fi
- MINIMUM_BATTERY_MINUTES=${MINIMUM_BATTERY_MINUTES:-'10'}
+ if [[ -f $BATT_INFO ]]
+ then
+ # Source the config file only now that we know we need
+ if [ -f /etc/default/laptop-mode ] ; then
+ # Debian
+ . /etc/default/laptop-mode
+ elif [ -f /etc/sysconfig/laptop-mode ] ; then
+ # Others
+ . /etc/sysconfig/laptop-mode
+ fi
+ MINIMUM_BATTERY_MINUTES=${MINIMUM_BATTERY_MINUTES:-'10'}
- ACTION="`cat $BATT_INFO | grep charging | cut -c 26-`"
- if [[ ACTION -eq "discharging" ]]
- then
- PRESENT_RATE=`cat $BATT_INFO | grep "present rate:" | sed "s/.* \([0-9][0-9]* \).*/\1/" `
- REMAINING=`cat $BATT_INFO | grep "remaining capacity:" | sed "s/.* \([0-9][0-9]* \).*/\1/" `
- fi
- if (($REMAINING * 60 / $PRESENT_RATE < $MINIMUM_BATTERY_MINUTES))
- then
- /sbin/laptop_mode stop
- fi
- else
- logger -p daemon.warning "You are using laptop mode and your battery interface $BATT_INFO is missing. This may lead to loss of data when the battery runs out. Check kernel ACPI support and /proc/acpi/battery folder, and edit /etc/acpi/battery.sh to set BATT_INFO to the correct path."
+ ACTION="`cat $BATT_INFO | grep charging | cut -c 26-`"
+ if [[ ACTION -eq "discharging" ]]
+ then
+ PRESENT_RATE=`cat $BATT_INFO | grep "present rate:" | sed "s/.* \([0-9][0-9]* \).*/\1/" `
+ REMAINING=`cat $BATT_INFO | grep "remaining capacity:" | sed "s/.* \([0-9][0-9]* \).*/\1/" `
+ fi
+ if (($REMAINING * 60 / $PRESENT_RATE < $MINIMUM_BATTERY_MINUTES))
+ then
+ /sbin/laptop_mode stop
+ fi
+ else
+ logger -p daemon.warning "You are using laptop mode and your battery interface $BATT_INFO is missing. This may lead to loss of data when the battery runs out. Check kernel ACPI support and /proc/acpi/battery folder, and edit /etc/acpi/battery.sh to set BATT_INFO to the correct path."
+ fi
fi
- fi
-fi
----------------------------/etc/acpi/actions/battery.sh END--------------------
+ fi
Monitoring tool
diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/sony-laptop.txt b/Documentation/laptops/sony-laptop.rst
similarity index 85%
rename from Documentation/laptops/sony-laptop.txt
rename to Documentation/laptops/sony-laptop.rst
index 978b1e615155..9edcc7f6612f 100644
--- a/Documentation/laptops/sony-laptop.txt
+++ b/Documentation/laptops/sony-laptop.rst
@@ -1,7 +1,9 @@
+=========================================
Sony Notebook Control Driver (SNC) Readme
------------------------------------------
- Copyright (C) 2004- 2005 Stelian Pop <stelian@popies.net>
- Copyright (C) 2007 Mattia Dongili <malattia@linux.it>
+=========================================
+
+ - Copyright (C) 2004- 2005 Stelian Pop <stelian@popies.net>
+ - Copyright (C) 2007 Mattia Dongili <malattia@linux.it>
This mini-driver drives the SNC and SPIC device present in the ACPI BIOS of the
Sony Vaio laptops. This driver mixes both devices functions under the same
@@ -10,6 +12,7 @@ obsoleted by sony-laptop now.
Fn keys (hotkeys):
------------------
+
Some models report hotkeys through the SNC or SPIC devices, such events are
reported both through the ACPI subsystem as acpi events and through the INPUT
subsystem. See the logs of /proc/bus/input/devices to find out what those
@@ -28,11 +31,14 @@ If your laptop model supports it, you will find sysfs files in the
/sys/class/backlight/sony/
directory. You will be able to query and set the current screen
brightness:
+
+ ====================== =========================================
brightness get/set screen brightness (an integer
between 0 and 7)
actual_brightness reading from this file will query the HW
to get real brightness value
max_brightness the maximum brightness value
+ ====================== =========================================
Platform specific:
@@ -45,6 +51,8 @@ You then read/write integer values from/to those files by using
standard UNIX tools.
The files are:
+
+ ====================== ==========================================
brightness_default screen brightness which will be set
when the laptop will be rebooted
cdpower power on/off the internal CD drive
@@ -53,21 +61,39 @@ The files are:
(only in debug mode)
bluetoothpower power on/off the internal bluetooth device
fanspeed get/set the fan speed
+ ====================== ==========================================
Note that some files may be missing if they are not supported
by your particular laptop model.
-Example usage:
+Example usage::
+
# echo "1" > /sys/devices/platform/sony-laptop/brightness_default
-sets the lowest screen brightness for the next and later reboots,
+
+sets the lowest screen brightness for the next and later reboots
+
+::
+
# echo "8" > /sys/devices/platform/sony-laptop/brightness_default
-sets the highest screen brightness for the next and later reboots,
+
+sets the highest screen brightness for the next and later reboots
+
+::
+
# cat /sys/devices/platform/sony-laptop/brightness_default
-retrieves the value.
+
+retrieves the value
+
+::
# echo "0" > /sys/devices/platform/sony-laptop/audiopower
-powers off the sound card,
+
+powers off the sound card
+
+::
+
# echo "1" > /sys/devices/platform/sony-laptop/audiopower
+
powers on the sound card.
@@ -76,7 +102,8 @@ RFkill control:
More recent Vaio models expose a consistent set of ACPI methods to
control radio frequency emitting devices. If you are a lucky owner of
such a laptop you will find the necessary rfkill devices under
-/sys/class/rfkill. Check those starting with sony-* in
+/sys/class/rfkill. Check those starting with sony-* in::
+
# grep . /sys/class/rfkill/*/{state,name}
@@ -88,26 +115,29 @@ you are not afraid of any side effects doing strange things with
your ACPI BIOS could have on your laptop), load the driver and
pass the option 'debug=1'.
-REPEAT: DON'T DO THIS IF YOU DON'T LIKE RISKY BUSINESS.
+REPEAT:
+ **DON'T DO THIS IF YOU DON'T LIKE RISKY BUSINESS.**
In your kernel logs you will find the list of all ACPI methods
the SNC device has on your laptop.
* For new models you will see a long list of meaningless method names,
-reading the DSDT table source should reveal that:
+ reading the DSDT table source should reveal that:
+
(1) the SNC device uses an internal capability lookup table
(2) SN00 is used to find values in the lookup table
(3) SN06 and SN07 are used to call into the real methods based on
offsets you can obtain iterating the table using SN00
(4) SN02 used to enable events.
+
Some values in the capability lookup table are more or less known, see
the code for all sony_call_snc_handle calls, others are more obscure.
* For old models you can see the GCDP/GCDP methods used to pwer on/off
-the CD drive, but there are others and they are usually different from
-model to model.
+ the CD drive, but there are others and they are usually different from
+ model to model.
-I HAVE NO IDEA WHAT THOSE METHODS DO.
+**I HAVE NO IDEA WHAT THOSE METHODS DO.**
The sony-laptop driver creates, for some of those methods (the most
current ones found on several Vaio models), an entry under
diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/sonypi.txt b/Documentation/laptops/sonypi.rst
similarity index 87%
rename from Documentation/laptops/sonypi.txt
rename to Documentation/laptops/sonypi.rst
index 606bdb9ce036..2a1975ed7ee4 100644
--- a/Documentation/laptops/sonypi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/laptops/sonypi.rst
@@ -1,11 +1,13 @@
+==================================================
Sony Programmable I/O Control Device Driver Readme
---------------------------------------------------
- Copyright (C) 2001-2004 Stelian Pop <stelian@popies.net>
- Copyright (C) 2001-2002 Alcôve <www.alcove.com>
- Copyright (C) 2001 Michael Ashley <m.ashley@unsw.edu.au>
- Copyright (C) 2001 Junichi Morita <jun1m@mars.dti.ne.jp>
- Copyright (C) 2000 Takaya Kinjo <t-kinjo@tc4.so-net.ne.jp>
- Copyright (C) 2000 Andrew Tridgell <tridge@samba.org>
+==================================================
+
+ - Copyright (C) 2001-2004 Stelian Pop <stelian@popies.net>
+ - Copyright (C) 2001-2002 Alcôve <www.alcove.com>
+ - Copyright (C) 2001 Michael Ashley <m.ashley@unsw.edu.au>
+ - Copyright (C) 2001 Junichi Morita <jun1m@mars.dti.ne.jp>
+ - Copyright (C) 2000 Takaya Kinjo <t-kinjo@tc4.so-net.ne.jp>
+ - Copyright (C) 2000 Andrew Tridgell <tridge@samba.org>
This driver enables access to the Sony Programmable I/O Control Device which
can be found in many Sony Vaio laptops. Some newer Sony laptops (seems to be
@@ -14,6 +16,7 @@ sonypi device and are not supported at all by this driver.
It will give access (through a user space utility) to some events those laptops
generate, like:
+
- jogdial events (the small wheel on the side of Vaios)
- capture button events (only on Vaio Picturebook series)
- Fn keys
@@ -49,6 +52,7 @@ module argument syntax (<param>=<value> when passing the option to the
module or sonypi.<param>=<value> on the kernel boot line when sonypi is
statically linked into the kernel). Those options are:
+ =============== =======================================================
minor: minor number of the misc device /dev/sonypi,
default is -1 (automatic allocation, see /proc/misc
or kernel logs)
@@ -86,6 +90,8 @@ statically linked into the kernel). Those options are:
will be tried. You can use the following bits to
construct your own event mask (from
drivers/char/sonypi.h):
+
+ ======================== ======
SONYPI_JOGGER_MASK 0x0001
SONYPI_CAPTURE_MASK 0x0002
SONYPI_FNKEY_MASK 0x0004
@@ -100,22 +106,24 @@ statically linked into the kernel). Those options are:
SONYPI_MEMORYSTICK_MASK 0x0800
SONYPI_BATTERY_MASK 0x1000
SONYPI_WIRELESS_MASK 0x2000
+ ======================== ======
useinput: if set (which is the default) two input devices are
created, one which interprets the jogdial events as
mouse events, the other one which acts like a
keyboard reporting the pressing of the special keys.
+ =============== =======================================================
Module use:
-----------
In order to automatically load the sonypi module on use, you can put those
-lines a configuration file in /etc/modprobe.d/:
+lines a configuration file in /etc/modprobe.d/::
alias char-major-10-250 sonypi
options sonypi minor=250
-This supposes the use of minor 250 for the sonypi device:
+This supposes the use of minor 250 for the sonypi device::
# mknod /dev/sonypi c 10 250
@@ -148,5 +156,5 @@ Bugs:
http://www.acc.umu.se/~erikw/program/smartdimmer-0.1.tar.bz2
- since all development was done by reverse engineering, there is
- _absolutely no guarantee_ that this driver will not crash your
+ *absolutely no guarantee* that this driver will not crash your
laptop. Permanently.
diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt b/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.rst
similarity index 89%
rename from Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt
rename to Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.rst
index 75ef063622d2..19d52fc3c5e9 100644
--- a/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.rst
@@ -1,12 +1,15 @@
- ThinkPad ACPI Extras Driver
+===========================
+ThinkPad ACPI Extras Driver
+===========================
- Version 0.25
- October 16th, 2013
+Version 0.25
- Borislav Deianov <borislav@users.sf.net>
- Henrique de Moraes Holschuh <hmh@hmh.eng.br>
- http://ibm-acpi.sf.net/
+October 16th, 2013
+- Borislav Deianov <borislav@users.sf.net>
+- Henrique de Moraes Holschuh <hmh@hmh.eng.br>
+
+http://ibm-acpi.sf.net/
This is a Linux driver for the IBM and Lenovo ThinkPad laptops. It
supports various features of these laptops which are accessible
@@ -91,7 +94,8 @@ yet ready or stabilized, it is expected that this interface will change,
and any and all userspace programs must deal with it.
-Notes about the sysfs interface:
+Notes about the sysfs interface
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
Unlike what was done with the procfs interface, correctness when talking
to the sysfs interfaces will be enforced, as will correctness in the
@@ -129,6 +133,7 @@ Driver version
--------------
procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/driver
+
sysfs driver attribute: version
The driver name and version. No commands can be written to this file.
@@ -141,9 +146,13 @@ sysfs driver attribute: interface_version
Version of the thinkpad-acpi sysfs interface, as an unsigned long
(output in hex format: 0xAAAABBCC), where:
- AAAA - major revision
- BB - minor revision
- CC - bugfix revision
+
+ AAAA
+ - major revision
+ BB
+ - minor revision
+ CC
+ - bugfix revision
The sysfs interface version changelog for the driver can be found at the
end of this document. Changes to the sysfs interface done by the kernel
@@ -170,6 +179,7 @@ Hot keys
--------
procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/hotkey
+
sysfs device attribute: hotkey_*
In a ThinkPad, the ACPI HKEY handler is responsible for communicating
@@ -181,7 +191,7 @@ firmware will behave in many situations.
The driver enables the HKEY ("hot key") event reporting automatically
when loaded, and disables it when it is removed.
-The driver will report HKEY events in the following format:
+The driver will report HKEY events in the following format::
ibm/hotkey HKEY 00000080 0000xxxx
@@ -217,9 +227,10 @@ ThinkPads, it is still possible to support some extra hotkeys by
polling the "CMOS NVRAM" at least 10 times per second. The driver
attempts to enables this functionality automatically when required.
-procfs notes:
+procfs notes
+^^^^^^^^^^^^
-The following commands can be written to the /proc/acpi/ibm/hotkey file:
+The following commands can be written to the /proc/acpi/ibm/hotkey file::
echo 0xffffffff > /proc/acpi/ibm/hotkey -- enable all hot keys
echo 0 > /proc/acpi/ibm/hotkey -- disable all possible hot keys
@@ -227,7 +238,7 @@ The following commands can be written to the /proc/acpi/ibm/hotkey file:
echo reset > /proc/acpi/ibm/hotkey -- restore the recommended mask
The following commands have been deprecated and will cause the kernel
-to log a warning:
+to log a warning::
echo enable > /proc/acpi/ibm/hotkey -- does nothing
echo disable > /proc/acpi/ibm/hotkey -- returns an error
@@ -237,7 +248,8 @@ maintain maximum bug-to-bug compatibility, it does not report any masks,
nor does it allow one to manipulate the hot key mask when the firmware
does not support masks at all, even if NVRAM polling is in use.
-sysfs notes:
+sysfs notes
+^^^^^^^^^^^
hotkey_bios_enabled:
DEPRECATED, WILL BE REMOVED SOON.
@@ -349,7 +361,8 @@ sysfs notes:
This attribute has poll()/select() support.
-input layer notes:
+input layer notes
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
A Hot key is mapped to a single input layer EV_KEY event, possibly
followed by an EV_MSC MSC_SCAN event that shall contain that key's scan
@@ -362,11 +375,13 @@ remapping KEY_UNKNOWN keys.
The events are available in an input device, with the following id:
- Bus: BUS_HOST
- vendor: 0x1014 (PCI_VENDOR_ID_IBM) or
+ ============== ==============================
+ Bus BUS_HOST
+ vendor 0x1014 (PCI_VENDOR_ID_IBM) or
0x17aa (PCI_VENDOR_ID_LENOVO)
- product: 0x5054 ("TP")
- version: 0x4101
+ product 0x5054 ("TP")
+ version 0x4101
+ ============== ==============================
The version will have its LSB incremented if the keymap changes in a
backwards-compatible way. The MSB shall always be 0x41 for this input
@@ -380,9 +395,10 @@ backwards-compatible change for this input device.
Thinkpad-acpi Hot Key event map (version 0x4101):
+======= ======= ============== ==============================================
ACPI Scan
event code Key Notes
-
+======= ======= ============== ==============================================
0x1001 0x00 FN+F1 -
0x1002 0x01 FN+F2 IBM: battery (rare)
@@ -426,7 +442,9 @@ event code Key Notes
or toggle screen expand
0x1009 0x08 FN+F9 -
- .. .. ..
+
+... ... ... ...
+
0x100B 0x0A FN+F11 -
0x100C 0x0B FN+F12 Sleep to disk. You are always
@@ -480,8 +498,11 @@ event code Key Notes
0x1018 0x17 THINKPAD ThinkPad/Access IBM/Lenovo key
0x1019 0x18 unknown
-.. .. ..
+
+... ... ...
+
0x1020 0x1F unknown
+======= ======= ============== ==============================================
The ThinkPad firmware does not allow one to differentiate when most hot
keys are pressed or released (either that, or we don't know how to, yet).
@@ -499,14 +520,17 @@ generate input device EV_KEY events.
In addition to the EV_KEY events, thinkpad-acpi may also issue EV_SW
events for switches:
+============== ==============================================
SW_RFKILL_ALL T60 and later hardware rfkill rocker switch
SW_TABLET_MODE Tablet ThinkPads HKEY events 0x5009 and 0x500A
+============== ==============================================
-Non hotkey ACPI HKEY event map:
--------------------------------
+Non hotkey ACPI HKEY event map
+------------------------------
Events that are never propagated by the driver:
+====== ==================================================
0x2304 System is waking up from suspend to undock
0x2305 System is waking up from suspend to eject bay
0x2404 System is waking up from hibernation to undock
@@ -519,10 +543,12 @@ Events that are never propagated by the driver:
0x6000 KEYBOARD: Numlock key pressed
0x6005 KEYBOARD: Fn key pressed (TO BE VERIFIED)
0x7000 Radio Switch may have changed state
+====== ==================================================
Events that are propagated by the driver to userspace:
+====== =====================================================
0x2313 ALARM: System is waking up from suspend because
the battery is nearly empty
0x2413 ALARM: System is waking up from hibernation because
@@ -544,6 +570,7 @@ Events that are propagated by the driver to userspace:
0x6040 Nvidia Optimus/AC adapter related (TO BE VERIFIED)
0x60C0 X1 Yoga 2016, Tablet mode status changed
0x60F0 Thermal Transformation changed (GMTS, Windows)
+====== =====================================================
Battery nearly empty alarms are a last resort attempt to get the
operating system to hibernate or shutdown cleanly (0x2313), or shutdown
@@ -562,7 +589,8 @@ cycle, or a system shutdown. Obviously, something is very wrong if this
happens.
-Brightness hotkey notes:
+Brightness hotkey notes
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
Don't mess with the brightness hotkeys in a Thinkpad. If you want
notifications for OSD, use the sysfs backlight class event support.
@@ -579,7 +607,9 @@ Bluetooth
---------
procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/bluetooth
+
sysfs device attribute: bluetooth_enable (deprecated)
+
sysfs rfkill class: switch "tpacpi_bluetooth_sw"
This feature shows the presence and current state of a ThinkPad
@@ -588,22 +618,25 @@ Bluetooth device in the internal ThinkPad CDC slot.
If the ThinkPad supports it, the Bluetooth state is stored in NVRAM,
so it is kept across reboots and power-off.
-Procfs notes:
+Procfs notes
+^^^^^^^^^^^^
-If Bluetooth is installed, the following commands can be used:
+If Bluetooth is installed, the following commands can be used::
echo enable > /proc/acpi/ibm/bluetooth
echo disable > /proc/acpi/ibm/bluetooth
-Sysfs notes:
+Sysfs notes
+^^^^^^^^^^^
If the Bluetooth CDC card is installed, it can be enabled /
disabled through the "bluetooth_enable" thinkpad-acpi device
attribute, and its current status can also be queried.
enable:
- 0: disables Bluetooth / Bluetooth is disabled
- 1: enables Bluetooth / Bluetooth is enabled.
+
+ - 0: disables Bluetooth / Bluetooth is disabled
+ - 1: enables Bluetooth / Bluetooth is enabled.
Note: this interface has been superseded by the generic rfkill
class. It has been deprecated, and it will be removed in year
@@ -617,7 +650,7 @@ Video output control -- /proc/acpi/ibm/video
--------------------------------------------
This feature allows control over the devices used for video output -
-LCD, CRT or DVI (if available). The following commands are available:
+LCD, CRT or DVI (if available). The following commands are available::
echo lcd_enable > /proc/acpi/ibm/video
echo lcd_disable > /proc/acpi/ibm/video
@@ -630,9 +663,10 @@ LCD, CRT or DVI (if available). The following commands are available:
echo expand_toggle > /proc/acpi/ibm/video
echo video_switch > /proc/acpi/ibm/video
-NOTE: Access to this feature is restricted to processes owning the
-CAP_SYS_ADMIN capability for safety reasons, as it can interact badly
-enough with some versions of X.org to crash it.
+NOTE:
+ Access to this feature is restricted to processes owning the
+ CAP_SYS_ADMIN capability for safety reasons, as it can interact badly
+ enough with some versions of X.org to crash it.
Each video output device can be enabled or disabled individually.
Reading /proc/acpi/ibm/video shows the status of each device.
@@ -665,18 +699,21 @@ ThinkLight control
------------------
procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/light
+
sysfs attributes: as per LED class, for the "tpacpi::thinklight" LED
-procfs notes:
+procfs notes
+^^^^^^^^^^^^
The ThinkLight status can be read and set through the procfs interface. A
few models which do not make the status available will show the ThinkLight
-status as "unknown". The available commands are:
+status as "unknown". The available commands are::
echo on > /proc/acpi/ibm/light
echo off > /proc/acpi/ibm/light
-sysfs notes:
+sysfs notes
+^^^^^^^^^^^
The ThinkLight sysfs interface is documented by the LED class
documentation, in Documentation/leds/leds-class.rst. The ThinkLight LED name
@@ -691,6 +728,7 @@ CMOS/UCMS control
-----------------
procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/cmos
+
sysfs device attribute: cmos_command
This feature is mostly used internally by the ACPI firmware to keep the legacy
@@ -707,16 +745,16 @@ The range of valid cmos command numbers is 0 to 21, but not all have an
effect and the behavior varies from model to model. Here is the behavior
on the X40 (tpb is the ThinkPad Buttons utility):
- 0 - Related to "Volume down" key press
- 1 - Related to "Volume up" key press
- 2 - Related to "Mute on" key press
- 3 - Related to "Access IBM" key press
- 4 - Related to "LCD brightness up" key press
- 5 - Related to "LCD brightness down" key press
- 11 - Related to "toggle screen expansion" key press/function
- 12 - Related to "ThinkLight on"
- 13 - Related to "ThinkLight off"
- 14 - Related to "ThinkLight" key press (toggle ThinkLight)
+ - 0 - Related to "Volume down" key press
+ - 1 - Related to "Volume up" key press
+ - 2 - Related to "Mute on" key press
+ - 3 - Related to "Access IBM" key press
+ - 4 - Related to "LCD brightness up" key press
+ - 5 - Related to "LCD brightness down" key press
+ - 11 - Related to "toggle screen expansion" key press/function
+ - 12 - Related to "ThinkLight on"
+ - 13 - Related to "ThinkLight off"
+ - 14 - Related to "ThinkLight" key press (toggle ThinkLight)
The cmos command interface is prone to firmware split-brain problems, as
in newer ThinkPads it is just a compatibility layer. Do not use it, it is
@@ -748,9 +786,10 @@ are aware of the consequences are welcome to enabling it.
Audio mute and microphone mute LEDs are supported, but currently not
visible to userspace. They are used by the snd-hda-intel audio driver.
-procfs notes:
+procfs notes
+^^^^^^^^^^^^
-The available commands are:
+The available commands are::
echo '<LED number> on' >/proc/acpi/ibm/led
echo '<LED number> off' >/proc/acpi/ibm/led
@@ -760,23 +799,24 @@ The <LED number> range is 0 to 15. The set of LEDs that can be
controlled varies from model to model. Here is the common ThinkPad
mapping:
- 0 - power
- 1 - battery (orange)
- 2 - battery (green)
- 3 - UltraBase/dock
- 4 - UltraBay
- 5 - UltraBase battery slot
- 6 - (unknown)
- 7 - standby
- 8 - dock status 1
- 9 - dock status 2
- 10, 11 - (unknown)
- 12 - thinkvantage
- 13, 14, 15 - (unknown)
+ - 0 - power
+ - 1 - battery (orange)
+ - 2 - battery (green)
+ - 3 - UltraBase/dock
+ - 4 - UltraBay
+ - 5 - UltraBase battery slot
+ - 6 - (unknown)
+ - 7 - standby
+ - 8 - dock status 1
+ - 9 - dock status 2
+ - 10, 11 - (unknown)
+ - 12 - thinkvantage
+ - 13, 14, 15 - (unknown)
All of the above can be turned on and off and can be made to blink.
-sysfs notes:
+sysfs notes
+^^^^^^^^^^^
The ThinkPad LED sysfs interface is described in detail by the LED class
documentation, in Documentation/leds/leds-class.rst.
@@ -815,7 +855,7 @@ The BEEP method is used internally by the ACPI firmware to provide
audible alerts in various situations. This feature allows the same
sounds to be triggered manually.
-The commands are non-negative integer numbers:
+The commands are non-negative integer numbers::
echo <number> >/proc/acpi/ibm/beep
@@ -823,25 +863,26 @@ The valid <number> range is 0 to 17. Not all numbers trigger sounds
and the sounds vary from model to model. Here is the behavior on the
X40:
- 0 - stop a sound in progress (but use 17 to stop 16)
- 2 - two beeps, pause, third beep ("low battery")
- 3 - single beep
- 4 - high, followed by low-pitched beep ("unable")
- 5 - single beep
- 6 - very high, followed by high-pitched beep ("AC/DC")
- 7 - high-pitched beep
- 9 - three short beeps
- 10 - very long beep
- 12 - low-pitched beep
- 15 - three high-pitched beeps repeating constantly, stop with 0
- 16 - one medium-pitched beep repeating constantly, stop with 17
- 17 - stop 16
+ - 0 - stop a sound in progress (but use 17 to stop 16)
+ - 2 - two beeps, pause, third beep ("low battery")
+ - 3 - single beep
+ - 4 - high, followed by low-pitched beep ("unable")
+ - 5 - single beep
+ - 6 - very high, followed by high-pitched beep ("AC/DC")
+ - 7 - high-pitched beep
+ - 9 - three short beeps
+ - 10 - very long beep
+ - 12 - low-pitched beep
+ - 15 - three high-pitched beeps repeating constantly, stop with 0
+ - 16 - one medium-pitched beep repeating constantly, stop with 17
+ - 17 - stop 16
Temperature sensors
-------------------
procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/thermal
+
sysfs device attributes: (hwmon "thinkpad") temp*_input
Most ThinkPads include six or more separate temperature sensors but only
@@ -850,10 +891,14 @@ feature shows readings from up to eight different sensors on older
ThinkPads, and up to sixteen different sensors on newer ThinkPads.
For example, on the X40, a typical output may be:
-temperatures: 42 42 45 41 36 -128 33 -128
+
+temperatures:
+ 42 42 45 41 36 -128 33 -128
On the T43/p, a typical output may be:
-temperatures: 48 48 36 52 38 -128 31 -128 48 52 48 -128 -128 -128 -128 -128
+
+temperatures:
+ 48 48 36 52 38 -128 31 -128 48 52 48 -128 -128 -128 -128 -128
The mapping of thermal sensors to physical locations varies depending on
system-board model (and thus, on ThinkPad model).
@@ -863,46 +908,53 @@ tries to track down these locations for various models.
Most (newer?) models seem to follow this pattern:
-1: CPU
-2: (depends on model)
-3: (depends on model)
-4: GPU
-5: Main battery: main sensor
-6: Bay battery: main sensor
-7: Main battery: secondary sensor
-8: Bay battery: secondary sensor
-9-15: (depends on model)
+- 1: CPU
+- 2: (depends on model)
+- 3: (depends on model)
+- 4: GPU
+- 5: Main battery: main sensor
+- 6: Bay battery: main sensor
+- 7: Main battery: secondary sensor
+- 8: Bay battery: secondary sensor
+- 9-15: (depends on model)
For the R51 (source: Thomas Gruber):
-2: Mini-PCI
-3: Internal HDD
+
+- 2: Mini-PCI
+- 3: Internal HDD
For the T43, T43/p (source: Shmidoax/Thinkwiki.org)
http://thinkwiki.org/wiki/Thermal_Sensors#ThinkPad_T43.2C_T43p
-2: System board, left side (near PCMCIA slot), reported as HDAPS temp
-3: PCMCIA slot
-9: MCH (northbridge) to DRAM Bus
-10: Clock-generator, mini-pci card and ICH (southbridge), under Mini-PCI
- card, under touchpad
-11: Power regulator, underside of system board, below F2 key
+
+- 2: System board, left side (near PCMCIA slot), reported as HDAPS temp
+- 3: PCMCIA slot
+- 9: MCH (northbridge) to DRAM Bus
+- 10: Clock-generator, mini-pci card and ICH (southbridge), under Mini-PCI
+ card, under touchpad
+- 11: Power regulator, underside of system board, below F2 key
The A31 has a very atypical layout for the thermal sensors
(source: Milos Popovic, http://thinkwiki.org/wiki/Thermal_Sensors#ThinkPad_A31)
-1: CPU
-2: Main Battery: main sensor
-3: Power Converter
-4: Bay Battery: main sensor
-5: MCH (northbridge)
-6: PCMCIA/ambient
-7: Main Battery: secondary sensor
-8: Bay Battery: secondary sensor
+- 1: CPU
+- 2: Main Battery: main sensor
+- 3: Power Converter
+- 4: Bay Battery: main sensor
+- 5: MCH (northbridge)
+- 6: PCMCIA/ambient
+- 7: Main Battery: secondary sensor
+- 8: Bay Battery: secondary sensor
+
+
+Procfs notes
+^^^^^^^^^^^^
-Procfs notes:
Readings from sensors that are not available return -128.
No commands can be written to this file.
-Sysfs notes:
+Sysfs notes
+^^^^^^^^^^^
+
Sensors that are not available return the ENXIO error. This
status may change at runtime, as there are hotplug thermal
sensors, like those inside the batteries and docks.
@@ -921,6 +973,7 @@ ftp://ftp.suse.com/pub/people/trenn/sources/ec
Use it to determine the register holding the fan
speed on some models. To do that, do the following:
+
- make sure the battery is fully charged
- make sure the fan is running
- use above mentioned tool to read out the EC
@@ -941,6 +994,7 @@ LCD brightness control
----------------------
procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/brightness
+
sysfs backlight device "thinkpad_screen"
This feature allows software control of the LCD brightness on ThinkPad
@@ -985,15 +1039,17 @@ brightness_enable=0 forces it to be disabled. brightness_enable=1
forces it to be enabled when available, even if the standard ACPI
interface is also available.
-Procfs notes:
+Procfs notes
+^^^^^^^^^^^^
- The available commands are:
+The available commands are::
echo up >/proc/acpi/ibm/brightness
echo down >/proc/acpi/ibm/brightness
echo 'level <level>' >/proc/acpi/ibm/brightness
-Sysfs notes:
+Sysfs notes
+^^^^^^^^^^^
The interface is implemented through the backlight sysfs class, which is
poorly documented at this time.
@@ -1038,6 +1094,7 @@ Volume control (Console Audio control)
--------------------------------------
procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/volume
+
ALSA: "ThinkPad Console Audio Control", default ID: "ThinkPadEC"
NOTE: by default, the volume control interface operates in read-only
@@ -1053,7 +1110,8 @@ Software volume control should be done only in the main AC97/HDA
mixer.
-About the ThinkPad Console Audio control:
+About the ThinkPad Console Audio control
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
ThinkPads have a built-in amplifier and muting circuit that drives the
console headphone and speakers. This circuit is after the main AC97
@@ -1092,13 +1150,14 @@ normal key presses to the operating system (thinkpad-acpi is not
involved).
-The ThinkPad-ACPI volume control:
+The ThinkPad-ACPI volume control
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
The preferred way to interact with the Console Audio control is the
ALSA interface.
The legacy procfs interface allows one to read the current state,
-and if volume control is enabled, accepts the following commands:
+and if volume control is enabled, accepts the following commands::
echo up >/proc/acpi/ibm/volume
echo down >/proc/acpi/ibm/volume
@@ -1137,13 +1196,15 @@ Fan control and monitoring: fan speed, fan enable/disable
---------------------------------------------------------
procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/fan
-sysfs device attributes: (hwmon "thinkpad") fan1_input, pwm1,
- pwm1_enable, fan2_input
+
+sysfs device attributes: (hwmon "thinkpad") fan1_input, pwm1, pwm1_enable, fan2_input
+
sysfs hwmon driver attributes: fan_watchdog
-NOTE NOTE NOTE: fan control operations are disabled by default for
-safety reasons. To enable them, the module parameter "fan_control=1"
-must be given to thinkpad-acpi.
+NOTE NOTE NOTE:
+ fan control operations are disabled by default for
+ safety reasons. To enable them, the module parameter "fan_control=1"
+ must be given to thinkpad-acpi.
This feature attempts to show the current fan speed, control mode and
other fan data that might be available. The speed is read directly
@@ -1154,7 +1215,8 @@ value on other models.
Some Lenovo ThinkPads support a secondary fan. This fan cannot be
controlled separately, it shares the main fan control.
-Fan levels:
+Fan levels
+^^^^^^^^^^
Most ThinkPad fans work in "levels" at the firmware interface. Level 0
stops the fan. The higher the level, the higher the fan speed, although
@@ -1209,9 +1271,10 @@ therefore, not suitable to protect against fan mode changes made through
means other than the "enable", "disable", and "level" procfs fan
commands, or the hwmon fan control sysfs interface.
-Procfs notes:
+Procfs notes
+^^^^^^^^^^^^
-The fan may be enabled or disabled with the following commands:
+The fan may be enabled or disabled with the following commands::
echo enable >/proc/acpi/ibm/fan
echo disable >/proc/acpi/ibm/fan
@@ -1219,7 +1282,7 @@ The fan may be enabled or disabled with the following commands:
Placing a fan on level 0 is the same as disabling it. Enabling a fan
will try to place it in a safe level if it is too slow or disabled.
-The fan level can be controlled with the command:
+The fan level can be controlled with the command::
echo 'level <level>' > /proc/acpi/ibm/fan
@@ -1231,7 +1294,7 @@ compatibility.
On the X31 and X40 (and ONLY on those models), the fan speed can be
controlled to a certain degree. Once the fan is running, it can be
-forced to run faster or slower with the following command:
+forced to run faster or slower with the following command::
echo 'speed <speed>' > /proc/acpi/ibm/fan
@@ -1241,13 +1304,14 @@ effect or the fan speed eventually settles somewhere in that range. The
fan cannot be stopped or started with this command. This functionality
is incomplete, and not available through the sysfs interface.
-To program the safety watchdog, use the "watchdog" command.
+To program the safety watchdog, use the "watchdog" command::
echo 'watchdog <interval in seconds>' > /proc/acpi/ibm/fan
If you want to disable the watchdog, use 0 as the interval.
-Sysfs notes:
+Sysfs notes
+^^^^^^^^^^^
The sysfs interface follows the hwmon subsystem guidelines for the most
part, and the exception is the fan safety watchdog.
@@ -1261,10 +1325,10 @@ to the firmware).
Features not yet implemented by the driver return ENOSYS.
hwmon device attribute pwm1_enable:
- 0: PWM offline (fan is set to full-speed mode)
- 1: Manual PWM control (use pwm1 to set fan level)
- 2: Hardware PWM control (EC "auto" mode)
- 3: reserved (Software PWM control, not implemented yet)
+ - 0: PWM offline (fan is set to full-speed mode)
+ - 1: Manual PWM control (use pwm1 to set fan level)
+ - 2: Hardware PWM control (EC "auto" mode)
+ - 3: reserved (Software PWM control, not implemented yet)
Modes 0 and 2 are not supported by all ThinkPads, and the
driver is not always able to detect this. If it does know a
@@ -1304,7 +1368,9 @@ WAN
---
procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/wan
+
sysfs device attribute: wwan_enable (deprecated)
+
sysfs rfkill class: switch "tpacpi_wwan_sw"
This feature shows the presence and current state of the built-in
@@ -1316,22 +1382,24 @@ so it is kept across reboots and power-off.
It was tested on a Lenovo ThinkPad X60. It should probably work on other
ThinkPad models which come with this module installed.
-Procfs notes:
+Procfs notes
+^^^^^^^^^^^^
-If the W-WAN card is installed, the following commands can be used:
+If the W-WAN card is installed, the following commands can be used::
echo enable > /proc/acpi/ibm/wan
echo disable > /proc/acpi/ibm/wan
-Sysfs notes:
+Sysfs notes
+^^^^^^^^^^^
If the W-WAN card is installed, it can be enabled /
disabled through the "wwan_enable" thinkpad-acpi device
attribute, and its current status can also be queried.
enable:
- 0: disables WWAN card / WWAN card is disabled
- 1: enables WWAN card / WWAN card is enabled.
+ - 0: disables WWAN card / WWAN card is disabled
+ - 1: enables WWAN card / WWAN card is enabled.
Note: this interface has been superseded by the generic rfkill
class. It has been deprecated, and it will be removed in year
@@ -1354,7 +1422,8 @@ sysfs rfkill class: switch "tpacpi_uwb_sw"
This feature exports an rfkill controller for the UWB device, if one is
present and enabled in the BIOS.
-Sysfs notes:
+Sysfs notes
+^^^^^^^^^^^
rfkill controller switch "tpacpi_uwb_sw": refer to
Documentation/rfkill.txt for details.
@@ -1368,11 +1437,11 @@ This sysfs attribute controls the keyboard "face" that will be shown on the
Lenovo X1 Carbon 2nd gen (2014)'s adaptive keyboard. The value can be read
and set.
-1 = Home mode
-2 = Web-browser mode
-3 = Web-conference mode
-4 = Function mode
-5 = Layflat mode
+- 1 = Home mode
+- 2 = Web-browser mode
+- 3 = Web-conference mode
+- 4 = Function mode
+- 5 = Layflat mode
For more details about which buttons will appear depending on the mode, please
review the laptop's user guide:
@@ -1382,13 +1451,13 @@ Multiple Commands, Module Parameters
------------------------------------
Multiple commands can be written to the proc files in one shot by
-separating them with commas, for example:
+separating them with commas, for example::
echo enable,0xffff > /proc/acpi/ibm/hotkey
echo lcd_disable,crt_enable > /proc/acpi/ibm/video
Commands can also be specified when loading the thinkpad-acpi module,
-for example:
+for example::
modprobe thinkpad_acpi hotkey=enable,0xffff video=auto_disable
@@ -1397,14 +1466,16 @@ Enabling debugging output
-------------------------
The module takes a debug parameter which can be used to selectively
-enable various classes of debugging output, for example:
+enable various classes of debugging output, for example::
modprobe thinkpad_acpi debug=0xffff
will enable all debugging output classes. It takes a bitmask, so
to enable more than one output class, just add their values.
+ ============= ======================================
Debug bitmask Description
+ ============= ======================================
0x8000 Disclose PID of userspace programs
accessing some functions of the driver
0x0001 Initialization and probing
@@ -1415,6 +1486,7 @@ to enable more than one output class, just add their values.
0x0010 Fan control
0x0020 Backlight brightness
0x0040 Audio mixer/volume control
+ ============= ======================================
There is also a kernel build option to enable more debugging
information, which may be necessary to debug driver problems.
@@ -1432,8 +1504,10 @@ the module parameter force_load=1. Regardless of whether this works or
not, please contact ibm-acpi-devel@lists.sourceforge.net with a report.
-Sysfs interface changelog:
+Sysfs interface changelog
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+========= ===============================================================
0x000100: Initial sysfs support, as a single platform driver and
device.
0x000200: Hot key support for 32 hot keys, and radio slider switch
@@ -1485,3 +1559,4 @@ Sysfs interface changelog:
0x030000: Thermal and fan sysfs attributes were moved to the hwmon
device instead of being attached to the backing platform
device.
+========= ===============================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/toshiba_haps.txt b/Documentation/laptops/toshiba_haps.rst
similarity index 60%
rename from Documentation/laptops/toshiba_haps.txt
rename to Documentation/laptops/toshiba_haps.rst
index 0c1d88dedbde..11dfc428c080 100644
--- a/Documentation/laptops/toshiba_haps.txt
+++ b/Documentation/laptops/toshiba_haps.rst
@@ -1,18 +1,19 @@
-Kernel driver toshiba_haps
+====================================
Toshiba HDD Active Protection Sensor
====================================
+Kernel driver: toshiba_haps
+
Author: Azael Avalos <coproscefalo@gmail.com>
-0. Contents
------------
+.. 0. Contents
-1. Description
-2. Interface
-3. Accelerometer axes
-4. Supported devices
-5. Usage
+ 1. Description
+ 2. Interface
+ 3. Accelerometer axes
+ 4. Supported devices
+ 5. Usage
1. Description
@@ -32,17 +33,20 @@ file to set the desired protection level or sensor sensibility.
------------
This device comes with 3 methods:
-_STA - Checks existence of the device, returning Zero if the device does not
+
+==== =====================================================================
+_STA Checks existence of the device, returning Zero if the device does not
exists or is not supported.
-PTLV - Sets the desired protection level.
-RSSS - Shuts down the HDD protection interface for a few seconds,
+PTLV Sets the desired protection level.
+RSSS Shuts down the HDD protection interface for a few seconds,
then restores normal operation.
+==== =====================================================================
Note:
-The presence of Solid State Drives (SSD) can make this driver to fail loading,
-given the fact that such drives have no movable parts, and thus, not requiring
-any "protection" as well as failing during the evaluation of the _STA method
-found under this device.
+ The presence of Solid State Drives (SSD) can make this driver to fail loading,
+ given the fact that such drives have no movable parts, and thus, not requiring
+ any "protection" as well as failing during the evaluation of the _STA method
+ found under this device.
3. Accelerometer axes
@@ -66,11 +70,18 @@ conventional HDD and not only SSD, or a combination of both HDD and SSD.
--------
The sysfs files under /sys/devices/LNXSYSTM:00/LNXSYBUS:00/TOS620A:00/ are:
-protection_level - The protection_level is readable and writeable, and
+
+================ ============================================================
+protection_level The protection_level is readable and writeable, and
provides a way to let userspace query the current protection
level, as well as set the desired protection level, the
available protection levels are:
- 0 - Disabled | 1 - Low | 2 - Medium | 3 - High
-reset_protection - The reset_protection entry is writeable only, being "1"
+
+ ============ ======= ========== ========
+ 0 - Disabled 1 - Low 2 - Medium 3 - High
+ ============ ======= ========== ========
+
+reset_protection The reset_protection entry is writeable only, being "1"
the only parameter it accepts, it is used to trigger
a reset of the protection interface.
+================ ============================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt
index 749322060f10..c5f0d44433a2 100644
--- a/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt
@@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ Changing this takes effect whenever an application requests memory.
block_dump
block_dump enables block I/O debugging when set to a nonzero value. More
-information on block I/O debugging is in Documentation/laptops/laptop-mode.txt.
+information on block I/O debugging is in Documentation/laptops/laptop-mode.rst.
==============================================================
@@ -286,7 +286,7 @@ shared memory segment using hugetlb page.
laptop_mode
laptop_mode is a knob that controls "laptop mode". All the things that are
-controlled by this knob are discussed in Documentation/laptops/laptop-mode.txt.
+controlled by this knob are discussed in Documentation/laptops/laptop-mode.rst.
==============================================================
diff --git a/MAINTAINERS b/MAINTAINERS
index cc8a52d2ce83..8aa3d0bd5b80 100644
--- a/MAINTAINERS
+++ b/MAINTAINERS
@@ -14830,7 +14830,7 @@ M: Mattia Dongili <malattia@linux.it>
L: platform-driver-x86@vger.kernel.org
W: http://www.linux.it/~malattia/wiki/index.php/Sony_drivers
S: Maintained
-F: Documentation/laptops/sony-laptop.txt
+F: Documentation/laptops/sony-laptop.rst
F: drivers/char/sonypi.c
F: drivers/platform/x86/sony-laptop.c
F: include/linux/sony-laptop.h
diff --git a/drivers/char/Kconfig b/drivers/char/Kconfig
index 466ebd84ad17..bb734066075f 100644
--- a/drivers/char/Kconfig
+++ b/drivers/char/Kconfig
@@ -382,7 +382,7 @@ config SONYPI
Device which can be found in many (all ?) Sony Vaio laptops.
If you have one of those laptops, read
- <file:Documentation/laptops/sonypi.txt>, and say Y or M here.
+ <file:Documentation/laptops/sonypi.rst>, and say Y or M here.
To compile this driver as a module, choose M here: the
module will be called sonypi.
diff --git a/drivers/platform/x86/Kconfig b/drivers/platform/x86/Kconfig
index c318501773bc..1f616844fb87 100644
--- a/drivers/platform/x86/Kconfig
+++ b/drivers/platform/x86/Kconfig
@@ -448,7 +448,7 @@ config SONY_LAPTOP
screen brightness control, Fn keys and allows powering on/off some
devices.
- Read <file:Documentation/laptops/sony-laptop.txt> for more information.
+ Read <file:Documentation/laptops/sony-laptop.rst> for more information.
config SONYPI_COMPAT
bool "Sonypi compatibility"
@@ -500,7 +500,7 @@ config THINKPAD_ACPI
support for Fn-Fx key combinations, Bluetooth control, video
output switching, ThinkLight control, UltraBay eject and more.
For more information about this driver see
- <file:Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt> and
+ <file:Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.rst> and
<http://ibm-acpi.sf.net/> .
This driver was formerly known as ibm-acpi.
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related
* [PATCH 05/43] docs: powerpc: convert docs to ReST and rename to *.rst
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-28 12:20 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet, Linas Vepstas, Russell Currey, Sam Bobroff,
Oliver O'Halloran, Bjorn Helgaas, Benjamin Herrenschmidt,
Paul Mackerras, Michael Ellerman, Frederic Barrat,
Andrew Donnellan, Manoj N. Kumar, Matthew R. Ochs, Uma Krishnan,
Qiang Zhao, Li Yang, Greg Kroah-Hartman, Jiri Slaby, linux-pci,
linuxppc-dev, linux-scsi, linux-arm-kernel, Andrew Donnellan
In-Reply-To: <cover.1561723979.git.mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
Convert docs to ReST and add them to the arch-specific
book.
The conversion here was trivial, as almost every file there
was already using an elegant format close to ReST standard.
The changes were mostly to mark literal blocks and add a few
missing section title identifiers.
One note with regards to "--": on Sphinx, this can't be used
to identify a list, as it will format it badly. This can be
used, however, to identify a long hyphen - and "---" is an
even longer one.
At its new index.rst, let's add a :orphan: while this is not linked to
the main index.rst file, in order to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
Acked-by: Andrew Donnellan <andrew.donnellan@au1.ibm.com> # cxl
---
Documentation/PCI/pci-error-recovery.rst | 23 ++-
.../{bootwrapper.txt => bootwrapper.rst} | 28 +++-
.../{cpu_families.txt => cpu_families.rst} | 23 +--
.../{cpu_features.txt => cpu_features.rst} | 6 +-
Documentation/powerpc/{cxl.txt => cxl.rst} | 46 ++++--
.../powerpc/{cxlflash.txt => cxlflash.rst} | 10 +-
.../{DAWR-POWER9.txt => dawr-power9.rst} | 15 +-
Documentation/powerpc/{dscr.txt => dscr.rst} | 18 +-
...ecovery.txt => eeh-pci-error-recovery.rst} | 108 ++++++------
...ed-dump.txt => firmware-assisted-dump.rst} | 117 +++++++------
Documentation/powerpc/{hvcs.txt => hvcs.rst} | 108 ++++++------
Documentation/powerpc/index.rst | 34 ++++
Documentation/powerpc/isa-versions.rst | 15 +-
.../powerpc/{mpc52xx.txt => mpc52xx.rst} | 12 +-
...nv.txt => pci_iov_resource_on_powernv.rst} | 15 +-
.../powerpc/{pmu-ebb.txt => pmu-ebb.rst} | 1 +
Documentation/powerpc/ptrace.rst | 156 ++++++++++++++++++
Documentation/powerpc/ptrace.txt | 151 -----------------
.../{qe_firmware.txt => qe_firmware.rst} | 37 +++--
.../{syscall64-abi.txt => syscall64-abi.rst} | 29 ++--
...al_memory.txt => transactional_memory.rst} | 45 ++---
MAINTAINERS | 6 +-
arch/powerpc/kernel/exceptions-64s.S | 2 +-
drivers/soc/fsl/qe/qe.c | 2 +-
drivers/tty/hvc/hvcs.c | 2 +-
include/soc/fsl/qe/qe.h | 2 +-
26 files changed, 584 insertions(+), 427 deletions(-)
rename Documentation/powerpc/{bootwrapper.txt => bootwrapper.rst} (93%)
rename Documentation/powerpc/{cpu_families.txt => cpu_families.rst} (95%)
rename Documentation/powerpc/{cpu_features.txt => cpu_features.rst} (97%)
rename Documentation/powerpc/{cxl.txt => cxl.rst} (95%)
rename Documentation/powerpc/{cxlflash.txt => cxlflash.rst} (98%)
rename Documentation/powerpc/{DAWR-POWER9.txt => dawr-power9.rst} (95%)
rename Documentation/powerpc/{dscr.txt => dscr.rst} (91%)
rename Documentation/powerpc/{eeh-pci-error-recovery.txt => eeh-pci-error-recovery.rst} (82%)
rename Documentation/powerpc/{firmware-assisted-dump.txt => firmware-assisted-dump.rst} (80%)
rename Documentation/powerpc/{hvcs.txt => hvcs.rst} (91%)
create mode 100644 Documentation/powerpc/index.rst
rename Documentation/powerpc/{mpc52xx.txt => mpc52xx.rst} (91%)
rename Documentation/powerpc/{pci_iov_resource_on_powernv.txt => pci_iov_resource_on_powernv.rst} (97%)
rename Documentation/powerpc/{pmu-ebb.txt => pmu-ebb.rst} (99%)
create mode 100644 Documentation/powerpc/ptrace.rst
delete mode 100644 Documentation/powerpc/ptrace.txt
rename Documentation/powerpc/{qe_firmware.txt => qe_firmware.rst} (95%)
rename Documentation/powerpc/{syscall64-abi.txt => syscall64-abi.rst} (82%)
rename Documentation/powerpc/{transactional_memory.txt => transactional_memory.rst} (93%)
diff --git a/Documentation/PCI/pci-error-recovery.rst b/Documentation/PCI/pci-error-recovery.rst
index 83db42092935..acc21ecca322 100644
--- a/Documentation/PCI/pci-error-recovery.rst
+++ b/Documentation/PCI/pci-error-recovery.rst
@@ -403,7 +403,7 @@ That is, the recovery API only requires that:
.. note::
Implementation details for the powerpc platform are discussed in
- the file Documentation/powerpc/eeh-pci-error-recovery.txt
+ the file Documentation/powerpc/eeh-pci-error-recovery.rst
As of this writing, there is a growing list of device drivers with
patches implementing error recovery. Not all of these patches are in
@@ -422,3 +422,24 @@ That is, the recovery API only requires that:
- drivers/net/cxgb3
- drivers/net/s2io.c
- drivers/net/qlge
+
+>>> As of this writing, there is a growing list of device drivers with
+>>> patches implementing error recovery. Not all of these patches are in
+>>> mainline yet. These may be used as "examples":
+>>>
+>>> drivers/scsi/ipr
+>>> drivers/scsi/sym53c8xx_2
+>>> drivers/scsi/qla2xxx
+>>> drivers/scsi/lpfc
+>>> drivers/next/bnx2.c
+>>> drivers/next/e100.c
+>>> drivers/net/e1000
+>>> drivers/net/e1000e
+>>> drivers/net/ixgb
+>>> drivers/net/ixgbe
+>>> drivers/net/cxgb3
+>>> drivers/net/s2io.c
+>>> drivers/net/qlge
+
+The End
+-------
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/bootwrapper.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/bootwrapper.rst
similarity index 93%
rename from Documentation/powerpc/bootwrapper.txt
rename to Documentation/powerpc/bootwrapper.rst
index d60fced5e1cc..a6292afba573 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/bootwrapper.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/bootwrapper.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
+========================
The PowerPC boot wrapper
-------------------------
+========================
+
Copyright (C) Secret Lab Technologies Ltd.
PowerPC image targets compresses and wraps the kernel image (vmlinux) with
@@ -21,6 +23,7 @@ it uses the wrapper script (arch/powerpc/boot/wrapper) to generate target
image. The details of the build system is discussed in the next section.
Currently, the following image format targets exist:
+ ==================== ========================================================
cuImage.%: Backwards compatible uImage for older version of
U-Boot (for versions that don't understand the device
tree). This image embeds a device tree blob inside
@@ -29,31 +32,36 @@ Currently, the following image format targets exist:
with boot wrapper code that extracts data from the old
bd_info structure and loads the data into the device
tree before jumping into the kernel.
- Because of the series of #ifdefs found in the
+
+ Because of the series of #ifdefs found in the
bd_info structure used in the old U-Boot interfaces,
cuImages are platform specific. Each specific
U-Boot platform has a different platform init file
which populates the embedded device tree with data
from the platform specific bd_info file. The platform
specific cuImage platform init code can be found in
- arch/powerpc/boot/cuboot.*.c. Selection of the correct
+ `arch/powerpc/boot/cuboot.*.c`. Selection of the correct
cuImage init code for a specific board can be found in
the wrapper structure.
+
dtbImage.%: Similar to zImage, except device tree blob is embedded
inside the image instead of provided by firmware. The
output image file can be either an elf file or a flat
binary depending on the platform.
- dtbImages are used on systems which do not have an
+
+ dtbImages are used on systems which do not have an
interface for passing a device tree directly.
dtbImages are similar to simpleImages except that
dtbImages have platform specific code for extracting
data from the board firmware, but simpleImages do not
talk to the firmware at all.
- PlayStation 3 support uses dtbImage. So do Embedded
+
+ PlayStation 3 support uses dtbImage. So do Embedded
Planet boards using the PlanetCore firmware. Board
specific initialization code is typically found in a
file named arch/powerpc/boot/<platform>.c; but this
can be overridden by the wrapper script.
+
simpleImage.%: Firmware independent compressed image that does not
depend on any particular firmware interface and embeds
a device tree blob. This image is a flat binary that
@@ -61,14 +69,16 @@ Currently, the following image format targets exist:
Firmware cannot pass any configuration data to the
kernel with this image type and it depends entirely on
the embedded device tree for all information.
- The simpleImage is useful for booting systems with
+
+ The simpleImage is useful for booting systems with
an unknown firmware interface or for booting from
a debugger when no firmware is present (such as on
the Xilinx Virtex platform). The only assumption that
simpleImage makes is that RAM is correctly initialized
and that the MMU is either off or has RAM mapped to
base address 0.
- simpleImage also supports inserting special platform
+
+ simpleImage also supports inserting special platform
specific initialization code to the start of the bootup
sequence. The virtex405 platform uses this feature to
ensure that the cache is invalidated before caching
@@ -81,9 +91,11 @@ Currently, the following image format targets exist:
named (virtex405-<board>.dts). Search the wrapper
script for 'virtex405' and see the file
arch/powerpc/boot/virtex405-head.S for details.
+
treeImage.%; Image format for used with OpenBIOS firmware found
on some ppc4xx hardware. This image embeds a device
tree blob inside the image.
+
uImage: Native image format used by U-Boot. The uImage target
does not add any boot code. It just wraps a compressed
vmlinux in the uImage data structure. This image
@@ -91,12 +103,14 @@ Currently, the following image format targets exist:
a device tree to the kernel at boot. If using an older
version of U-Boot, then you need to use a cuImage
instead.
+
zImage.%: Image format which does not embed a device tree.
Used by OpenFirmware and other firmware interfaces
which are able to supply a device tree. This image
expects firmware to provide the device tree at boot.
Typically, if you have general purpose PowerPC
hardware then you want this image format.
+ ==================== ========================================================
Image types which embed a device tree blob (simpleImage, dtbImage, treeImage,
and cuImage) all generate the device tree blob from a file in the
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/cpu_families.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/cpu_families.rst
similarity index 95%
rename from Documentation/powerpc/cpu_families.txt
rename to Documentation/powerpc/cpu_families.rst
index fc08e22feb1a..1e063c5440c3 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/cpu_families.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/cpu_families.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+============
CPU Families
============
@@ -8,8 +9,8 @@ and are supported by arch/powerpc.
Book3S (aka sPAPR)
------------------
- - Hash MMU
- - Mix of 32 & 64 bit
+- Hash MMU
+- Mix of 32 & 64 bit::
+--------------+ +----------------+
| Old POWER | --------------> | RS64 (threads) |
@@ -108,8 +109,8 @@ Book3S (aka sPAPR)
IBM BookE
---------
- - Software loaded TLB.
- - All 32 bit
+- Software loaded TLB.
+- All 32 bit::
+--------------+
| 401 |
@@ -155,8 +156,8 @@ IBM BookE
Motorola/Freescale 8xx
----------------------
- - Software loaded with hardware assist.
- - All 32 bit
+- Software loaded with hardware assist.
+- All 32 bit::
+-------------+
| MPC8xx Core |
@@ -166,9 +167,9 @@ Motorola/Freescale 8xx
Freescale BookE
---------------
- - Software loaded TLB.
- - e6500 adds HW loaded indirect TLB entries.
- - Mix of 32 & 64 bit
+- Software loaded TLB.
+- e6500 adds HW loaded indirect TLB entries.
+- Mix of 32 & 64 bit::
+--------------+
| e200 |
@@ -207,8 +208,8 @@ Freescale BookE
IBM A2 core
-----------
- - Book3E, software loaded TLB + HW loaded indirect TLB entries.
- - 64 bit
+- Book3E, software loaded TLB + HW loaded indirect TLB entries.
+- 64 bit::
+--------------+ +----------------+
| A2 core | --> | WSP |
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/cpu_features.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/cpu_features.rst
similarity index 97%
rename from Documentation/powerpc/cpu_features.txt
rename to Documentation/powerpc/cpu_features.rst
index ae09df8722c8..b7bcdd2f41bb 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/cpu_features.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/cpu_features.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+============
+CPU Features
+============
+
Hollis Blanchard <hollis@austin.ibm.com>
5 Jun 2002
@@ -32,7 +36,7 @@ anyways).
After detecting the processor type, the kernel patches out sections of code
that shouldn't be used by writing nop's over it. Using cpufeatures requires
just 2 macros (found in arch/powerpc/include/asm/cputable.h), as seen in head.S
-transfer_to_handler:
+transfer_to_handler::
#ifdef CONFIG_ALTIVEC
BEGIN_FTR_SECTION
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/cxl.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/cxl.rst
similarity index 95%
rename from Documentation/powerpc/cxl.txt
rename to Documentation/powerpc/cxl.rst
index c5e8d5098ed3..920546d81326 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/cxl.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/cxl.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+====================================
Coherent Accelerator Interface (CXL)
====================================
@@ -21,6 +22,8 @@ Introduction
Hardware overview
=================
+ ::
+
POWER8/9 FPGA
+----------+ +---------+
| | | |
@@ -59,14 +62,16 @@ Hardware overview
the fault. The context to which this fault is serviced is based on
who owns that acceleration function.
- POWER8 <-----> PSL Version 8 is compliant to the CAIA Version 1.0.
- POWER9 <-----> PSL Version 9 is compliant to the CAIA Version 2.0.
+ - POWER8 and PSL Version 8 are compliant to the CAIA Version 1.0.
+ - POWER9 and PSL Version 9 are compliant to the CAIA Version 2.0.
+
This PSL Version 9 provides new features such as:
+
* Interaction with the nest MMU on the P9 chip.
* Native DMA support.
* Supports sending ASB_Notify messages for host thread wakeup.
* Supports Atomic operations.
- * ....
+ * etc.
Cards with a PSL9 won't work on a POWER8 system and cards with a
PSL8 won't work on a POWER9 system.
@@ -147,7 +152,9 @@ User API
master devices.
A userspace library libcxl is available here:
+
https://github.com/ibm-capi/libcxl
+
This provides a C interface to this kernel API.
open
@@ -165,7 +172,8 @@ open
When all available contexts are allocated the open call will fail
and return -ENOSPC.
- Note: IRQs need to be allocated for each context, which may limit
+ Note:
+ IRQs need to be allocated for each context, which may limit
the number of contexts that can be created, and therefore
how many times the device can be opened. The POWER8 CAPP
supports 2040 IRQs and 3 are used by the kernel, so 2037 are
@@ -186,7 +194,9 @@ ioctl
updated as userspace allocates and frees memory. This ioctl
returns once the AFU context is started.
- Takes a pointer to a struct cxl_ioctl_start_work:
+ Takes a pointer to a struct cxl_ioctl_start_work
+
+ ::
struct cxl_ioctl_start_work {
__u64 flags;
@@ -269,7 +279,7 @@ read
The buffer passed to read() must be at least 4K bytes.
The result of the read will be a buffer of one or more events,
- each event is of type struct cxl_event, of varying size.
+ each event is of type struct cxl_event, of varying size::
struct cxl_event {
struct cxl_event_header header;
@@ -280,7 +290,9 @@ read
};
};
- The struct cxl_event_header is defined as:
+ The struct cxl_event_header is defined as
+
+ ::
struct cxl_event_header {
__u16 type;
@@ -307,7 +319,9 @@ read
For future extensions and padding.
If the event type is CXL_EVENT_AFU_INTERRUPT then the event
- structure is defined as:
+ structure is defined as
+
+ ::
struct cxl_event_afu_interrupt {
__u16 flags;
@@ -326,7 +340,9 @@ read
For future extensions and padding.
If the event type is CXL_EVENT_DATA_STORAGE then the event
- structure is defined as:
+ structure is defined as
+
+ ::
struct cxl_event_data_storage {
__u16 flags;
@@ -356,7 +372,9 @@ read
For future extensions
If the event type is CXL_EVENT_AFU_ERROR then the event structure
- is defined as:
+ is defined as
+
+ ::
struct cxl_event_afu_error {
__u16 flags;
@@ -393,15 +411,15 @@ open
ioctl
-----
-CXL_IOCTL_DOWNLOAD_IMAGE:
-CXL_IOCTL_VALIDATE_IMAGE:
+CXL_IOCTL_DOWNLOAD_IMAGE / CXL_IOCTL_VALIDATE_IMAGE:
Starts and controls flashing a new FPGA image. Partial
reconfiguration is not supported (yet), so the image must contain
a copy of the PSL and AFU(s). Since an image can be quite large,
the caller may have to iterate, splitting the image in smaller
chunks.
- Takes a pointer to a struct cxl_adapter_image:
+ Takes a pointer to a struct cxl_adapter_image::
+
struct cxl_adapter_image {
__u64 flags;
__u64 data;
@@ -442,7 +460,7 @@ Udev rules
The following udev rules could be used to create a symlink to the
most logical chardev to use in any programming mode (afuX.Yd for
dedicated, afuX.Ys for afu directed), since the API is virtually
- identical for each:
+ identical for each::
SUBSYSTEM=="cxl", ATTRS{mode}=="dedicated_process", SYMLINK="cxl/%b"
SUBSYSTEM=="cxl", ATTRS{mode}=="afu_directed", \
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/cxlflash.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/cxlflash.rst
similarity index 98%
rename from Documentation/powerpc/cxlflash.txt
rename to Documentation/powerpc/cxlflash.rst
index a64bdaa0a1cf..cea67931b3b9 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/cxlflash.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/cxlflash.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+================================
+Coherent Accelerator (CXL) Flash
+================================
+
Introduction
============
@@ -28,7 +32,7 @@ Introduction
responsible for the initialization of the adapter, setting up the
special path for user space access, and performing error recovery. It
communicates directly the Flash Accelerator Functional Unit (AFU)
- as described in Documentation/powerpc/cxl.txt.
+ as described in Documentation/powerpc/cxl.rst.
The cxlflash driver supports two, mutually exclusive, modes of
operation at the device (LUN) level:
@@ -58,7 +62,7 @@ Overview
The CXL Flash Adapter Driver establishes a master context with the
AFU. It uses memory mapped I/O (MMIO) for this control and setup. The
- Adapter Problem Space Memory Map looks like this:
+ Adapter Problem Space Memory Map looks like this::
+-------------------------------+
| 512 * 64 KB User MMIO |
@@ -375,7 +379,7 @@ CXL Flash Driver Host IOCTLs
Each host adapter instance that is supported by the cxlflash driver
has a special character device associated with it to enable a set of
host management function. These character devices are hosted in a
- class dedicated for cxlflash and can be accessed via /dev/cxlflash/*.
+ class dedicated for cxlflash and can be accessed via `/dev/cxlflash/*`.
Applications can be written to perform various functions using the
host ioctl APIs below.
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/DAWR-POWER9.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dawr-power9.rst
similarity index 95%
rename from Documentation/powerpc/DAWR-POWER9.txt
rename to Documentation/powerpc/dawr-power9.rst
index ecdbb076438c..c96ab6befd9c 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/DAWR-POWER9.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dawr-power9.rst
@@ -1,10 +1,11 @@
+=====================
DAWR issues on POWER9
-============================
+=====================
On POWER9 the Data Address Watchpoint Register (DAWR) can cause a checkstop
if it points to cache inhibited (CI) memory. Currently Linux has no way to
disinguish CI memory when configuring the DAWR, so (for now) the DAWR is
-disabled by this commit:
+disabled by this commit::
commit 9654153158d3e0684a1bdb76dbababdb7111d5a0
Author: Michael Neuling <mikey@neuling.org>
@@ -12,7 +13,7 @@ disabled by this commit:
powerpc: Disable DAWR in the base POWER9 CPU features
Technical Details:
-============================
+==================
DAWR has 6 different ways of being set.
1) ptrace
@@ -37,7 +38,7 @@ DAWR on the migration.
For xmon, the 'bd' command will return an error on P9.
Consequences for users
-============================
+======================
For GDB watchpoints (ie 'watch' command) on POWER9 bare metal , GDB
will accept the command. Unfortunately since there is no hardware
@@ -57,8 +58,8 @@ trapped in GDB. The watchpoint is remembered, so if the guest is
migrated back to the POWER8 host, it will start working again.
Force enabling the DAWR
-=============================
-Kernels (since ~v5.2) have an option to force enable the DAWR via:
+=======================
+Kernels (since ~v5.2) have an option to force enable the DAWR via::
echo Y > /sys/kernel/debug/powerpc/dawr_enable_dangerous
@@ -86,5 +87,7 @@ dawr_enable_dangerous file will fail if the hypervisor doesn't support
writing the DAWR.
To double check the DAWR is working, run this kernel selftest:
+
tools/testing/selftests/powerpc/ptrace/ptrace-hwbreak.c
+
Any errors/failures/skips mean something is wrong.
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dscr.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dscr.rst
similarity index 91%
rename from Documentation/powerpc/dscr.txt
rename to Documentation/powerpc/dscr.rst
index ece300c64f76..2ab99006014c 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/dscr.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dscr.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- DSCR (Data Stream Control Register)
- ================================================
+===================================
+DSCR (Data Stream Control Register)
+===================================
DSCR register in powerpc allows user to have some control of prefetch of data
stream in the processor. Please refer to the ISA documents or related manual
@@ -10,14 +11,17 @@ user interface.
(A) Data Structures:
- (1) thread_struct:
+ (1) thread_struct::
+
dscr /* Thread DSCR value */
dscr_inherit /* Thread has changed default DSCR */
- (2) PACA:
+ (2) PACA::
+
dscr_default /* per-CPU DSCR default value */
- (3) sysfs.c:
+ (3) sysfs.c::
+
dscr_default /* System DSCR default value */
(B) Scheduler Changes:
@@ -35,8 +39,8 @@ user interface.
(C) SYSFS Interface:
- Global DSCR default: /sys/devices/system/cpu/dscr_default
- CPU specific DSCR default: /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuN/dscr
+ - Global DSCR default: /sys/devices/system/cpu/dscr_default
+ - CPU specific DSCR default: /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuN/dscr
Changing the global DSCR default in the sysfs will change all the CPU
specific DSCR defaults immediately in their PACA structures. Again if
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/eeh-pci-error-recovery.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/eeh-pci-error-recovery.rst
similarity index 82%
rename from Documentation/powerpc/eeh-pci-error-recovery.txt
rename to Documentation/powerpc/eeh-pci-error-recovery.rst
index 678189280bb4..438a87ebc095 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/eeh-pci-error-recovery.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/eeh-pci-error-recovery.rst
@@ -1,10 +1,10 @@
+==========================
+PCI Bus EEH Error Recovery
+==========================
+Linas Vepstas <linas@austin.ibm.com>
- PCI Bus EEH Error Recovery
- --------------------------
- Linas Vepstas
- <linas@austin.ibm.com>
- 12 January 2005
+12 January 2005
Overview:
@@ -143,17 +143,17 @@ seen in /proc/ppc64/eeh (subject to change). Normally, almost
all of these occur during boot, when the PCI bus is scanned, where
a large number of 0xff reads are part of the bus scan procedure.
-If a frozen slot is detected, code in
-arch/powerpc/platforms/pseries/eeh.c will print a stack trace to
-syslog (/var/log/messages). This stack trace has proven to be very
-useful to device-driver authors for finding out at what point the EEH
-error was detected, as the error itself usually occurs slightly
+If a frozen slot is detected, code in
+arch/powerpc/platforms/pseries/eeh.c will print a stack trace to
+syslog (/var/log/messages). This stack trace has proven to be very
+useful to device-driver authors for finding out at what point the EEH
+error was detected, as the error itself usually occurs slightly
beforehand.
Next, it uses the Linux kernel notifier chain/work queue mechanism to
allow any interested parties to find out about the failure. Device
drivers, or other parts of the kernel, can use
-eeh_register_notifier(struct notifier_block *) to find out about EEH
+`eeh_register_notifier(struct notifier_block *)` to find out about EEH
events. The event will include a pointer to the pci device, the
device node and some state info. Receivers of the event can "do as
they wish"; the default handler will be described further in this
@@ -162,10 +162,13 @@ section.
To assist in the recovery of the device, eeh.c exports the
following functions:
-rtas_set_slot_reset() -- assert the PCI #RST line for 1/8th of a second
-rtas_configure_bridge() -- ask firmware to configure any PCI bridges
+rtas_set_slot_reset()
+ assert the PCI #RST line for 1/8th of a second
+rtas_configure_bridge()
+ ask firmware to configure any PCI bridges
located topologically under the pci slot.
-eeh_save_bars() and eeh_restore_bars(): save and restore the PCI
+eeh_save_bars() and eeh_restore_bars():
+ save and restore the PCI
config-space info for a device and any devices under it.
@@ -191,7 +194,7 @@ events get delivered to user-space scripts.
Following is an example sequence of events that cause a device driver
close function to be called during the first phase of an EEH reset.
-The following sequence is an example of the pcnet32 device driver.
+The following sequence is an example of the pcnet32 device driver::
rpa_php_unconfig_pci_adapter (struct slot *) // in rpaphp_pci.c
{
@@ -241,53 +244,54 @@ The following sequence is an example of the pcnet32 device driver.
}}}}}}
- in drivers/pci/pci_driver.c,
- struct device_driver->remove() is just pci_device_remove()
- which calls struct pci_driver->remove() which is pcnet32_remove_one()
- which calls unregister_netdev() (in net/core/dev.c)
- which calls dev_close() (in net/core/dev.c)
- which calls dev->stop() which is pcnet32_close()
- which then does the appropriate shutdown.
+in drivers/pci/pci_driver.c,
+struct device_driver->remove() is just pci_device_remove()
+which calls struct pci_driver->remove() which is pcnet32_remove_one()
+which calls unregister_netdev() (in net/core/dev.c)
+which calls dev_close() (in net/core/dev.c)
+which calls dev->stop() which is pcnet32_close()
+which then does the appropriate shutdown.
---
+
Following is the analogous stack trace for events sent to user-space
-when the pci device is unconfigured.
+when the pci device is unconfigured::
-rpa_php_unconfig_pci_adapter() { // in rpaphp_pci.c
- calls
- pci_remove_bus_device (struct pci_dev *) { // in /drivers/pci/remove.c
+ rpa_php_unconfig_pci_adapter() { // in rpaphp_pci.c
calls
- pci_destroy_dev (struct pci_dev *) {
+ pci_remove_bus_device (struct pci_dev *) { // in /drivers/pci/remove.c
calls
- device_unregister (&dev->dev) { // in /drivers/base/core.c
+ pci_destroy_dev (struct pci_dev *) {
calls
- device_del(struct device * dev) { // in /drivers/base/core.c
+ device_unregister (&dev->dev) { // in /drivers/base/core.c
calls
- kobject_del() { //in /libs/kobject.c
+ device_del(struct device * dev) { // in /drivers/base/core.c
calls
- kobject_uevent() { // in /libs/kobject.c
+ kobject_del() { //in /libs/kobject.c
calls
- kset_uevent() { // in /lib/kobject.c
+ kobject_uevent() { // in /libs/kobject.c
calls
- kset->uevent_ops->uevent() // which is really just
- a call to
- dev_uevent() { // in /drivers/base/core.c
+ kset_uevent() { // in /lib/kobject.c
calls
- dev->bus->uevent() which is really just a call to
- pci_uevent () { // in drivers/pci/hotplug.c
- which prints device name, etc....
+ kset->uevent_ops->uevent() // which is really just
+ a call to
+ dev_uevent() { // in /drivers/base/core.c
+ calls
+ dev->bus->uevent() which is really just a call to
+ pci_uevent () { // in drivers/pci/hotplug.c
+ which prints device name, etc....
+ }
}
- }
- then kobject_uevent() sends a netlink uevent to userspace
- --> userspace uevent
- (during early boot, nobody listens to netlink events and
- kobject_uevent() executes uevent_helper[], which runs the
- event process /sbin/hotplug)
+ then kobject_uevent() sends a netlink uevent to userspace
+ --> userspace uevent
+ (during early boot, nobody listens to netlink events and
+ kobject_uevent() executes uevent_helper[], which runs the
+ event process /sbin/hotplug)
+ }
}
- }
- kobject_del() then calls sysfs_remove_dir(), which would
- trigger any user-space daemon that was watching /sysfs,
- and notice the delete event.
+ kobject_del() then calls sysfs_remove_dir(), which would
+ trigger any user-space daemon that was watching /sysfs,
+ and notice the delete event.
Pro's and Con's of the Current Design
@@ -299,12 +303,12 @@ individual device drivers, so that the current design throws a wide net.
The biggest negative of the design is that it potentially disturbs
network daemons and file systems that didn't need to be disturbed.
--- A minor complaint is that resetting the network card causes
+- A minor complaint is that resetting the network card causes
user-space back-to-back ifdown/ifup burps that potentially disturb
network daemons, that didn't need to even know that the pci
card was being rebooted.
--- A more serious concern is that the same reset, for SCSI devices,
+- A more serious concern is that the same reset, for SCSI devices,
causes havoc to mounted file systems. Scripts cannot post-facto
unmount a file system without flushing pending buffers, but this
is impossible, because I/O has already been stopped. Thus,
@@ -322,7 +326,7 @@ network daemons and file systems that didn't need to be disturbed.
from the block layer. It would be very natural to add an EEH
reset into this chain of events.
--- If a SCSI error occurs for the root device, all is lost unless
+- If a SCSI error occurs for the root device, all is lost unless
the sysadmin had the foresight to run /bin, /sbin, /etc, /var
and so on, out of ramdisk/tmpfs.
@@ -330,5 +334,3 @@ network daemons and file systems that didn't need to be disturbed.
Conclusions
-----------
There's forward progress ...
-
-
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/firmware-assisted-dump.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/firmware-assisted-dump.rst
similarity index 80%
rename from Documentation/powerpc/firmware-assisted-dump.txt
rename to Documentation/powerpc/firmware-assisted-dump.rst
index 0c41d6d463f3..d7fa7c35dd12 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/firmware-assisted-dump.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/firmware-assisted-dump.rst
@@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
+======================
+Firmware-Assisted Dump
+======================
- Firmware-Assisted Dump
- ------------------------
- July 2011
+July 2011
The goal of firmware-assisted dump is to enable the dump of
a crashed system, and to do so from a fully-reset system, and
@@ -27,11 +28,11 @@ in production use.
Comparing with kdump or other strategies, firmware-assisted
dump offers several strong, practical advantages:
--- Unlike kdump, the system has been reset, and loaded
+- Unlike kdump, the system has been reset, and loaded
with a fresh copy of the kernel. In particular,
PCI and I/O devices have been reinitialized and are
in a clean, consistent state.
--- Once the dump is copied out, the memory that held the dump
+- Once the dump is copied out, the memory that held the dump
is immediately available to the running kernel. And therefore,
unlike kdump, fadump doesn't need a 2nd reboot to get back
the system to the production configuration.
@@ -40,17 +41,18 @@ The above can only be accomplished by coordination with,
and assistance from the Power firmware. The procedure is
as follows:
--- The first kernel registers the sections of memory with the
+- The first kernel registers the sections of memory with the
Power firmware for dump preservation during OS initialization.
These registered sections of memory are reserved by the first
kernel during early boot.
--- When a system crashes, the Power firmware will save
+- When a system crashes, the Power firmware will save
the low memory (boot memory of size larger of 5% of system RAM
or 256MB) of RAM to the previous registered region. It will
also save system registers, and hardware PTE's.
- NOTE: The term 'boot memory' means size of the low memory chunk
+ NOTE:
+ The term 'boot memory' means size of the low memory chunk
that is required for a kernel to boot successfully when
booted with restricted memory. By default, the boot memory
size will be the larger of 5% of system RAM or 256MB.
@@ -64,12 +66,12 @@ as follows:
as fadump uses a predefined offset to reserve memory
for boot memory dump preservation in case of a crash.
--- After the low memory (boot memory) area has been saved, the
+- After the low memory (boot memory) area has been saved, the
firmware will reset PCI and other hardware state. It will
*not* clear the RAM. It will then launch the bootloader, as
normal.
--- The freshly booted kernel will notice that there is a new
+- The freshly booted kernel will notice that there is a new
node (ibm,dump-kernel) in the device tree, indicating that
there is crash data available from a previous boot. During
the early boot OS will reserve rest of the memory above
@@ -77,17 +79,18 @@ as follows:
size. This will make sure that the second kernel will not
touch any of the dump memory area.
--- User-space tools will read /proc/vmcore to obtain the contents
+- User-space tools will read /proc/vmcore to obtain the contents
of memory, which holds the previous crashed kernel dump in ELF
format. The userspace tools may copy this info to disk, or
network, nas, san, iscsi, etc. as desired.
--- Once the userspace tool is done saving dump, it will echo
+- Once the userspace tool is done saving dump, it will echo
'1' to /sys/kernel/fadump_release_mem to release the reserved
memory back to general use, except the memory required for
next firmware-assisted dump registration.
- e.g.
+ e.g.::
+
# echo 1 > /sys/kernel/fadump_release_mem
Please note that the firmware-assisted dump feature
@@ -95,7 +98,7 @@ is only available on Power6 and above systems with recent
firmware versions.
Implementation details:
-----------------------
+-----------------------
During boot, a check is made to see if firmware supports
this feature on that particular machine. If it does, then
@@ -121,7 +124,7 @@ Allocator (CMA) for memory reservation if CMA is configured for kernel.
With CMA reservation this memory will be available for applications to
use it, while kernel is prevented from using it. With this fadump will
still be able to capture all of the kernel memory and most of the user
-space memory except the user pages that were present in CMA region.
+space memory except the user pages that were present in CMA region::
o Memory Reservation during first kernel
@@ -166,7 +169,7 @@ The tools to examine the dump will be same as the ones
used for kdump.
How to enable firmware-assisted dump (fadump):
--------------------------------------
+----------------------------------------------
1. Set config option CONFIG_FA_DUMP=y and build kernel.
2. Boot into linux kernel with 'fadump=on' kernel cmdline option.
@@ -177,19 +180,20 @@ How to enable firmware-assisted dump (fadump):
to specify size of the memory to reserve for boot memory dump
preservation.
-NOTE: 1. 'fadump_reserve_mem=' parameter has been deprecated. Instead
- use 'crashkernel=' to specify size of the memory to reserve
- for boot memory dump preservation.
- 2. If firmware-assisted dump fails to reserve memory then it
- will fallback to existing kdump mechanism if 'crashkernel='
- option is set at kernel cmdline.
- 3. if user wants to capture all of user space memory and ok with
- reserved memory not available to production system, then
- 'fadump=nocma' kernel parameter can be used to fallback to
- old behaviour.
+NOTE:
+ 1. 'fadump_reserve_mem=' parameter has been deprecated. Instead
+ use 'crashkernel=' to specify size of the memory to reserve
+ for boot memory dump preservation.
+ 2. If firmware-assisted dump fails to reserve memory then it
+ will fallback to existing kdump mechanism if 'crashkernel='
+ option is set at kernel cmdline.
+ 3. if user wants to capture all of user space memory and ok with
+ reserved memory not available to production system, then
+ 'fadump=nocma' kernel parameter can be used to fallback to
+ old behaviour.
Sysfs/debugfs files:
-------------
+--------------------
Firmware-assisted dump feature uses sysfs file system to hold
the control files and debugfs file to display memory reserved region.
@@ -197,20 +201,20 @@ the control files and debugfs file to display memory reserved region.
Here is the list of files under kernel sysfs:
/sys/kernel/fadump_enabled
-
This is used to display the fadump status.
- 0 = fadump is disabled
- 1 = fadump is enabled
+
+ - 0 = fadump is disabled
+ - 1 = fadump is enabled
This interface can be used by kdump init scripts to identify if
fadump is enabled in the kernel and act accordingly.
/sys/kernel/fadump_registered
-
This is used to display the fadump registration status as well
as to control (start/stop) the fadump registration.
- 0 = fadump is not registered.
- 1 = fadump is registered and ready to handle system crash.
+
+ - 0 = fadump is not registered.
+ - 1 = fadump is registered and ready to handle system crash.
To register fadump echo 1 > /sys/kernel/fadump_registered and
echo 0 > /sys/kernel/fadump_registered for un-register and stop the
@@ -219,13 +223,12 @@ Here is the list of files under kernel sysfs:
easily integrated with kdump service start/stop.
/sys/kernel/fadump_release_mem
-
This file is available only when fadump is active during
second kernel. This is used to release the reserved memory
region that are held for saving crash dump. To release the
- reserved memory echo 1 to it:
+ reserved memory echo 1 to it::
- echo 1 > /sys/kernel/fadump_release_mem
+ echo 1 > /sys/kernel/fadump_release_mem
After echo 1, the content of the /sys/kernel/debug/powerpc/fadump_region
file will change to reflect the new memory reservations.
@@ -238,38 +241,39 @@ Here is the list of files under powerpc debugfs:
(Assuming debugfs is mounted on /sys/kernel/debug directory.)
/sys/kernel/debug/powerpc/fadump_region
-
This file shows the reserved memory regions if fadump is
enabled otherwise this file is empty. The output format
- is:
- <region>: [<start>-<end>] <reserved-size> bytes, Dumped: <dump-size>
+ is::
+
+ <region>: [<start>-<end>] <reserved-size> bytes, Dumped: <dump-size>
e.g.
- Contents when fadump is registered during first kernel
+ Contents when fadump is registered during first kernel::
- # cat /sys/kernel/debug/powerpc/fadump_region
- CPU : [0x0000006ffb0000-0x0000006fff001f] 0x40020 bytes, Dumped: 0x0
- HPTE: [0x0000006fff0020-0x0000006fff101f] 0x1000 bytes, Dumped: 0x0
- DUMP: [0x0000006fff1020-0x0000007fff101f] 0x10000000 bytes, Dumped: 0x0
+ # cat /sys/kernel/debug/powerpc/fadump_region
+ CPU : [0x0000006ffb0000-0x0000006fff001f] 0x40020 bytes, Dumped: 0x0
+ HPTE: [0x0000006fff0020-0x0000006fff101f] 0x1000 bytes, Dumped: 0x0
+ DUMP: [0x0000006fff1020-0x0000007fff101f] 0x10000000 bytes, Dumped: 0x0
- Contents when fadump is active during second kernel
+ Contents when fadump is active during second kernel::
- # cat /sys/kernel/debug/powerpc/fadump_region
- CPU : [0x0000006ffb0000-0x0000006fff001f] 0x40020 bytes, Dumped: 0x40020
- HPTE: [0x0000006fff0020-0x0000006fff101f] 0x1000 bytes, Dumped: 0x1000
- DUMP: [0x0000006fff1020-0x0000007fff101f] 0x10000000 bytes, Dumped: 0x10000000
- : [0x00000010000000-0x0000006ffaffff] 0x5ffb0000 bytes, Dumped: 0x5ffb0000
+ # cat /sys/kernel/debug/powerpc/fadump_region
+ CPU : [0x0000006ffb0000-0x0000006fff001f] 0x40020 bytes, Dumped: 0x40020
+ HPTE: [0x0000006fff0020-0x0000006fff101f] 0x1000 bytes, Dumped: 0x1000
+ DUMP: [0x0000006fff1020-0x0000007fff101f] 0x10000000 bytes, Dumped: 0x10000000
+ : [0x00000010000000-0x0000006ffaffff] 0x5ffb0000 bytes, Dumped: 0x5ffb0000
-NOTE: Please refer to Documentation/filesystems/debugfs.txt on
+NOTE:
+ Please refer to Documentation/filesystems/debugfs.txt on
how to mount the debugfs filesystem.
TODO:
-----
- o Need to come up with the better approach to find out more
+ - Need to come up with the better approach to find out more
accurate boot memory size that is required for a kernel to
boot successfully when booted with restricted memory.
- o The fadump implementation introduces a fadump crash info structure
+ - The fadump implementation introduces a fadump crash info structure
in the scratch area before the ELF core header. The idea of introducing
this structure is to pass some important crash info data to the second
kernel which will help second kernel to populate ELF core header with
@@ -277,7 +281,9 @@ TODO:
design implementation does not address a possibility of introducing
additional fields (in future) to this structure without affecting
compatibility. Need to come up with the better approach to address this.
+
The possible approaches are:
+
1. Introduce version field for version tracking, bump up the version
whenever a new field is added to the structure in future. The version
field can be used to find out what fields are valid for the current
@@ -285,8 +291,11 @@ TODO:
2. Reserve the area of predefined size (say PAGE_SIZE) for this
structure and have unused area as reserved (initialized to zero)
for future field additions.
+
The advantage of approach 1 over 2 is we don't need to reserve extra space.
----
+
Author: Mahesh Salgaonkar <mahesh@linux.vnet.ibm.com>
+
This document is based on the original documentation written for phyp
+
assisted dump by Linas Vepstas and Manish Ahuja.
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/hvcs.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/hvcs.rst
similarity index 91%
rename from Documentation/powerpc/hvcs.txt
rename to Documentation/powerpc/hvcs.rst
index a730ca5a07f8..6808acde672f 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/hvcs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/hvcs.rst
@@ -1,19 +1,22 @@
-===========================================================================
- HVCS
- IBM "Hypervisor Virtual Console Server" Installation Guide
- for Linux Kernel 2.6.4+
- Copyright (C) 2004 IBM Corporation
+===============================================================
+HVCS IBM "Hypervisor Virtual Console Server" Installation Guide
+===============================================================
-===========================================================================
-NOTE:Eight space tabs are the optimum editor setting for reading this file.
-===========================================================================
+for Linux Kernel 2.6.4+
- Author(s) : Ryan S. Arnold <rsa@us.ibm.com>
- Date Created: March, 02, 2004
- Last Changed: August, 24, 2004
+Copyright (C) 2004 IBM Corporation
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Table of contents:
+.. ===========================================================================
+.. NOTE:Eight space tabs are the optimum editor setting for reading this file.
+.. ===========================================================================
+
+
+Author(s): Ryan S. Arnold <rsa@us.ibm.com>
+
+Date Created: March, 02, 2004
+Last Changed: August, 24, 2004
+
+.. Table of contents:
1. Driver Introduction:
2. System Requirements
@@ -27,8 +30,8 @@ Table of contents:
8. Questions & Answers:
9. Reporting Bugs:
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Driver Introduction:
+=======================
This is the device driver for the IBM Hypervisor Virtual Console Server,
"hvcs". The IBM hvcs provides a tty driver interface to allow Linux user
@@ -38,8 +41,8 @@ ppc64 system. Physical hardware consoles per partition are not practical
on this hardware so system consoles are accessed by this driver using
firmware interfaces to virtual terminal devices.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. System Requirements:
+=======================
This device driver was written using 2.6.4 Linux kernel APIs and will only
build and run on kernels of this version or later.
@@ -52,8 +55,8 @@ Sysfs must be mounted on the system so that the user can determine which
major and minor numbers are associated with each vty-server. Directions
for sysfs mounting are outside the scope of this document.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Build Options:
+=================
The hvcs driver registers itself as a tty driver. The tty layer
dynamically allocates a block of major and minor numbers in a quantity
@@ -65,11 +68,11 @@ If the default number of device entries is adequate then this driver can be
built into the kernel. If not, the default can be over-ridden by inserting
the driver as a module with insmod parameters.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1 Built-in:
+-------------
The following menuconfig example demonstrates selecting to build this
-driver into the kernel.
+driver into the kernel::
Device Drivers --->
Character devices --->
@@ -77,11 +80,11 @@ driver into the kernel.
Begin the kernel make process.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2 Module:
+-----------
The following menuconfig example demonstrates selecting to build this
-driver as a kernel module.
+driver as a kernel module::
Device Drivers --->
Character devices --->
@@ -89,11 +92,11 @@ driver as a kernel module.
The make process will build the following kernel modules:
- hvcs.ko
- hvcserver.ko
+ - hvcs.ko
+ - hvcserver.ko
To insert the module with the default allocation execute the following
-commands in the order they appear:
+commands in the order they appear::
insmod hvcserver.ko
insmod hvcs.ko
@@ -103,7 +106,7 @@ be inserted first, otherwise the hvcs module will not find some of the
symbols it expects.
To override the default use an insmod parameter as follows (requesting 4
-tty devices as an example):
+tty devices as an example)::
insmod hvcs.ko hvcs_parm_num_devs=4
@@ -115,31 +118,31 @@ source file before building.
NOTE: The length of time it takes to insmod the driver seems to be related
to the number of tty interfaces the registering driver requests.
-In order to remove the driver module execute the following command:
+In order to remove the driver module execute the following command::
rmmod hvcs.ko
The recommended method for installing hvcs as a module is to use depmod to
build a current modules.dep file in /lib/modules/`uname -r` and then
-execute:
+execute::
-modprobe hvcs hvcs_parm_num_devs=4
+ modprobe hvcs hvcs_parm_num_devs=4
The modules.dep file indicates that hvcserver.ko needs to be inserted
before hvcs.ko and modprobe uses this file to smartly insert the modules in
the proper order.
The following modprobe command is used to remove hvcs and hvcserver in the
-proper order:
+proper order::
-modprobe -r hvcs
+ modprobe -r hvcs
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Installation:
+================
The tty layer creates sysfs entries which contain the major and minor
numbers allocated for the hvcs driver. The following snippet of "tree"
-output of the sysfs directory shows where these numbers are presented:
+output of the sysfs directory shows where these numbers are presented::
sys/
|-- *other sysfs base dirs*
@@ -164,7 +167,7 @@ output of the sysfs directory shows where these numbers are presented:
|-- *other sysfs base dirs*
For the above examples the following output is a result of cat'ing the
-"dev" entry in the hvcs directory:
+"dev" entry in the hvcs directory::
Pow5:/sys/class/tty/hvcs0/ # cat dev
254:0
@@ -184,7 +187,7 @@ systems running hvcs will already have the device entries created or udev
will do it automatically.
Given the example output above, to manually create a /dev/hvcs* node entry
-mknod can be used as follows:
+mknod can be used as follows::
mknod /dev/hvcs0 c 254 0
mknod /dev/hvcs1 c 254 1
@@ -195,15 +198,15 @@ Using mknod to manually create the device entries makes these device nodes
persistent. Once created they will exist prior to the driver insmod.
Attempting to connect an application to /dev/hvcs* prior to insertion of
-the hvcs module will result in an error message similar to the following:
+the hvcs module will result in an error message similar to the following::
"/dev/hvcs*: No such device".
NOTE: Just because there is a device node present doesn't mean that there
is a vty-server device configured for that node.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Connection
+=============
Since this driver controls devices that provide a tty interface a user can
interact with the device node entries using any standard tty-interactive
@@ -249,7 +252,7 @@ vty-server adapter is associated with which /dev/hvcs* node a special sysfs
attribute has been added to each vty-server sysfs entry. This entry is
called "index" and showing it reveals an integer that refers to the
/dev/hvcs* entry to use to connect to that device. For instance cating the
-index attribute of vty-server adapter 30000004 shows the following.
+index attribute of vty-server adapter 30000004 shows the following::
Pow5:/sys/bus/vio/drivers/hvcs/30000004 # cat index
2
@@ -262,8 +265,8 @@ system the /dev/hvcs* entry that interacts with a particular vty-server
adapter is not guaranteed to remain the same across system reboots. Look
in the Q & A section for more on this issue.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. Disconnection
+================
As a security feature to prevent the delivery of stale data to an
unintended target the Power5 system firmware disables the fetching of data
@@ -305,7 +308,7 @@ connection between the vty-server and target vty ONLY if the vterm_state
previously read '1'. The write directive is ignored if the vterm_state
read '0' or if any value other than '0' was written to the vterm_state
attribute. The following example will show the method used for verifying
-the vty-server connection status and disconnecting a vty-server connection.
+the vty-server connection status and disconnecting a vty-server connection::
Pow5:/sys/bus/vio/drivers/hvcs/30000004 # cat vterm_state
1
@@ -318,12 +321,12 @@ the vty-server connection status and disconnecting a vty-server connection.
All vty-server connections are automatically terminated when the device is
hotplug removed and when the module is removed.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. Configuration
+================
Each vty-server has a sysfs entry in the /sys/devices/vio directory, which
is symlinked in several other sysfs tree directories, notably under the
-hvcs driver entry, which looks like the following example:
+hvcs driver entry, which looks like the following example::
Pow5:/sys/bus/vio/drivers/hvcs # ls
. .. 30000003 30000004 rescan
@@ -344,7 +347,7 @@ completed or was never executed.
Vty-server entries in this directory are a 32 bit partition unique unit
address that is created by firmware. An example vty-server sysfs entry
-looks like the following:
+looks like the following::
Pow5:/sys/bus/vio/drivers/hvcs/30000004 # ls
. current_vty devspec name partner_vtys
@@ -352,21 +355,21 @@ looks like the following:
Each entry is provided, by default with a "name" attribute. Reading the
"name" attribute will reveal the device type as shown in the following
-example:
+example::
Pow5:/sys/bus/vio/drivers/hvcs/30000003 # cat name
vty-server
Each entry is also provided, by default, with a "devspec" attribute which
reveals the full device specification when read, as shown in the following
-example:
+example::
Pow5:/sys/bus/vio/drivers/hvcs/30000004 # cat devspec
/vdevice/vty-server@30000004
Each vty-server sysfs dir is provided with two read-only attributes that
provide lists of easily parsed partner vty data: "partner_vtys" and
-"partner_clcs".
+"partner_clcs"::
Pow5:/sys/bus/vio/drivers/hvcs/30000004 # cat partner_vtys
30000000
@@ -396,7 +399,7 @@ A vty-server can only be connected to a single vty at a time. The entry,
read.
The current_vty can be changed by writing a valid partner clc to the entry
-as in the following example:
+as in the following example::
Pow5:/sys/bus/vio/drivers/hvcs/30000004 # echo U5112.428.10304
8A-V4-C0 > current_vty
@@ -408,9 +411,9 @@ currently open connection is freed.
Information on the "vterm_state" attribute was covered earlier on the
chapter entitled "disconnection".
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
8. Questions & Answers:
-===========================================================================
+=======================
+
Q: What are the security concerns involving hvcs?
A: There are three main security concerns:
@@ -429,6 +432,7 @@ A: There are three main security concerns:
partition) will experience the previously logged in session.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
Q: How do I multiplex a console that I grab through hvcs so that other
people can see it:
@@ -440,6 +444,7 @@ term type "screen" to others. This means that curses based programs may
not display properly in screen sessions.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
Q: Why are the colors all messed up?
Q: Why are the control characters acting strange or not working?
Q: Why is the console output all strange and unintelligible?
@@ -455,6 +460,7 @@ disconnect from the console. This will ensure that the next user gets
their own TERM type set when they login.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
Q: When I try to CONNECT kermit to an hvcs device I get:
"Sorry, can't open connection: /dev/hvcs*"What is happening?
@@ -490,6 +496,7 @@ A: There is not a corresponding vty-server device that maps to an existing
/dev/hvcs* entry.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
Q: When I try to CONNECT kermit to an hvcs device I get:
"Sorry, write access to UUCP lockfile directory denied."
@@ -497,6 +504,7 @@ A: The /dev/hvcs* entry you have specified doesn't exist where you said it
does? Maybe you haven't inserted the module (on systems with udev).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
Q: If I already have one Linux partition installed can I use hvcs on said
partition to provide the console for the install of a second Linux
partition?
@@ -505,6 +513,7 @@ A: Yes granted that your are connected to the /dev/hvcs* device using
kermit or cu or some other program that doesn't provide terminal emulation.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
Q: Can I connect to more than one partition's console at a time using this
driver?
@@ -512,6 +521,7 @@ A: Yes. Of course this means that there must be more than one vty-server
configured for this partition and each must point to a disconnected vty.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
Q: Does the hvcs driver support dynamic (hotplug) addition of devices?
A: Yes, if you have dlpar and hotplug enabled for your system and it has
@@ -519,6 +529,7 @@ been built into the kernel the hvcs drivers is configured to dynamically
handle additions of new devices and removals of unused devices.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
Q: For some reason /dev/hvcs* doesn't map to the same vty-server adapter
after a reboot. What happened?
@@ -533,6 +544,7 @@ on how to determine which vty-server goes with which /dev/hvcs* node.
Hint; look at the sysfs "index" attribute for the vty-server.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
Q: Can I use /dev/hvcs* as a conduit to another partition and use a tty
device on that partition as the other end of the pipe?
@@ -554,7 +566,9 @@ read or write to /dev/hvcs*. Now you have a tty conduit between two
partitions.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
9. Reporting Bugs:
+==================
The proper channel for reporting bugs is either through the Linux OS
distribution company that provided your OS or by posting issues to the
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/index.rst b/Documentation/powerpc/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1ff17268db46
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+:orphan:
+
+=======
+powerpc
+=======
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 1
+
+ bootwrapper
+ cpu_families
+ cpu_features
+ cxl
+ cxlflash
+ dawr-power9
+ dscr
+ eeh-pci-error-recovery
+ firmware-assisted-dump
+ hvcs
+ isa-versions
+ mpc52xx
+ pci_iov_resource_on_powernv
+ pmu-ebb
+ ptrace
+ qe_firmware
+ syscall64-abi
+ transactional_memory
+
+.. only:: subproject and html
+
+ Indices
+ =======
+
+ * :ref:`genindex`
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/isa-versions.rst b/Documentation/powerpc/isa-versions.rst
index 66c24140ebf1..a363d8c1603c 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/isa-versions.rst
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/isa-versions.rst
@@ -1,13 +1,12 @@
-:orphan:
-
+==========================
CPU to ISA Version Mapping
==========================
Mapping of some CPU versions to relevant ISA versions.
-========= ====================
+========= ====================================================================
CPU Architecture version
-========= ====================
+========= ====================================================================
Power9 Power ISA v3.0B
Power8 Power ISA v2.07
Power7 Power ISA v2.06
@@ -24,7 +23,7 @@ PPC970 - PowerPC User Instruction Set Architecture Book I v2.01
- PowerPC Virtual Environment Architecture Book II v2.01
- PowerPC Operating Environment Architecture Book III v2.01
- Plus Altivec/VMX ~= 2.03
-========= ====================
+========= ====================================================================
Key Features
@@ -60,9 +59,9 @@ Power5 No
PPC970 No
========== ====
-========== ====================
+========== ====================================
CPU Transactional Memory
-========== ====================
+========== ====================================
Power9 Yes (* see transactional_memory.txt)
Power8 Yes
Power7 No
@@ -73,4 +72,4 @@ Power5++ No
Power5+ No
Power5 No
PPC970 No
-========== ====================
+========== ====================================
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/mpc52xx.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/mpc52xx.rst
similarity index 91%
rename from Documentation/powerpc/mpc52xx.txt
rename to Documentation/powerpc/mpc52xx.rst
index 0d540a31ea1a..8676ac63e077 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/mpc52xx.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/mpc52xx.rst
@@ -1,11 +1,13 @@
+=============================
Linux 2.6.x on MPC52xx family
------------------------------
+=============================
For the latest info, go to http://www.246tNt.com/mpc52xx/
To compile/use :
- - U-Boot:
+ - U-Boot::
+
# <edit Makefile to set ARCH=ppc & CROSS_COMPILE=... ( also EXTRAVERSION
if you wish to ).
# make lite5200_defconfig
@@ -16,7 +18,8 @@ To compile/use :
=> tftpboot 400000 pRamdisk
=> bootm 200000 400000
- - DBug:
+ - DBug::
+
# <edit Makefile to set ARCH=ppc & CROSS_COMPILE=... ( also EXTRAVERSION
if you wish to ).
# make lite5200_defconfig
@@ -28,7 +31,8 @@ To compile/use :
DBug> dn -i zImage.initrd.lite5200
-Some remarks :
+Some remarks:
+
- The port is named mpc52xxx, and config options are PPC_MPC52xx. The MGT5100
is not supported, and I'm not sure anyone is interesting in working on it
so. I didn't took 5xxx because there's apparently a lot of 5xxx that have
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/pci_iov_resource_on_powernv.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/pci_iov_resource_on_powernv.rst
similarity index 97%
rename from Documentation/powerpc/pci_iov_resource_on_powernv.txt
rename to Documentation/powerpc/pci_iov_resource_on_powernv.rst
index b55c5cd83f8d..f5a5793e1613 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/pci_iov_resource_on_powernv.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/pci_iov_resource_on_powernv.rst
@@ -1,6 +1,13 @@
+===================================================
+PCI Express I/O Virtualization Resource on Powerenv
+===================================================
+
Wei Yang <weiyang@linux.vnet.ibm.com>
+
Benjamin Herrenschmidt <benh@au1.ibm.com>
+
Bjorn Helgaas <bhelgaas@google.com>
+
26 Aug 2014
This document describes the requirement from hardware for PCI MMIO resource
@@ -10,6 +17,7 @@ Endpoints and the implementation on P8 (IODA2). The next two sections talks
about considerations on enabling SRIOV on IODA2.
1. Introduction to Partitionable Endpoints
+==========================================
A Partitionable Endpoint (PE) is a way to group the various resources
associated with a device or a set of devices to provide isolation between
@@ -35,6 +43,7 @@ is a completely separate HW entity that replicates the entire logic, so has
its own set of PEs, etc.
2. Implementation of Partitionable Endpoints on P8 (IODA2)
+==========================================================
P8 supports up to 256 Partitionable Endpoints per PHB.
@@ -149,6 +158,7 @@ P8 supports up to 256 Partitionable Endpoints per PHB.
sense, but we haven't done it yet.
3. Considerations for SR-IOV on PowerKVM
+========================================
* SR-IOV Background
@@ -224,7 +234,7 @@ P8 supports up to 256 Partitionable Endpoints per PHB.
IODA supports 256 PEs, so segmented windows contain 256 segments, so if
total_VFs is less than 256, we have the situation in Figure 1.0, where
segments [total_VFs, 255] of the M64 window may map to some MMIO range on
- other devices:
+ other devices::
0 1 total_VFs - 1
+------+------+- -+------+------+
@@ -243,7 +253,7 @@ P8 supports up to 256 Partitionable Endpoints per PHB.
Figure 1.0 Direct map VF(n) BAR space
Our current solution is to allocate 256 segments even if the VF(n) BAR
- space doesn't need that much, as shown in Figure 1.1:
+ space doesn't need that much, as shown in Figure 1.1::
0 1 total_VFs - 1 255
+------+------+- -+------+------+- -+------+------+
@@ -269,6 +279,7 @@ P8 supports up to 256 Partitionable Endpoints per PHB.
responds to segments [total_VFs, 255].
4. Implications for the Generic PCI Code
+========================================
The PCIe SR-IOV spec requires that the base of the VF(n) BAR space be
aligned to the size of an individual VF BAR.
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/pmu-ebb.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/pmu-ebb.rst
similarity index 99%
rename from Documentation/powerpc/pmu-ebb.txt
rename to Documentation/powerpc/pmu-ebb.rst
index 73cd163dbfb8..4f474758eb55 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/pmu-ebb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/pmu-ebb.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+========================
PMU Event Based Branches
========================
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/ptrace.rst b/Documentation/powerpc/ptrace.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..864d4b6dddd1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/ptrace.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,156 @@
+======
+Ptrace
+======
+
+GDB intends to support the following hardware debug features of BookE
+processors:
+
+4 hardware breakpoints (IAC)
+2 hardware watchpoints (read, write and read-write) (DAC)
+2 value conditions for the hardware watchpoints (DVC)
+
+For that, we need to extend ptrace so that GDB can query and set these
+resources. Since we're extending, we're trying to create an interface
+that's extendable and that covers both BookE and server processors, so
+that GDB doesn't need to special-case each of them. We added the
+following 3 new ptrace requests.
+
+1. PTRACE_PPC_GETHWDEBUGINFO
+============================
+
+Query for GDB to discover the hardware debug features. The main info to
+be returned here is the minimum alignment for the hardware watchpoints.
+BookE processors don't have restrictions here, but server processors have
+an 8-byte alignment restriction for hardware watchpoints. We'd like to avoid
+adding special cases to GDB based on what it sees in AUXV.
+
+Since we're at it, we added other useful info that the kernel can return to
+GDB: this query will return the number of hardware breakpoints, hardware
+watchpoints and whether it supports a range of addresses and a condition.
+The query will fill the following structure provided by the requesting process::
+
+ struct ppc_debug_info {
+ unit32_t version;
+ unit32_t num_instruction_bps;
+ unit32_t num_data_bps;
+ unit32_t num_condition_regs;
+ unit32_t data_bp_alignment;
+ unit32_t sizeof_condition; /* size of the DVC register */
+ uint64_t features; /* bitmask of the individual flags */
+ };
+
+features will have bits indicating whether there is support for::
+
+ #define PPC_DEBUG_FEATURE_INSN_BP_RANGE 0x1
+ #define PPC_DEBUG_FEATURE_INSN_BP_MASK 0x2
+ #define PPC_DEBUG_FEATURE_DATA_BP_RANGE 0x4
+ #define PPC_DEBUG_FEATURE_DATA_BP_MASK 0x8
+ #define PPC_DEBUG_FEATURE_DATA_BP_DAWR 0x10
+
+2. PTRACE_SETHWDEBUG
+
+Sets a hardware breakpoint or watchpoint, according to the provided structure::
+
+ struct ppc_hw_breakpoint {
+ uint32_t version;
+ #define PPC_BREAKPOINT_TRIGGER_EXECUTE 0x1
+ #define PPC_BREAKPOINT_TRIGGER_READ 0x2
+ #define PPC_BREAKPOINT_TRIGGER_WRITE 0x4
+ uint32_t trigger_type; /* only some combinations allowed */
+ #define PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_EXACT 0x0
+ #define PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_RANGE_INCLUSIVE 0x1
+ #define PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_RANGE_EXCLUSIVE 0x2
+ #define PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_MASK 0x3
+ uint32_t addr_mode; /* address match mode */
+
+ #define PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_MODE 0x3
+ #define PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_NONE 0x0
+ #define PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_AND 0x1
+ #define PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_EXACT 0x1 /* different name for the same thing as above */
+ #define PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_OR 0x2
+ #define PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_AND_OR 0x3
+ #define PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_BE_ALL 0x00ff0000 /* byte enable bits */
+ #define PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_BE(n) (1<<((n)+16))
+ uint32_t condition_mode; /* break/watchpoint condition flags */
+
+ uint64_t addr;
+ uint64_t addr2;
+ uint64_t condition_value;
+ };
+
+A request specifies one event, not necessarily just one register to be set.
+For instance, if the request is for a watchpoint with a condition, both the
+DAC and DVC registers will be set in the same request.
+
+With this GDB can ask for all kinds of hardware breakpoints and watchpoints
+that the BookE supports. COMEFROM breakpoints available in server processors
+are not contemplated, but that is out of the scope of this work.
+
+ptrace will return an integer (handle) uniquely identifying the breakpoint or
+watchpoint just created. This integer will be used in the PTRACE_DELHWDEBUG
+request to ask for its removal. Return -ENOSPC if the requested breakpoint
+can't be allocated on the registers.
+
+Some examples of using the structure to:
+
+- set a breakpoint in the first breakpoint register::
+
+ p.version = PPC_DEBUG_CURRENT_VERSION;
+ p.trigger_type = PPC_BREAKPOINT_TRIGGER_EXECUTE;
+ p.addr_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_EXACT;
+ p.condition_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_NONE;
+ p.addr = (uint64_t) address;
+ p.addr2 = 0;
+ p.condition_value = 0;
+
+- set a watchpoint which triggers on reads in the second watchpoint register::
+
+ p.version = PPC_DEBUG_CURRENT_VERSION;
+ p.trigger_type = PPC_BREAKPOINT_TRIGGER_READ;
+ p.addr_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_EXACT;
+ p.condition_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_NONE;
+ p.addr = (uint64_t) address;
+ p.addr2 = 0;
+ p.condition_value = 0;
+
+- set a watchpoint which triggers only with a specific value::
+
+ p.version = PPC_DEBUG_CURRENT_VERSION;
+ p.trigger_type = PPC_BREAKPOINT_TRIGGER_READ;
+ p.addr_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_EXACT;
+ p.condition_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_AND | PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_BE_ALL;
+ p.addr = (uint64_t) address;
+ p.addr2 = 0;
+ p.condition_value = (uint64_t) condition;
+
+- set a ranged hardware breakpoint::
+
+ p.version = PPC_DEBUG_CURRENT_VERSION;
+ p.trigger_type = PPC_BREAKPOINT_TRIGGER_EXECUTE;
+ p.addr_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_RANGE_INCLUSIVE;
+ p.condition_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_NONE;
+ p.addr = (uint64_t) begin_range;
+ p.addr2 = (uint64_t) end_range;
+ p.condition_value = 0;
+
+- set a watchpoint in server processors (BookS)::
+
+ p.version = 1;
+ p.trigger_type = PPC_BREAKPOINT_TRIGGER_RW;
+ p.addr_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_RANGE_INCLUSIVE;
+ or
+ p.addr_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_EXACT;
+
+ p.condition_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_NONE;
+ p.addr = (uint64_t) begin_range;
+ /* For PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_RANGE_INCLUSIVE addr2 needs to be specified, where
+ * addr2 - addr <= 8 Bytes.
+ */
+ p.addr2 = (uint64_t) end_range;
+ p.condition_value = 0;
+
+3. PTRACE_DELHWDEBUG
+
+Takes an integer which identifies an existing breakpoint or watchpoint
+(i.e., the value returned from PTRACE_SETHWDEBUG), and deletes the
+corresponding breakpoint or watchpoint..
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/ptrace.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/ptrace.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 99c5ce88d0fe..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/ptrace.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,151 +0,0 @@
-GDB intends to support the following hardware debug features of BookE
-processors:
-
-4 hardware breakpoints (IAC)
-2 hardware watchpoints (read, write and read-write) (DAC)
-2 value conditions for the hardware watchpoints (DVC)
-
-For that, we need to extend ptrace so that GDB can query and set these
-resources. Since we're extending, we're trying to create an interface
-that's extendable and that covers both BookE and server processors, so
-that GDB doesn't need to special-case each of them. We added the
-following 3 new ptrace requests.
-
-1. PTRACE_PPC_GETHWDEBUGINFO
-
-Query for GDB to discover the hardware debug features. The main info to
-be returned here is the minimum alignment for the hardware watchpoints.
-BookE processors don't have restrictions here, but server processors have
-an 8-byte alignment restriction for hardware watchpoints. We'd like to avoid
-adding special cases to GDB based on what it sees in AUXV.
-
-Since we're at it, we added other useful info that the kernel can return to
-GDB: this query will return the number of hardware breakpoints, hardware
-watchpoints and whether it supports a range of addresses and a condition.
-The query will fill the following structure provided by the requesting process:
-
-struct ppc_debug_info {
- unit32_t version;
- unit32_t num_instruction_bps;
- unit32_t num_data_bps;
- unit32_t num_condition_regs;
- unit32_t data_bp_alignment;
- unit32_t sizeof_condition; /* size of the DVC register */
- uint64_t features; /* bitmask of the individual flags */
-};
-
-features will have bits indicating whether there is support for:
-
-#define PPC_DEBUG_FEATURE_INSN_BP_RANGE 0x1
-#define PPC_DEBUG_FEATURE_INSN_BP_MASK 0x2
-#define PPC_DEBUG_FEATURE_DATA_BP_RANGE 0x4
-#define PPC_DEBUG_FEATURE_DATA_BP_MASK 0x8
-#define PPC_DEBUG_FEATURE_DATA_BP_DAWR 0x10
-
-2. PTRACE_SETHWDEBUG
-
-Sets a hardware breakpoint or watchpoint, according to the provided structure:
-
-struct ppc_hw_breakpoint {
- uint32_t version;
-#define PPC_BREAKPOINT_TRIGGER_EXECUTE 0x1
-#define PPC_BREAKPOINT_TRIGGER_READ 0x2
-#define PPC_BREAKPOINT_TRIGGER_WRITE 0x4
- uint32_t trigger_type; /* only some combinations allowed */
-#define PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_EXACT 0x0
-#define PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_RANGE_INCLUSIVE 0x1
-#define PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_RANGE_EXCLUSIVE 0x2
-#define PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_MASK 0x3
- uint32_t addr_mode; /* address match mode */
-
-#define PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_MODE 0x3
-#define PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_NONE 0x0
-#define PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_AND 0x1
-#define PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_EXACT 0x1 /* different name for the same thing as above */
-#define PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_OR 0x2
-#define PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_AND_OR 0x3
-#define PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_BE_ALL 0x00ff0000 /* byte enable bits */
-#define PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_BE(n) (1<<((n)+16))
- uint32_t condition_mode; /* break/watchpoint condition flags */
-
- uint64_t addr;
- uint64_t addr2;
- uint64_t condition_value;
-};
-
-A request specifies one event, not necessarily just one register to be set.
-For instance, if the request is for a watchpoint with a condition, both the
-DAC and DVC registers will be set in the same request.
-
-With this GDB can ask for all kinds of hardware breakpoints and watchpoints
-that the BookE supports. COMEFROM breakpoints available in server processors
-are not contemplated, but that is out of the scope of this work.
-
-ptrace will return an integer (handle) uniquely identifying the breakpoint or
-watchpoint just created. This integer will be used in the PTRACE_DELHWDEBUG
-request to ask for its removal. Return -ENOSPC if the requested breakpoint
-can't be allocated on the registers.
-
-Some examples of using the structure to:
-
-- set a breakpoint in the first breakpoint register
-
- p.version = PPC_DEBUG_CURRENT_VERSION;
- p.trigger_type = PPC_BREAKPOINT_TRIGGER_EXECUTE;
- p.addr_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_EXACT;
- p.condition_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_NONE;
- p.addr = (uint64_t) address;
- p.addr2 = 0;
- p.condition_value = 0;
-
-- set a watchpoint which triggers on reads in the second watchpoint register
-
- p.version = PPC_DEBUG_CURRENT_VERSION;
- p.trigger_type = PPC_BREAKPOINT_TRIGGER_READ;
- p.addr_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_EXACT;
- p.condition_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_NONE;
- p.addr = (uint64_t) address;
- p.addr2 = 0;
- p.condition_value = 0;
-
-- set a watchpoint which triggers only with a specific value
-
- p.version = PPC_DEBUG_CURRENT_VERSION;
- p.trigger_type = PPC_BREAKPOINT_TRIGGER_READ;
- p.addr_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_EXACT;
- p.condition_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_AND | PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_BE_ALL;
- p.addr = (uint64_t) address;
- p.addr2 = 0;
- p.condition_value = (uint64_t) condition;
-
-- set a ranged hardware breakpoint
-
- p.version = PPC_DEBUG_CURRENT_VERSION;
- p.trigger_type = PPC_BREAKPOINT_TRIGGER_EXECUTE;
- p.addr_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_RANGE_INCLUSIVE;
- p.condition_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_NONE;
- p.addr = (uint64_t) begin_range;
- p.addr2 = (uint64_t) end_range;
- p.condition_value = 0;
-
-- set a watchpoint in server processors (BookS)
-
- p.version = 1;
- p.trigger_type = PPC_BREAKPOINT_TRIGGER_RW;
- p.addr_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_RANGE_INCLUSIVE;
- or
- p.addr_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_EXACT;
-
- p.condition_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_NONE;
- p.addr = (uint64_t) begin_range;
- /* For PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_RANGE_INCLUSIVE addr2 needs to be specified, where
- * addr2 - addr <= 8 Bytes.
- */
- p.addr2 = (uint64_t) end_range;
- p.condition_value = 0;
-
-3. PTRACE_DELHWDEBUG
-
-Takes an integer which identifies an existing breakpoint or watchpoint
-(i.e., the value returned from PTRACE_SETHWDEBUG), and deletes the
-corresponding breakpoint or watchpoint..
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/qe_firmware.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/qe_firmware.rst
similarity index 95%
rename from Documentation/powerpc/qe_firmware.txt
rename to Documentation/powerpc/qe_firmware.rst
index e7ac24aec4ff..42f5103140c9 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/qe_firmware.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/qe_firmware.rst
@@ -1,23 +1,23 @@
- Freescale QUICC Engine Firmware Uploading
- -----------------------------------------
+=========================================
+Freescale QUICC Engine Firmware Uploading
+=========================================
(c) 2007 Timur Tabi <timur at freescale.com>,
Freescale Semiconductor
-Table of Contents
-=================
+.. Table of Contents
- I - Software License for Firmware
+ I - Software License for Firmware
- II - Microcode Availability
+ II - Microcode Availability
- III - Description and Terminology
+ III - Description and Terminology
- IV - Microcode Programming Details
+ IV - Microcode Programming Details
- V - Firmware Structure Layout
+ V - Firmware Structure Layout
- VI - Sample Code for Creating Firmware Files
+ VI - Sample Code for Creating Firmware Files
Revision Information
====================
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ http://opensource.freescale.com. For other firmware files, please contact
your Freescale representative or your operating system vendor.
III - Description and Terminology
-================================
+=================================
In this document, the term 'microcode' refers to the sequence of 32-bit
integers that compose the actual QE microcode.
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ being fixed in the RAM package utilizing they should be activated. This data
structure signals the microcode which of these virtual traps is active.
This structure contains 6 words that the application should copy to some
-specific been defined. This table describes the structure.
+specific been defined. This table describes the structure::
---------------------------------------------------------------
| Offset in | | Destination Offset | Size of |
@@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ Extended Modes
This is a double word bit array (64 bits) that defines special functionality
which has an impact on the software drivers. Each bit has its own impact
and has special instructions for the s/w associated with it. This structure is
-described in this table:
+described in this table::
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
| Bit # | Name | Description |
@@ -220,7 +220,8 @@ The 'model' field is a 16-bit number that matches the actual SOC. The
'major' and 'minor' fields are the major and minor revision numbers,
respectively, of the SOC.
-For example, to match the 8323, revision 1.0:
+For example, to match the 8323, revision 1.0::
+
soc.model = 8323
soc.major = 1
soc.minor = 0
@@ -273,10 +274,10 @@ library and available to any driver that calles qe_get_firmware_info().
'reserved'.
After the last microcode is a 32-bit CRC. It can be calculated using
-this algorithm:
+this algorithm::
-u32 crc32(const u8 *p, unsigned int len)
-{
+ u32 crc32(const u8 *p, unsigned int len)
+ {
unsigned int i;
u32 crc = 0;
@@ -286,7 +287,7 @@ u32 crc32(const u8 *p, unsigned int len)
crc = (crc >> 1) ^ ((crc & 1) ? 0xedb88320 : 0);
}
return crc;
-}
+ }
VI - Sample Code for Creating Firmware Files
============================================
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/syscall64-abi.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/syscall64-abi.rst
similarity index 82%
rename from Documentation/powerpc/syscall64-abi.txt
rename to Documentation/powerpc/syscall64-abi.rst
index fa716a0d88bd..e49f69f941b9 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/syscall64-abi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/syscall64-abi.rst
@@ -5,12 +5,12 @@ Power Architecture 64-bit Linux system call ABI
syscall
=======
-syscall calling sequence[*] matches the Power Architecture 64-bit ELF ABI
+syscall calling sequence\ [1]_ matches the Power Architecture 64-bit ELF ABI
specification C function calling sequence, including register preservation
rules, with the following differences.
-[*] Some syscalls (typically low-level management functions) may have
- different calling sequences (e.g., rt_sigreturn).
+.. [1] Some syscalls (typically low-level management functions) may have
+ different calling sequences (e.g., rt_sigreturn).
Parameters and return value
---------------------------
@@ -33,12 +33,14 @@ Register preservation rules
Register preservation rules match the ELF ABI calling sequence with the
following differences:
-r0: Volatile. (System call number.)
-r3: Volatile. (Parameter 1, and return value.)
-r4-r8: Volatile. (Parameters 2-6.)
-cr0: Volatile (cr0.SO is the return error condition)
-cr1, cr5-7: Nonvolatile.
-lr: Nonvolatile.
+=========== ============= ========================================
+r0 Volatile (System call number.)
+r3 Volatile (Parameter 1, and return value.)
+r4-r8 Volatile (Parameters 2-6.)
+cr0 Volatile (cr0.SO is the return error condition)
+cr1, cr5-7 Nonvolatile
+lr Nonvolatile
+=========== ============= ========================================
All floating point and vector data registers as well as control and status
registers are nonvolatile.
@@ -90,9 +92,12 @@ The vsyscall may or may not use the caller's stack frame save areas.
Register preservation rules
---------------------------
-r0: Volatile.
-cr1, cr5-7: Volatile.
-lr: Volatile.
+
+=========== ========
+r0 Volatile
+cr1, cr5-7 Volatile
+lr Volatile
+=========== ========
Invocation
----------
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/transactional_memory.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/transactional_memory.rst
similarity index 93%
rename from Documentation/powerpc/transactional_memory.txt
rename to Documentation/powerpc/transactional_memory.rst
index 52c023e14f26..09955103acb4 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/transactional_memory.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/transactional_memory.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+============================
Transactional Memory support
============================
@@ -17,29 +18,29 @@ instructions are presented to delimit transactions; transactions are
guaranteed to either complete atomically or roll back and undo any partial
changes.
-A simple transaction looks like this:
+A simple transaction looks like this::
-begin_move_money:
- tbegin
- beq abort_handler
+ begin_move_money:
+ tbegin
+ beq abort_handler
- ld r4, SAVINGS_ACCT(r3)
- ld r5, CURRENT_ACCT(r3)
- subi r5, r5, 1
- addi r4, r4, 1
- std r4, SAVINGS_ACCT(r3)
- std r5, CURRENT_ACCT(r3)
+ ld r4, SAVINGS_ACCT(r3)
+ ld r5, CURRENT_ACCT(r3)
+ subi r5, r5, 1
+ addi r4, r4, 1
+ std r4, SAVINGS_ACCT(r3)
+ std r5, CURRENT_ACCT(r3)
- tend
+ tend
- b continue
+ b continue
-abort_handler:
- ... test for odd failures ...
+ abort_handler:
+ ... test for odd failures ...
- /* Retry the transaction if it failed because it conflicted with
- * someone else: */
- b begin_move_money
+ /* Retry the transaction if it failed because it conflicted with
+ * someone else: */
+ b begin_move_money
The 'tbegin' instruction denotes the start point, and 'tend' the end point.
@@ -123,7 +124,7 @@ Transaction-aware signal handlers can read the transactional register state
from the second ucontext. This will be necessary for crash handlers to
determine, for example, the address of the instruction causing the SIGSEGV.
-Example signal handler:
+Example signal handler::
void crash_handler(int sig, siginfo_t *si, void *uc)
{
@@ -133,9 +134,9 @@ Example signal handler:
if (ucp_link) {
u64 msr = ucp->uc_mcontext.regs->msr;
/* May have transactional ucontext! */
-#ifndef __powerpc64__
+ #ifndef __powerpc64__
msr |= ((u64)transactional_ucp->uc_mcontext.regs->msr) << 32;
-#endif
+ #endif
if (MSR_TM_ACTIVE(msr)) {
/* Yes, we crashed during a transaction. Oops. */
fprintf(stderr, "Transaction to be restarted at 0x%llx, but "
@@ -176,6 +177,7 @@ Failure cause codes used by kernel
These are defined in <asm/reg.h>, and distinguish different reasons why the
kernel aborted a transaction:
+ ====================== ================================
TM_CAUSE_RESCHED Thread was rescheduled.
TM_CAUSE_TLBI Software TLB invalid.
TM_CAUSE_FAC_UNAV FP/VEC/VSX unavailable trap.
@@ -184,6 +186,7 @@ kernel aborted a transaction:
TM_CAUSE_MISC Currently unused.
TM_CAUSE_ALIGNMENT Alignment fault.
TM_CAUSE_EMULATE Emulation that touched memory.
+ ====================== ================================
These can be checked by the user program's abort handler as TEXASR[0:7]. If
bit 7 is set, it indicates that the error is consider persistent. For example
@@ -203,7 +206,7 @@ POWER9
======
TM on POWER9 has issues with storing the complete register state. This
-is described in this commit:
+is described in this commit::
commit 4bb3c7a0208fc13ca70598efd109901a7cd45ae7
Author: Paul Mackerras <paulus@ozlabs.org>
diff --git a/MAINTAINERS b/MAINTAINERS
index 9458cdaa5b4b..bad1bbb668bc 100644
--- a/MAINTAINERS
+++ b/MAINTAINERS
@@ -4416,7 +4416,7 @@ F: arch/powerpc/platforms/powernv/pci-cxl.c
F: drivers/misc/cxl/
F: include/misc/cxl*
F: include/uapi/misc/cxl.h
-F: Documentation/powerpc/cxl.txt
+F: Documentation/powerpc/cxl.rst
F: Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-cxl
CXLFLASH (IBM Coherent Accelerator Processor Interface CAPI Flash) SCSI DRIVER
@@ -4427,7 +4427,7 @@ L: linux-scsi@vger.kernel.org
S: Supported
F: drivers/scsi/cxlflash/
F: include/uapi/scsi/cxlflash_ioctl.h
-F: Documentation/powerpc/cxlflash.txt
+F: Documentation/powerpc/cxlflash.rst
CYBERPRO FB DRIVER
M: Russell King <linux@armlinux.org.uk>
@@ -12276,7 +12276,7 @@ F: Documentation/PCI/pci-error-recovery.rst
F: drivers/pci/pcie/aer.c
F: drivers/pci/pcie/dpc.c
F: drivers/pci/pcie/err.c
-F: Documentation/powerpc/eeh-pci-error-recovery.txt
+F: Documentation/powerpc/eeh-pci-error-recovery.rst
F: arch/powerpc/kernel/eeh*.c
F: arch/powerpc/platforms/*/eeh*.c
F: arch/powerpc/include/*/eeh*.h
diff --git a/arch/powerpc/kernel/exceptions-64s.S b/arch/powerpc/kernel/exceptions-64s.S
index 4d4fd2ad5b7d..d6f48fc845ca 100644
--- a/arch/powerpc/kernel/exceptions-64s.S
+++ b/arch/powerpc/kernel/exceptions-64s.S
@@ -910,7 +910,7 @@ EXC_COMMON(trap_0b_common, 0xb00, unknown_exception)
*
* Call convention:
*
- * syscall register convention is in Documentation/powerpc/syscall64-abi.txt
+ * syscall register convention is in Documentation/powerpc/syscall64-abi.rst
*
* For hypercalls, the register convention is as follows:
* r0 volatile
diff --git a/drivers/soc/fsl/qe/qe.c b/drivers/soc/fsl/qe/qe.c
index ba38c4bb2a88..417df7e19281 100644
--- a/drivers/soc/fsl/qe/qe.c
+++ b/drivers/soc/fsl/qe/qe.c
@@ -430,7 +430,7 @@ static void qe_upload_microcode(const void *base,
/*
* Upload a microcode to the I-RAM at a specific address.
*
- * See Documentation/powerpc/qe_firmware.txt for information on QE microcode
+ * See Documentation/powerpc/qe_firmware.rst for information on QE microcode
* uploading.
*
* Currently, only version 1 is supported, so the 'version' field must be
diff --git a/drivers/tty/hvc/hvcs.c b/drivers/tty/hvc/hvcs.c
index cb4db1b3ca3c..5fb214e67d73 100644
--- a/drivers/tty/hvc/hvcs.c
+++ b/drivers/tty/hvc/hvcs.c
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@
* using the 2.6 Linux kernel kref construct.
*
* For direction on installation and usage of this driver please reference
- * Documentation/powerpc/hvcs.txt.
+ * Documentation/powerpc/hvcs.rst.
*/
#include <linux/device.h>
diff --git a/include/soc/fsl/qe/qe.h b/include/soc/fsl/qe/qe.h
index 3f9d6b6a5691..c1036d16ed03 100644
--- a/include/soc/fsl/qe/qe.h
+++ b/include/soc/fsl/qe/qe.h
@@ -259,7 +259,7 @@ static inline int qe_alive_during_sleep(void)
/* Structure that defines QE firmware binary files.
*
- * See Documentation/powerpc/qe_firmware.txt for a description of these
+ * See Documentation/powerpc/qe_firmware.rst for a description of these
* fields.
*/
struct qe_firmware {
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related
* [PATCH 04/43] docs: locking: convert docs to ReST and rename to *.rst
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-28 12:20 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet, Peter Zijlstra, Ingo Molnar, Will Deacon,
Thomas Gleixner, Darren Hart, Federico Vaga, Maarten Lankhorst,
Maxime Ripard, Sean Paul, David Airlie, Daniel Vetter, dri-devel
In-Reply-To: <cover.1561723979.git.mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
Convert the locking documents to ReST and add them to the
kernel development book where it belongs.
Most of the stuff here is just to make Sphinx to properly
parse the text file, as they're already in good shape,
not requiring massive changes in order to be parsed.
The conversion is actually:
- add blank lines and identation in order to identify paragraphs;
- fix tables markups;
- add some lists markups;
- mark literal blocks;
- adjust title markups.
At its new index.rst, let's add a :orphan: while this is not linked to
the main index.rst file, in order to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
Acked-by: Federico Vaga <federico.vaga@vaga.pv.it>
---
Documentation/kernel-hacking/locking.rst | 2 +-
Documentation/locking/index.rst | 24 +++
...{lockdep-design.txt => lockdep-design.rst} | 51 +++--
Documentation/locking/lockstat.rst | 204 ++++++++++++++++++
Documentation/locking/lockstat.txt | 183 ----------------
.../{locktorture.txt => locktorture.rst} | 105 +++++----
.../{mutex-design.txt => mutex-design.rst} | 26 ++-
...t-mutex-design.txt => rt-mutex-design.rst} | 139 ++++++------
.../locking/{rt-mutex.txt => rt-mutex.rst} | 30 +--
.../locking/{spinlocks.txt => spinlocks.rst} | 32 ++-
...w-mutex-design.txt => ww-mutex-design.rst} | 82 +++----
Documentation/pi-futex.txt | 2 +-
.../it_IT/kernel-hacking/locking.rst | 2 +-
drivers/gpu/drm/drm_modeset_lock.c | 2 +-
include/linux/lockdep.h | 2 +-
include/linux/mutex.h | 2 +-
include/linux/rwsem.h | 2 +-
kernel/locking/mutex.c | 2 +-
kernel/locking/rtmutex.c | 2 +-
lib/Kconfig.debug | 4 +-
20 files changed, 511 insertions(+), 387 deletions(-)
create mode 100644 Documentation/locking/index.rst
rename Documentation/locking/{lockdep-design.txt => lockdep-design.rst} (93%)
create mode 100644 Documentation/locking/lockstat.rst
delete mode 100644 Documentation/locking/lockstat.txt
rename Documentation/locking/{locktorture.txt => locktorture.rst} (57%)
rename Documentation/locking/{mutex-design.txt => mutex-design.rst} (94%)
rename Documentation/locking/{rt-mutex-design.txt => rt-mutex-design.rst} (91%)
rename Documentation/locking/{rt-mutex.txt => rt-mutex.rst} (71%)
rename Documentation/locking/{spinlocks.txt => spinlocks.rst} (89%)
rename Documentation/locking/{ww-mutex-design.txt => ww-mutex-design.rst} (93%)
diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-hacking/locking.rst b/Documentation/kernel-hacking/locking.rst
index dc698ea456e0..a8518ac0d31d 100644
--- a/Documentation/kernel-hacking/locking.rst
+++ b/Documentation/kernel-hacking/locking.rst
@@ -1364,7 +1364,7 @@ Futex API reference
Further reading
===============
-- ``Documentation/locking/spinlocks.txt``: Linus Torvalds' spinlocking
+- ``Documentation/locking/spinlocks.rst``: Linus Torvalds' spinlocking
tutorial in the kernel sources.
- Unix Systems for Modern Architectures: Symmetric Multiprocessing and
diff --git a/Documentation/locking/index.rst b/Documentation/locking/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ef5da7fe9aac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/locking/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+:orphan:
+
+=======
+locking
+=======
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 1
+
+ lockdep-design
+ lockstat
+ locktorture
+ mutex-design
+ rt-mutex-design
+ rt-mutex
+ spinlocks
+ ww-mutex-design
+
+.. only:: subproject and html
+
+ Indices
+ =======
+
+ * :ref:`genindex`
diff --git a/Documentation/locking/lockdep-design.txt b/Documentation/locking/lockdep-design.rst
similarity index 93%
rename from Documentation/locking/lockdep-design.txt
rename to Documentation/locking/lockdep-design.rst
index f189d130e543..23fcbc4d3fc0 100644
--- a/Documentation/locking/lockdep-design.txt
+++ b/Documentation/locking/lockdep-design.rst
@@ -2,6 +2,7 @@ Runtime locking correctness validator
=====================================
started by Ingo Molnar <mingo@redhat.com>
+
additions by Arjan van de Ven <arjan@linux.intel.com>
Lock-class
@@ -56,7 +57,7 @@ where the last 1 category is:
When locking rules are violated, these usage bits are presented in the
locking error messages, inside curlies, with a total of 2 * n STATEs bits.
-A contrived example:
+A contrived example::
modprobe/2287 is trying to acquire lock:
(&sio_locks[i].lock){-.-.}, at: [<c02867fd>] mutex_lock+0x21/0x24
@@ -70,12 +71,14 @@ of the lock and readlock (if exists), for each of the n STATEs listed
above respectively, and the character displayed at each bit position
indicates:
+ === ===================================================
'.' acquired while irqs disabled and not in irq context
'-' acquired in irq context
'+' acquired with irqs enabled
'?' acquired in irq context with irqs enabled.
+ === ===================================================
-The bits are illustrated with an example:
+The bits are illustrated with an example::
(&sio_locks[i].lock){-.-.}, at: [<c02867fd>] mutex_lock+0x21/0x24
||||
@@ -90,13 +93,13 @@ context and whether that STATE is enabled yields four possible cases as
shown in the table below. The bit character is able to indicate which
exact case is for the lock as of the reporting time.
- -------------------------------------------
+ +--------------+-------------+--------------+
| | irq enabled | irq disabled |
- |-------------------------------------------|
+ +--------------+-------------+--------------+
| ever in irq | ? | - |
- |-------------------------------------------|
+ +--------------+-------------+--------------+
| never in irq | + | . |
- -------------------------------------------
+ +--------------+-------------+--------------+
The character '-' suggests irq is disabled because if otherwise the
charactor '?' would have been shown instead. Similar deduction can be
@@ -113,7 +116,7 @@ is irq-unsafe means it was ever acquired with irq enabled.
A softirq-unsafe lock-class is automatically hardirq-unsafe as well. The
following states must be exclusive: only one of them is allowed to be set
-for any lock-class based on its usage:
+for any lock-class based on its usage::
<hardirq-safe> or <hardirq-unsafe>
<softirq-safe> or <softirq-unsafe>
@@ -134,7 +137,7 @@ Multi-lock dependency rules:
The same lock-class must not be acquired twice, because this could lead
to lock recursion deadlocks.
-Furthermore, two locks can not be taken in inverse order:
+Furthermore, two locks can not be taken in inverse order::
<L1> -> <L2>
<L2> -> <L1>
@@ -148,7 +151,7 @@ operations; the validator will still find whether these locks can be
acquired in a circular fashion.
Furthermore, the following usage based lock dependencies are not allowed
-between any two lock-classes:
+between any two lock-classes::
<hardirq-safe> -> <hardirq-unsafe>
<softirq-safe> -> <softirq-unsafe>
@@ -204,16 +207,16 @@ the ordering is not static.
In order to teach the validator about this correct usage model, new
versions of the various locking primitives were added that allow you to
specify a "nesting level". An example call, for the block device mutex,
-looks like this:
+looks like this::
-enum bdev_bd_mutex_lock_class
-{
+ enum bdev_bd_mutex_lock_class
+ {
BD_MUTEX_NORMAL,
BD_MUTEX_WHOLE,
BD_MUTEX_PARTITION
-};
+ };
- mutex_lock_nested(&bdev->bd_contains->bd_mutex, BD_MUTEX_PARTITION);
+mutex_lock_nested(&bdev->bd_contains->bd_mutex, BD_MUTEX_PARTITION);
In this case the locking is done on a bdev object that is known to be a
partition.
@@ -234,7 +237,7 @@ must be held: lockdep_assert_held*(&lock) and lockdep_*pin_lock(&lock).
As the name suggests, lockdep_assert_held* family of macros assert that a
particular lock is held at a certain time (and generate a WARN() otherwise).
This annotation is largely used all over the kernel, e.g. kernel/sched/
-core.c
+core.c::
void update_rq_clock(struct rq *rq)
{
@@ -253,7 +256,7 @@ out to be especially helpful to debug code with callbacks, where an upper
layer assumes a lock remains taken, but a lower layer thinks it can maybe drop
and reacquire the lock ("unwittingly" introducing races). lockdep_pin_lock()
returns a 'struct pin_cookie' that is then used by lockdep_unpin_lock() to check
-that nobody tampered with the lock, e.g. kernel/sched/sched.h
+that nobody tampered with the lock, e.g. kernel/sched/sched.h::
static inline void rq_pin_lock(struct rq *rq, struct rq_flags *rf)
{
@@ -280,7 +283,7 @@ correctness) in the sense that for every simple, standalone single-task
locking sequence that occurred at least once during the lifetime of the
kernel, the validator proves it with a 100% certainty that no
combination and timing of these locking sequences can cause any class of
-lock related deadlock. [*]
+lock related deadlock. [1]_
I.e. complex multi-CPU and multi-task locking scenarios do not have to
occur in practice to prove a deadlock: only the simple 'component'
@@ -299,7 +302,9 @@ possible combination of locking interaction between CPUs, combined with
every possible hardirq and softirq nesting scenario (which is impossible
to do in practice).
-[*] assuming that the validator itself is 100% correct, and no other
+.. [1]
+
+ assuming that the validator itself is 100% correct, and no other
part of the system corrupts the state of the validator in any way.
We also assume that all NMI/SMM paths [which could interrupt
even hardirq-disabled codepaths] are correct and do not interfere
@@ -310,7 +315,7 @@ to do in practice).
Performance:
------------
-The above rules require _massive_ amounts of runtime checking. If we did
+The above rules require **massive** amounts of runtime checking. If we did
that for every lock taken and for every irqs-enable event, it would
render the system practically unusably slow. The complexity of checking
is O(N^2), so even with just a few hundred lock-classes we'd have to do
@@ -369,17 +374,17 @@ be harder to do than to say.
Of course, if you do run out of lock classes, the next thing to do is
to find the offending lock classes. First, the following command gives
-you the number of lock classes currently in use along with the maximum:
+you the number of lock classes currently in use along with the maximum::
grep "lock-classes" /proc/lockdep_stats
-This command produces the following output on a modest system:
+This command produces the following output on a modest system::
- lock-classes: 748 [max: 8191]
+ lock-classes: 748 [max: 8191]
If the number allocated (748 above) increases continually over time,
then there is likely a leak. The following command can be used to
-identify the leaking lock classes:
+identify the leaking lock classes::
grep "BD" /proc/lockdep
diff --git a/Documentation/locking/lockstat.rst b/Documentation/locking/lockstat.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..536eab8dbd99
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/locking/lockstat.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,204 @@
+===============
+Lock Statistics
+===============
+
+What
+====
+
+As the name suggests, it provides statistics on locks.
+
+
+Why
+===
+
+Because things like lock contention can severely impact performance.
+
+How
+===
+
+Lockdep already has hooks in the lock functions and maps lock instances to
+lock classes. We build on that (see Documentation/locking/lockdep-design.rst).
+The graph below shows the relation between the lock functions and the various
+hooks therein::
+
+ __acquire
+ |
+ lock _____
+ | \
+ | __contended
+ | |
+ | <wait>
+ | _______/
+ |/
+ |
+ __acquired
+ |
+ .
+ <hold>
+ .
+ |
+ __release
+ |
+ unlock
+
+ lock, unlock - the regular lock functions
+ __* - the hooks
+ <> - states
+
+With these hooks we provide the following statistics:
+
+ con-bounces
+ - number of lock contention that involved x-cpu data
+ contentions
+ - number of lock acquisitions that had to wait
+ wait time
+ min
+ - shortest (non-0) time we ever had to wait for a lock
+ max
+ - longest time we ever had to wait for a lock
+ total
+ - total time we spend waiting on this lock
+ avg
+ - average time spent waiting on this lock
+ acq-bounces
+ - number of lock acquisitions that involved x-cpu data
+ acquisitions
+ - number of times we took the lock
+ hold time
+ min
+ - shortest (non-0) time we ever held the lock
+ max
+ - longest time we ever held the lock
+ total
+ - total time this lock was held
+ avg
+ - average time this lock was held
+
+These numbers are gathered per lock class, per read/write state (when
+applicable).
+
+It also tracks 4 contention points per class. A contention point is a call site
+that had to wait on lock acquisition.
+
+Configuration
+-------------
+
+Lock statistics are enabled via CONFIG_LOCK_STAT.
+
+Usage
+-----
+
+Enable collection of statistics::
+
+ # echo 1 >/proc/sys/kernel/lock_stat
+
+Disable collection of statistics::
+
+ # echo 0 >/proc/sys/kernel/lock_stat
+
+Look at the current lock statistics::
+
+ ( line numbers not part of actual output, done for clarity in the explanation
+ below )
+
+ # less /proc/lock_stat
+
+ 01 lock_stat version 0.4
+ 02-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ 03 class name con-bounces contentions waittime-min waittime-max waittime-total waittime-avg acq-bounces acquisitions holdtime-min holdtime-max holdtime-total holdtime-avg
+ 04-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ 05
+ 06 &mm->mmap_sem-W: 46 84 0.26 939.10 16371.53 194.90 47291 2922365 0.16 2220301.69 17464026916.32 5975.99
+ 07 &mm->mmap_sem-R: 37 100 1.31 299502.61 325629.52 3256.30 212344 34316685 0.10 7744.91 95016910.20 2.77
+ 08 ---------------
+ 09 &mm->mmap_sem 1 [<ffffffff811502a7>] khugepaged_scan_mm_slot+0x57/0x280
+ 10 &mm->mmap_sem 96 [<ffffffff815351c4>] __do_page_fault+0x1d4/0x510
+ 11 &mm->mmap_sem 34 [<ffffffff81113d77>] vm_mmap_pgoff+0x87/0xd0
+ 12 &mm->mmap_sem 17 [<ffffffff81127e71>] vm_munmap+0x41/0x80
+ 13 ---------------
+ 14 &mm->mmap_sem 1 [<ffffffff81046fda>] dup_mmap+0x2a/0x3f0
+ 15 &mm->mmap_sem 60 [<ffffffff81129e29>] SyS_mprotect+0xe9/0x250
+ 16 &mm->mmap_sem 41 [<ffffffff815351c4>] __do_page_fault+0x1d4/0x510
+ 17 &mm->mmap_sem 68 [<ffffffff81113d77>] vm_mmap_pgoff+0x87/0xd0
+ 18
+ 19.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................
+ 20
+ 21 unix_table_lock: 110 112 0.21 49.24 163.91 1.46 21094 66312 0.12 624.42 31589.81 0.48
+ 22 ---------------
+ 23 unix_table_lock 45 [<ffffffff8150ad8e>] unix_create1+0x16e/0x1b0
+ 24 unix_table_lock 47 [<ffffffff8150b111>] unix_release_sock+0x31/0x250
+ 25 unix_table_lock 15 [<ffffffff8150ca37>] unix_find_other+0x117/0x230
+ 26 unix_table_lock 5 [<ffffffff8150a09f>] unix_autobind+0x11f/0x1b0
+ 27 ---------------
+ 28 unix_table_lock 39 [<ffffffff8150b111>] unix_release_sock+0x31/0x250
+ 29 unix_table_lock 49 [<ffffffff8150ad8e>] unix_create1+0x16e/0x1b0
+ 30 unix_table_lock 20 [<ffffffff8150ca37>] unix_find_other+0x117/0x230
+ 31 unix_table_lock 4 [<ffffffff8150a09f>] unix_autobind+0x11f/0x1b0
+
+
+This excerpt shows the first two lock class statistics. Line 01 shows the
+output version - each time the format changes this will be updated. Line 02-04
+show the header with column descriptions. Lines 05-18 and 20-31 show the actual
+statistics. These statistics come in two parts; the actual stats separated by a
+short separator (line 08, 13) from the contention points.
+
+Lines 09-12 show the first 4 recorded contention points (the code
+which tries to get the lock) and lines 14-17 show the first 4 recorded
+contended points (the lock holder). It is possible that the max
+con-bounces point is missing in the statistics.
+
+The first lock (05-18) is a read/write lock, and shows two lines above the
+short separator. The contention points don't match the column descriptors,
+they have two: contentions and [<IP>] symbol. The second set of contention
+points are the points we're contending with.
+
+The integer part of the time values is in us.
+
+Dealing with nested locks, subclasses may appear::
+
+ 32...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
+ 33
+ 34 &rq->lock: 13128 13128 0.43 190.53 103881.26 7.91 97454 3453404 0.00 401.11 13224683.11 3.82
+ 35 ---------
+ 36 &rq->lock 645 [<ffffffff8103bfc4>] task_rq_lock+0x43/0x75
+ 37 &rq->lock 297 [<ffffffff8104ba65>] try_to_wake_up+0x127/0x25a
+ 38 &rq->lock 360 [<ffffffff8103c4c5>] select_task_rq_fair+0x1f0/0x74a
+ 39 &rq->lock 428 [<ffffffff81045f98>] scheduler_tick+0x46/0x1fb
+ 40 ---------
+ 41 &rq->lock 77 [<ffffffff8103bfc4>] task_rq_lock+0x43/0x75
+ 42 &rq->lock 174 [<ffffffff8104ba65>] try_to_wake_up+0x127/0x25a
+ 43 &rq->lock 4715 [<ffffffff8103ed4b>] double_rq_lock+0x42/0x54
+ 44 &rq->lock 893 [<ffffffff81340524>] schedule+0x157/0x7b8
+ 45
+ 46...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
+ 47
+ 48 &rq->lock/1: 1526 11488 0.33 388.73 136294.31 11.86 21461 38404 0.00 37.93 109388.53 2.84
+ 49 -----------
+ 50 &rq->lock/1 11526 [<ffffffff8103ed58>] double_rq_lock+0x4f/0x54
+ 51 -----------
+ 52 &rq->lock/1 5645 [<ffffffff8103ed4b>] double_rq_lock+0x42/0x54
+ 53 &rq->lock/1 1224 [<ffffffff81340524>] schedule+0x157/0x7b8
+ 54 &rq->lock/1 4336 [<ffffffff8103ed58>] double_rq_lock+0x4f/0x54
+ 55 &rq->lock/1 181 [<ffffffff8104ba65>] try_to_wake_up+0x127/0x25a
+
+Line 48 shows statistics for the second subclass (/1) of &rq->lock class
+(subclass starts from 0), since in this case, as line 50 suggests,
+double_rq_lock actually acquires a nested lock of two spinlocks.
+
+View the top contending locks::
+
+ # grep : /proc/lock_stat | head
+ clockevents_lock: 2926159 2947636 0.15 46882.81 1784540466.34 605.41 3381345 3879161 0.00 2260.97 53178395.68 13.71
+ tick_broadcast_lock: 346460 346717 0.18 2257.43 39364622.71 113.54 3642919 4242696 0.00 2263.79 49173646.60 11.59
+ &mapping->i_mmap_mutex: 203896 203899 3.36 645530.05 31767507988.39 155800.21 3361776 8893984 0.17 2254.15 14110121.02 1.59
+ &rq->lock: 135014 136909 0.18 606.09 842160.68 6.15 1540728 10436146 0.00 728.72 17606683.41 1.69
+ &(&zone->lru_lock)->rlock: 93000 94934 0.16 59.18 188253.78 1.98 1199912 3809894 0.15 391.40 3559518.81 0.93
+ tasklist_lock-W: 40667 41130 0.23 1189.42 428980.51 10.43 270278 510106 0.16 653.51 3939674.91 7.72
+ tasklist_lock-R: 21298 21305 0.20 1310.05 215511.12 10.12 186204 241258 0.14 1162.33 1179779.23 4.89
+ rcu_node_1: 47656 49022 0.16 635.41 193616.41 3.95 844888 1865423 0.00 764.26 1656226.96 0.89
+ &(&dentry->d_lockref.lock)->rlock: 39791 40179 0.15 1302.08 88851.96 2.21 2790851 12527025 0.10 1910.75 3379714.27 0.27
+ rcu_node_0: 29203 30064 0.16 786.55 1555573.00 51.74 88963 244254 0.00 398.87 428872.51 1.76
+
+Clear the statistics::
+
+ # echo 0 > /proc/lock_stat
diff --git a/Documentation/locking/lockstat.txt b/Documentation/locking/lockstat.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index fdbeb0c45ef3..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/locking/lockstat.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,183 +0,0 @@
-
-LOCK STATISTICS
-
-- WHAT
-
-As the name suggests, it provides statistics on locks.
-
-- WHY
-
-Because things like lock contention can severely impact performance.
-
-- HOW
-
-Lockdep already has hooks in the lock functions and maps lock instances to
-lock classes. We build on that (see Documentation/locking/lockdep-design.txt).
-The graph below shows the relation between the lock functions and the various
-hooks therein.
-
- __acquire
- |
- lock _____
- | \
- | __contended
- | |
- | <wait>
- | _______/
- |/
- |
- __acquired
- |
- .
- <hold>
- .
- |
- __release
- |
- unlock
-
-lock, unlock - the regular lock functions
-__* - the hooks
-<> - states
-
-With these hooks we provide the following statistics:
-
- con-bounces - number of lock contention that involved x-cpu data
- contentions - number of lock acquisitions that had to wait
- wait time min - shortest (non-0) time we ever had to wait for a lock
- max - longest time we ever had to wait for a lock
- total - total time we spend waiting on this lock
- avg - average time spent waiting on this lock
- acq-bounces - number of lock acquisitions that involved x-cpu data
- acquisitions - number of times we took the lock
- hold time min - shortest (non-0) time we ever held the lock
- max - longest time we ever held the lock
- total - total time this lock was held
- avg - average time this lock was held
-
-These numbers are gathered per lock class, per read/write state (when
-applicable).
-
-It also tracks 4 contention points per class. A contention point is a call site
-that had to wait on lock acquisition.
-
- - CONFIGURATION
-
-Lock statistics are enabled via CONFIG_LOCK_STAT.
-
- - USAGE
-
-Enable collection of statistics:
-
-# echo 1 >/proc/sys/kernel/lock_stat
-
-Disable collection of statistics:
-
-# echo 0 >/proc/sys/kernel/lock_stat
-
-Look at the current lock statistics:
-
-( line numbers not part of actual output, done for clarity in the explanation
- below )
-
-# less /proc/lock_stat
-
-01 lock_stat version 0.4
-02-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-03 class name con-bounces contentions waittime-min waittime-max waittime-total waittime-avg acq-bounces acquisitions holdtime-min holdtime-max holdtime-total holdtime-avg
-04-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-05
-06 &mm->mmap_sem-W: 46 84 0.26 939.10 16371.53 194.90 47291 2922365 0.16 2220301.69 17464026916.32 5975.99
-07 &mm->mmap_sem-R: 37 100 1.31 299502.61 325629.52 3256.30 212344 34316685 0.10 7744.91 95016910.20 2.77
-08 ---------------
-09 &mm->mmap_sem 1 [<ffffffff811502a7>] khugepaged_scan_mm_slot+0x57/0x280
-10 &mm->mmap_sem 96 [<ffffffff815351c4>] __do_page_fault+0x1d4/0x510
-11 &mm->mmap_sem 34 [<ffffffff81113d77>] vm_mmap_pgoff+0x87/0xd0
-12 &mm->mmap_sem 17 [<ffffffff81127e71>] vm_munmap+0x41/0x80
-13 ---------------
-14 &mm->mmap_sem 1 [<ffffffff81046fda>] dup_mmap+0x2a/0x3f0
-15 &mm->mmap_sem 60 [<ffffffff81129e29>] SyS_mprotect+0xe9/0x250
-16 &mm->mmap_sem 41 [<ffffffff815351c4>] __do_page_fault+0x1d4/0x510
-17 &mm->mmap_sem 68 [<ffffffff81113d77>] vm_mmap_pgoff+0x87/0xd0
-18
-19.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................
-20
-21 unix_table_lock: 110 112 0.21 49.24 163.91 1.46 21094 66312 0.12 624.42 31589.81 0.48
-22 ---------------
-23 unix_table_lock 45 [<ffffffff8150ad8e>] unix_create1+0x16e/0x1b0
-24 unix_table_lock 47 [<ffffffff8150b111>] unix_release_sock+0x31/0x250
-25 unix_table_lock 15 [<ffffffff8150ca37>] unix_find_other+0x117/0x230
-26 unix_table_lock 5 [<ffffffff8150a09f>] unix_autobind+0x11f/0x1b0
-27 ---------------
-28 unix_table_lock 39 [<ffffffff8150b111>] unix_release_sock+0x31/0x250
-29 unix_table_lock 49 [<ffffffff8150ad8e>] unix_create1+0x16e/0x1b0
-30 unix_table_lock 20 [<ffffffff8150ca37>] unix_find_other+0x117/0x230
-31 unix_table_lock 4 [<ffffffff8150a09f>] unix_autobind+0x11f/0x1b0
-
-
-This excerpt shows the first two lock class statistics. Line 01 shows the
-output version - each time the format changes this will be updated. Line 02-04
-show the header with column descriptions. Lines 05-18 and 20-31 show the actual
-statistics. These statistics come in two parts; the actual stats separated by a
-short separator (line 08, 13) from the contention points.
-
-Lines 09-12 show the first 4 recorded contention points (the code
-which tries to get the lock) and lines 14-17 show the first 4 recorded
-contended points (the lock holder). It is possible that the max
-con-bounces point is missing in the statistics.
-
-The first lock (05-18) is a read/write lock, and shows two lines above the
-short separator. The contention points don't match the column descriptors,
-they have two: contentions and [<IP>] symbol. The second set of contention
-points are the points we're contending with.
-
-The integer part of the time values is in us.
-
-Dealing with nested locks, subclasses may appear:
-
-32...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
-33
-34 &rq->lock: 13128 13128 0.43 190.53 103881.26 7.91 97454 3453404 0.00 401.11 13224683.11 3.82
-35 ---------
-36 &rq->lock 645 [<ffffffff8103bfc4>] task_rq_lock+0x43/0x75
-37 &rq->lock 297 [<ffffffff8104ba65>] try_to_wake_up+0x127/0x25a
-38 &rq->lock 360 [<ffffffff8103c4c5>] select_task_rq_fair+0x1f0/0x74a
-39 &rq->lock 428 [<ffffffff81045f98>] scheduler_tick+0x46/0x1fb
-40 ---------
-41 &rq->lock 77 [<ffffffff8103bfc4>] task_rq_lock+0x43/0x75
-42 &rq->lock 174 [<ffffffff8104ba65>] try_to_wake_up+0x127/0x25a
-43 &rq->lock 4715 [<ffffffff8103ed4b>] double_rq_lock+0x42/0x54
-44 &rq->lock 893 [<ffffffff81340524>] schedule+0x157/0x7b8
-45
-46...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
-47
-48 &rq->lock/1: 1526 11488 0.33 388.73 136294.31 11.86 21461 38404 0.00 37.93 109388.53 2.84
-49 -----------
-50 &rq->lock/1 11526 [<ffffffff8103ed58>] double_rq_lock+0x4f/0x54
-51 -----------
-52 &rq->lock/1 5645 [<ffffffff8103ed4b>] double_rq_lock+0x42/0x54
-53 &rq->lock/1 1224 [<ffffffff81340524>] schedule+0x157/0x7b8
-54 &rq->lock/1 4336 [<ffffffff8103ed58>] double_rq_lock+0x4f/0x54
-55 &rq->lock/1 181 [<ffffffff8104ba65>] try_to_wake_up+0x127/0x25a
-
-Line 48 shows statistics for the second subclass (/1) of &rq->lock class
-(subclass starts from 0), since in this case, as line 50 suggests,
-double_rq_lock actually acquires a nested lock of two spinlocks.
-
-View the top contending locks:
-
-# grep : /proc/lock_stat | head
- clockevents_lock: 2926159 2947636 0.15 46882.81 1784540466.34 605.41 3381345 3879161 0.00 2260.97 53178395.68 13.71
- tick_broadcast_lock: 346460 346717 0.18 2257.43 39364622.71 113.54 3642919 4242696 0.00 2263.79 49173646.60 11.59
- &mapping->i_mmap_mutex: 203896 203899 3.36 645530.05 31767507988.39 155800.21 3361776 8893984 0.17 2254.15 14110121.02 1.59
- &rq->lock: 135014 136909 0.18 606.09 842160.68 6.15 1540728 10436146 0.00 728.72 17606683.41 1.69
- &(&zone->lru_lock)->rlock: 93000 94934 0.16 59.18 188253.78 1.98 1199912 3809894 0.15 391.40 3559518.81 0.93
- tasklist_lock-W: 40667 41130 0.23 1189.42 428980.51 10.43 270278 510106 0.16 653.51 3939674.91 7.72
- tasklist_lock-R: 21298 21305 0.20 1310.05 215511.12 10.12 186204 241258 0.14 1162.33 1179779.23 4.89
- rcu_node_1: 47656 49022 0.16 635.41 193616.41 3.95 844888 1865423 0.00 764.26 1656226.96 0.89
- &(&dentry->d_lockref.lock)->rlock: 39791 40179 0.15 1302.08 88851.96 2.21 2790851 12527025 0.10 1910.75 3379714.27 0.27
- rcu_node_0: 29203 30064 0.16 786.55 1555573.00 51.74 88963 244254 0.00 398.87 428872.51 1.76
-
-Clear the statistics:
-
-# echo 0 > /proc/lock_stat
diff --git a/Documentation/locking/locktorture.txt b/Documentation/locking/locktorture.rst
similarity index 57%
rename from Documentation/locking/locktorture.txt
rename to Documentation/locking/locktorture.rst
index 6a8df4cd19bf..e79eeeca3ac6 100644
--- a/Documentation/locking/locktorture.txt
+++ b/Documentation/locking/locktorture.rst
@@ -1,6 +1,9 @@
+==================================
Kernel Lock Torture Test Operation
+==================================
CONFIG_LOCK_TORTURE_TEST
+========================
The CONFIG LOCK_TORTURE_TEST config option provides a kernel module
that runs torture tests on core kernel locking primitives. The kernel
@@ -18,61 +21,77 @@ can be simulated by either enlarging this critical region hold time and/or
creating more kthreads.
-MODULE PARAMETERS
+Module Parameters
+=================
This module has the following parameters:
- ** Locktorture-specific **
+Locktorture-specific
+--------------------
-nwriters_stress Number of kernel threads that will stress exclusive lock
+nwriters_stress
+ Number of kernel threads that will stress exclusive lock
ownership (writers). The default value is twice the number
of online CPUs.
-nreaders_stress Number of kernel threads that will stress shared lock
+nreaders_stress
+ Number of kernel threads that will stress shared lock
ownership (readers). The default is the same amount of writer
locks. If the user did not specify nwriters_stress, then
both readers and writers be the amount of online CPUs.
-torture_type Type of lock to torture. By default, only spinlocks will
+torture_type
+ Type of lock to torture. By default, only spinlocks will
be tortured. This module can torture the following locks,
with string values as follows:
- o "lock_busted": Simulates a buggy lock implementation.
+ - "lock_busted":
+ Simulates a buggy lock implementation.
- o "spin_lock": spin_lock() and spin_unlock() pairs.
+ - "spin_lock":
+ spin_lock() and spin_unlock() pairs.
- o "spin_lock_irq": spin_lock_irq() and spin_unlock_irq()
- pairs.
+ - "spin_lock_irq":
+ spin_lock_irq() and spin_unlock_irq() pairs.
- o "rw_lock": read/write lock() and unlock() rwlock pairs.
+ - "rw_lock":
+ read/write lock() and unlock() rwlock pairs.
- o "rw_lock_irq": read/write lock_irq() and unlock_irq()
- rwlock pairs.
+ - "rw_lock_irq":
+ read/write lock_irq() and unlock_irq()
+ rwlock pairs.
- o "mutex_lock": mutex_lock() and mutex_unlock() pairs.
+ - "mutex_lock":
+ mutex_lock() and mutex_unlock() pairs.
- o "rtmutex_lock": rtmutex_lock() and rtmutex_unlock()
- pairs. Kernel must have CONFIG_RT_MUTEX=y.
+ - "rtmutex_lock":
+ rtmutex_lock() and rtmutex_unlock() pairs.
+ Kernel must have CONFIG_RT_MUTEX=y.
- o "rwsem_lock": read/write down() and up() semaphore pairs.
+ - "rwsem_lock":
+ read/write down() and up() semaphore pairs.
- ** Torture-framework (RCU + locking) **
+Torture-framework (RCU + locking)
+---------------------------------
-shutdown_secs The number of seconds to run the test before terminating
+shutdown_secs
+ The number of seconds to run the test before terminating
the test and powering off the system. The default is
zero, which disables test termination and system shutdown.
This capability is useful for automated testing.
-onoff_interval The number of seconds between each attempt to execute a
+onoff_interval
+ The number of seconds between each attempt to execute a
randomly selected CPU-hotplug operation. Defaults
to zero, which disables CPU hotplugging. In
CONFIG_HOTPLUG_CPU=n kernels, locktorture will silently
refuse to do any CPU-hotplug operations regardless of
what value is specified for onoff_interval.
-onoff_holdoff The number of seconds to wait until starting CPU-hotplug
+onoff_holdoff
+ The number of seconds to wait until starting CPU-hotplug
operations. This would normally only be used when
locktorture was built into the kernel and started
automatically at boot time, in which case it is useful
@@ -80,53 +99,59 @@ onoff_holdoff The number of seconds to wait until starting CPU-hotplug
coming and going. This parameter is only useful if
CONFIG_HOTPLUG_CPU is enabled.
-stat_interval Number of seconds between statistics-related printk()s.
+stat_interval
+ Number of seconds between statistics-related printk()s.
By default, locktorture will report stats every 60 seconds.
Setting the interval to zero causes the statistics to
be printed -only- when the module is unloaded, and this
is the default.
-stutter The length of time to run the test before pausing for this
+stutter
+ The length of time to run the test before pausing for this
same period of time. Defaults to "stutter=5", so as
to run and pause for (roughly) five-second intervals.
Specifying "stutter=0" causes the test to run continuously
without pausing, which is the old default behavior.
-shuffle_interval The number of seconds to keep the test threads affinitied
+shuffle_interval
+ The number of seconds to keep the test threads affinitied
to a particular subset of the CPUs, defaults to 3 seconds.
Used in conjunction with test_no_idle_hz.
-verbose Enable verbose debugging printing, via printk(). Enabled
+verbose
+ Enable verbose debugging printing, via printk(). Enabled
by default. This extra information is mostly related to
high-level errors and reports from the main 'torture'
framework.
-STATISTICS
+Statistics
+==========
-Statistics are printed in the following format:
+Statistics are printed in the following format::
-spin_lock-torture: Writes: Total: 93746064 Max/Min: 0/0 Fail: 0
- (A) (B) (C) (D) (E)
+ spin_lock-torture: Writes: Total: 93746064 Max/Min: 0/0 Fail: 0
+ (A) (B) (C) (D) (E)
-(A): Lock type that is being tortured -- torture_type parameter.
+ (A): Lock type that is being tortured -- torture_type parameter.
-(B): Number of writer lock acquisitions. If dealing with a read/write primitive
- a second "Reads" statistics line is printed.
+ (B): Number of writer lock acquisitions. If dealing with a read/write
+ primitive a second "Reads" statistics line is printed.
-(C): Number of times the lock was acquired.
+ (C): Number of times the lock was acquired.
-(D): Min and max number of times threads failed to acquire the lock.
+ (D): Min and max number of times threads failed to acquire the lock.
-(E): true/false values if there were errors acquiring the lock. This should
- -only- be positive if there is a bug in the locking primitive's
- implementation. Otherwise a lock should never fail (i.e., spin_lock()).
- Of course, the same applies for (C), above. A dummy example of this is
- the "lock_busted" type.
+ (E): true/false values if there were errors acquiring the lock. This should
+ -only- be positive if there is a bug in the locking primitive's
+ implementation. Otherwise a lock should never fail (i.e., spin_lock()).
+ Of course, the same applies for (C), above. A dummy example of this is
+ the "lock_busted" type.
-USAGE
+Usage
+=====
-The following script may be used to torture locks:
+The following script may be used to torture locks::
#!/bin/sh
diff --git a/Documentation/locking/mutex-design.txt b/Documentation/locking/mutex-design.rst
similarity index 94%
rename from Documentation/locking/mutex-design.txt
rename to Documentation/locking/mutex-design.rst
index 818aca19612f..4d8236b81fa5 100644
--- a/Documentation/locking/mutex-design.txt
+++ b/Documentation/locking/mutex-design.rst
@@ -1,6 +1,9 @@
+=======================
Generic Mutex Subsystem
+=======================
started by Ingo Molnar <mingo@redhat.com>
+
updated by Davidlohr Bueso <davidlohr@hp.com>
What are mutexes?
@@ -23,7 +26,7 @@ Implementation
Mutexes are represented by 'struct mutex', defined in include/linux/mutex.h
and implemented in kernel/locking/mutex.c. These locks use an atomic variable
(->owner) to keep track of the lock state during its lifetime. Field owner
-actually contains 'struct task_struct *' to the current lock owner and it is
+actually contains `struct task_struct *` to the current lock owner and it is
therefore NULL if not currently owned. Since task_struct pointers are aligned
at at least L1_CACHE_BYTES, low bits (3) are used to store extra state (e.g.,
if waiter list is non-empty). In its most basic form it also includes a
@@ -101,29 +104,36 @@ features that make lock debugging easier and faster:
Interfaces
----------
-Statically define the mutex:
+Statically define the mutex::
+
DEFINE_MUTEX(name);
-Dynamically initialize the mutex:
+Dynamically initialize the mutex::
+
mutex_init(mutex);
-Acquire the mutex, uninterruptible:
+Acquire the mutex, uninterruptible::
+
void mutex_lock(struct mutex *lock);
void mutex_lock_nested(struct mutex *lock, unsigned int subclass);
int mutex_trylock(struct mutex *lock);
-Acquire the mutex, interruptible:
+Acquire the mutex, interruptible::
+
int mutex_lock_interruptible_nested(struct mutex *lock,
unsigned int subclass);
int mutex_lock_interruptible(struct mutex *lock);
-Acquire the mutex, interruptible, if dec to 0:
+Acquire the mutex, interruptible, if dec to 0::
+
int atomic_dec_and_mutex_lock(atomic_t *cnt, struct mutex *lock);
-Unlock the mutex:
+Unlock the mutex::
+
void mutex_unlock(struct mutex *lock);
-Test if the mutex is taken:
+Test if the mutex is taken::
+
int mutex_is_locked(struct mutex *lock);
Disadvantages
diff --git a/Documentation/locking/rt-mutex-design.txt b/Documentation/locking/rt-mutex-design.rst
similarity index 91%
rename from Documentation/locking/rt-mutex-design.txt
rename to Documentation/locking/rt-mutex-design.rst
index 3d7b865539cc..59c2a64efb21 100644
--- a/Documentation/locking/rt-mutex-design.txt
+++ b/Documentation/locking/rt-mutex-design.rst
@@ -1,14 +1,15 @@
-#
-# Copyright (c) 2006 Steven Rostedt
-# Licensed under the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2
-#
-
+==============================
RT-mutex implementation design
-------------------------------
+==============================
+
+Copyright (c) 2006 Steven Rostedt
+
+Licensed under the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2
+
This document tries to describe the design of the rtmutex.c implementation.
It doesn't describe the reasons why rtmutex.c exists. For that please see
-Documentation/locking/rt-mutex.txt. Although this document does explain problems
+Documentation/locking/rt-mutex.rst. Although this document does explain problems
that happen without this code, but that is in the concept to understand
what the code actually is doing.
@@ -41,17 +42,17 @@ to release the lock, because for all we know, B is a CPU hog and will
never give C a chance to release the lock. This is called unbounded priority
inversion.
-Here's a little ASCII art to show the problem.
+Here's a little ASCII art to show the problem::
- grab lock L1 (owned by C)
- |
-A ---+
- C preempted by B
- |
-C +----+
+ grab lock L1 (owned by C)
+ |
+ A ---+
+ C preempted by B
+ |
+ C +----+
-B +-------->
- B now keeps A from running.
+ B +-------->
+ B now keeps A from running.
Priority Inheritance (PI)
@@ -75,24 +76,29 @@ Terminology
Here I explain some terminology that is used in this document to help describe
the design that is used to implement PI.
-PI chain - The PI chain is an ordered series of locks and processes that cause
+PI chain
+ - The PI chain is an ordered series of locks and processes that cause
processes to inherit priorities from a previous process that is
blocked on one of its locks. This is described in more detail
later in this document.
-mutex - In this document, to differentiate from locks that implement
+mutex
+ - In this document, to differentiate from locks that implement
PI and spin locks that are used in the PI code, from now on
the PI locks will be called a mutex.
-lock - In this document from now on, I will use the term lock when
+lock
+ - In this document from now on, I will use the term lock when
referring to spin locks that are used to protect parts of the PI
algorithm. These locks disable preemption for UP (when
CONFIG_PREEMPT is enabled) and on SMP prevents multiple CPUs from
entering critical sections simultaneously.
-spin lock - Same as lock above.
+spin lock
+ - Same as lock above.
-waiter - A waiter is a struct that is stored on the stack of a blocked
+waiter
+ - A waiter is a struct that is stored on the stack of a blocked
process. Since the scope of the waiter is within the code for
a process being blocked on the mutex, it is fine to allocate
the waiter on the process's stack (local variable). This
@@ -104,14 +110,18 @@ waiter - A waiter is a struct that is stored on the stack of a blocked
waiter is sometimes used in reference to the task that is waiting
on a mutex. This is the same as waiter->task.
-waiters - A list of processes that are blocked on a mutex.
+waiters
+ - A list of processes that are blocked on a mutex.
-top waiter - The highest priority process waiting on a specific mutex.
+top waiter
+ - The highest priority process waiting on a specific mutex.
-top pi waiter - The highest priority process waiting on one of the mutexes
+top pi waiter
+ - The highest priority process waiting on one of the mutexes
that a specific process owns.
-Note: task and process are used interchangeably in this document, mostly to
+Note:
+ task and process are used interchangeably in this document, mostly to
differentiate between two processes that are being described together.
@@ -123,7 +133,7 @@ inheritance to take place. Multiple chains may converge, but a chain
would never diverge, since a process can't be blocked on more than one
mutex at a time.
-Example:
+Example::
Process: A, B, C, D, E
Mutexes: L1, L2, L3, L4
@@ -137,21 +147,21 @@ Example:
D owns L4
E blocked on L4
-The chain would be:
+The chain would be::
E->L4->D->L3->C->L2->B->L1->A
To show where two chains merge, we could add another process F and
another mutex L5 where B owns L5 and F is blocked on mutex L5.
-The chain for F would be:
+The chain for F would be::
F->L5->B->L1->A
Since a process may own more than one mutex, but never be blocked on more than
one, the chains merge.
-Here we show both chains:
+Here we show both chains::
E->L4->D->L3->C->L2-+
|
@@ -165,12 +175,12 @@ than the processes to the left or below in the chain.
Also since a mutex may have more than one process blocked on it, we can
have multiple chains merge at mutexes. If we add another process G that is
-blocked on mutex L2:
+blocked on mutex L2::
G->L2->B->L1->A
And once again, to show how this can grow I will show the merging chains
-again.
+again::
E->L4->D->L3->C-+
+->L2-+
@@ -184,7 +194,7 @@ the chain (A and B in this example), must have their priorities increased
to that of G.
Mutex Waiters Tree
------------------
+------------------
Every mutex keeps track of all the waiters that are blocked on itself. The
mutex has a rbtree to store these waiters by priority. This tree is protected
@@ -219,19 +229,19 @@ defined. But is very complex to figure it out, since it depends on all
the nesting of mutexes. Let's look at the example where we have 3 mutexes,
L1, L2, and L3, and four separate functions func1, func2, func3 and func4.
The following shows a locking order of L1->L2->L3, but may not actually
-be directly nested that way.
+be directly nested that way::
-void func1(void)
-{
+ void func1(void)
+ {
mutex_lock(L1);
/* do anything */
mutex_unlock(L1);
-}
+ }
-void func2(void)
-{
+ void func2(void)
+ {
mutex_lock(L1);
mutex_lock(L2);
@@ -239,10 +249,10 @@ void func2(void)
mutex_unlock(L2);
mutex_unlock(L1);
-}
+ }
-void func3(void)
-{
+ void func3(void)
+ {
mutex_lock(L2);
mutex_lock(L3);
@@ -250,30 +260,30 @@ void func3(void)
mutex_unlock(L3);
mutex_unlock(L2);
-}
+ }
-void func4(void)
-{
+ void func4(void)
+ {
mutex_lock(L3);
/* do something again */
mutex_unlock(L3);
-}
+ }
Now we add 4 processes that run each of these functions separately.
Processes A, B, C, and D which run functions func1, func2, func3 and func4
respectively, and such that D runs first and A last. With D being preempted
-in func4 in the "do something again" area, we have a locking that follows:
+in func4 in the "do something again" area, we have a locking that follows::
-D owns L3
- C blocked on L3
- C owns L2
- B blocked on L2
- B owns L1
- A blocked on L1
+ D owns L3
+ C blocked on L3
+ C owns L2
+ B blocked on L2
+ B owns L1
+ A blocked on L1
-And thus we have the chain A->L1->B->L2->C->L3->D.
+ And thus we have the chain A->L1->B->L2->C->L3->D.
This gives us a PI depth of 4 (four processes), but looking at any of the
functions individually, it seems as though they only have at most a locking
@@ -298,7 +308,7 @@ not true, the rtmutex.c code will be broken!), this allows for the least
significant bit to be used as a flag. Bit 0 is used as the "Has Waiters"
flag. It's set whenever there are waiters on a mutex.
-See Documentation/locking/rt-mutex.txt for further details.
+See Documentation/locking/rt-mutex.rst for further details.
cmpxchg Tricks
--------------
@@ -307,17 +317,17 @@ Some architectures implement an atomic cmpxchg (Compare and Exchange). This
is used (when applicable) to keep the fast path of grabbing and releasing
mutexes short.
-cmpxchg is basically the following function performed atomically:
+cmpxchg is basically the following function performed atomically::
-unsigned long _cmpxchg(unsigned long *A, unsigned long *B, unsigned long *C)
-{
+ unsigned long _cmpxchg(unsigned long *A, unsigned long *B, unsigned long *C)
+ {
unsigned long T = *A;
if (*A == *B) {
*A = *C;
}
return T;
-}
-#define cmpxchg(a,b,c) _cmpxchg(&a,&b,&c)
+ }
+ #define cmpxchg(a,b,c) _cmpxchg(&a,&b,&c)
This is really nice to have, since it allows you to only update a variable
if the variable is what you expect it to be. You know if it succeeded if
@@ -352,9 +362,10 @@ Then rt_mutex_setprio is called to adjust the priority of the task to the
new priority. Note that rt_mutex_setprio is defined in kernel/sched/core.c
to implement the actual change in priority.
-(Note: For the "prio" field in task_struct, the lower the number, the
+Note:
+ For the "prio" field in task_struct, the lower the number, the
higher the priority. A "prio" of 5 is of higher priority than a
- "prio" of 10.)
+ "prio" of 10.
It is interesting to note that rt_mutex_adjust_prio can either increase
or decrease the priority of the task. In the case that a higher priority
@@ -439,6 +450,7 @@ wait_lock, which this code currently holds. So setting the "Has Waiters" flag
forces the current owner to synchronize with this code.
The lock is taken if the following are true:
+
1) The lock has no owner
2) The current task is the highest priority against all other
waiters of the lock
@@ -546,10 +558,13 @@ Credits
-------
Author: Steven Rostedt <rostedt@goodmis.org>
+
Updated: Alex Shi <alex.shi@linaro.org> - 7/6/2017
-Original Reviewers: Ingo Molnar, Thomas Gleixner, Thomas Duetsch, and
+Original Reviewers:
+ Ingo Molnar, Thomas Gleixner, Thomas Duetsch, and
Randy Dunlap
+
Update (7/6/2017) Reviewers: Steven Rostedt and Sebastian Siewior
Updates
diff --git a/Documentation/locking/rt-mutex.txt b/Documentation/locking/rt-mutex.rst
similarity index 71%
rename from Documentation/locking/rt-mutex.txt
rename to Documentation/locking/rt-mutex.rst
index 35793e003041..c365dc302081 100644
--- a/Documentation/locking/rt-mutex.txt
+++ b/Documentation/locking/rt-mutex.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
+==================================
RT-mutex subsystem with PI support
-----------------------------------
+==================================
RT-mutexes with priority inheritance are used to support PI-futexes,
which enable pthread_mutex_t priority inheritance attributes
@@ -46,27 +47,30 @@ The state of the rt-mutex is tracked via the owner field of the rt-mutex
structure:
lock->owner holds the task_struct pointer of the owner. Bit 0 is used to
-keep track of the "lock has waiters" state.
+keep track of the "lock has waiters" state:
- owner bit0
+ ============ ======= ================================================
+ owner bit0 Notes
+ ============ ======= ================================================
NULL 0 lock is free (fast acquire possible)
NULL 1 lock is free and has waiters and the top waiter
- is going to take the lock*
+ is going to take the lock [1]_
taskpointer 0 lock is held (fast release possible)
- taskpointer 1 lock is held and has waiters**
+ taskpointer 1 lock is held and has waiters [2]_
+ ============ ======= ================================================
The fast atomic compare exchange based acquire and release is only
possible when bit 0 of lock->owner is 0.
-(*) It also can be a transitional state when grabbing the lock
-with ->wait_lock is held. To prevent any fast path cmpxchg to the lock,
-we need to set the bit0 before looking at the lock, and the owner may be
-NULL in this small time, hence this can be a transitional state.
+.. [1] It also can be a transitional state when grabbing the lock
+ with ->wait_lock is held. To prevent any fast path cmpxchg to the lock,
+ we need to set the bit0 before looking at the lock, and the owner may
+ be NULL in this small time, hence this can be a transitional state.
-(**) There is a small time when bit 0 is set but there are no
-waiters. This can happen when grabbing the lock in the slow path.
-To prevent a cmpxchg of the owner releasing the lock, we need to
-set this bit before looking at the lock.
+.. [2] There is a small time when bit 0 is set but there are no
+ waiters. This can happen when grabbing the lock in the slow path.
+ To prevent a cmpxchg of the owner releasing the lock, we need to
+ set this bit before looking at the lock.
BTW, there is still technically a "Pending Owner", it's just not called
that anymore. The pending owner happens to be the top_waiter of a lock
diff --git a/Documentation/locking/spinlocks.txt b/Documentation/locking/spinlocks.rst
similarity index 89%
rename from Documentation/locking/spinlocks.txt
rename to Documentation/locking/spinlocks.rst
index ff35e40bdf5b..098107fb7d86 100644
--- a/Documentation/locking/spinlocks.txt
+++ b/Documentation/locking/spinlocks.rst
@@ -1,8 +1,13 @@
+===============
+Locking lessons
+===============
+
Lesson 1: Spin locks
+====================
-The most basic primitive for locking is spinlock.
+The most basic primitive for locking is spinlock::
-static DEFINE_SPINLOCK(xxx_lock);
+ static DEFINE_SPINLOCK(xxx_lock);
unsigned long flags;
@@ -19,23 +24,25 @@ worry about UP vs SMP issues: the spinlocks work correctly under both.
NOTE! Implications of spin_locks for memory are further described in:
Documentation/memory-barriers.txt
+
(5) LOCK operations.
+
(6) UNLOCK operations.
The above is usually pretty simple (you usually need and want only one
spinlock for most things - using more than one spinlock can make things a
lot more complex and even slower and is usually worth it only for
-sequences that you _know_ need to be split up: avoid it at all cost if you
+sequences that you **know** need to be split up: avoid it at all cost if you
aren't sure).
This is really the only really hard part about spinlocks: once you start
using spinlocks they tend to expand to areas you might not have noticed
before, because you have to make sure the spinlocks correctly protect the
-shared data structures _everywhere_ they are used. The spinlocks are most
+shared data structures **everywhere** they are used. The spinlocks are most
easily added to places that are completely independent of other code (for
example, internal driver data structures that nobody else ever touches).
- NOTE! The spin-lock is safe only when you _also_ use the lock itself
+ NOTE! The spin-lock is safe only when you **also** use the lock itself
to do locking across CPU's, which implies that EVERYTHING that
touches a shared variable has to agree about the spinlock they want
to use.
@@ -43,6 +50,7 @@ example, internal driver data structures that nobody else ever touches).
----
Lesson 2: reader-writer spinlocks.
+==================================
If your data accesses have a very natural pattern where you usually tend
to mostly read from the shared variables, the reader-writer locks
@@ -54,7 +62,7 @@ to change the variables it has to get an exclusive write lock.
simple spinlocks. Unless the reader critical section is long, you
are better off just using spinlocks.
-The routines look the same as above:
+The routines look the same as above::
rwlock_t xxx_lock = __RW_LOCK_UNLOCKED(xxx_lock);
@@ -71,7 +79,7 @@ The routines look the same as above:
The above kind of lock may be useful for complex data structures like
linked lists, especially searching for entries without changing the list
itself. The read lock allows many concurrent readers. Anything that
-_changes_ the list will have to get the write lock.
+**changes** the list will have to get the write lock.
NOTE! RCU is better for list traversal, but requires careful
attention to design detail (see Documentation/RCU/listRCU.txt).
@@ -87,10 +95,11 @@ to get the write-lock at the very beginning.
----
Lesson 3: spinlocks revisited.
+==============================
The single spin-lock primitives above are by no means the only ones. They
are the most safe ones, and the ones that work under all circumstances,
-but partly _because_ they are safe they are also fairly slow. They are slower
+but partly **because** they are safe they are also fairly slow. They are slower
than they'd need to be, because they do have to disable interrupts
(which is just a single instruction on a x86, but it's an expensive one -
and on other architectures it can be worse).
@@ -98,7 +107,7 @@ and on other architectures it can be worse).
If you have a case where you have to protect a data structure across
several CPU's and you want to use spinlocks you can potentially use
cheaper versions of the spinlocks. IFF you know that the spinlocks are
-never used in interrupt handlers, you can use the non-irq versions:
+never used in interrupt handlers, you can use the non-irq versions::
spin_lock(&lock);
...
@@ -110,7 +119,7 @@ This is useful if you know that the data in question is only ever
manipulated from a "process context", ie no interrupts involved.
The reasons you mustn't use these versions if you have interrupts that
-play with the spinlock is that you can get deadlocks:
+play with the spinlock is that you can get deadlocks::
spin_lock(&lock);
...
@@ -147,9 +156,10 @@ indeed), while write-locks need to protect themselves against interrupts.
----
Reference information:
+======================
For dynamic initialization, use spin_lock_init() or rwlock_init() as
-appropriate:
+appropriate::
spinlock_t xxx_lock;
rwlock_t xxx_rw_lock;
diff --git a/Documentation/locking/ww-mutex-design.txt b/Documentation/locking/ww-mutex-design.rst
similarity index 93%
rename from Documentation/locking/ww-mutex-design.txt
rename to Documentation/locking/ww-mutex-design.rst
index f0ed7c30e695..1846c199da23 100644
--- a/Documentation/locking/ww-mutex-design.txt
+++ b/Documentation/locking/ww-mutex-design.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+======================================
Wound/Wait Deadlock-Proof Mutex Design
======================================
@@ -85,6 +86,7 @@ Furthermore there are three different class of w/w lock acquire functions:
no deadlock potential and hence the ww_mutex_lock call will block and not
prematurely return -EDEADLK. The advantage of the _slow functions is in
interface safety:
+
- ww_mutex_lock has a __must_check int return type, whereas ww_mutex_lock_slow
has a void return type. Note that since ww mutex code needs loops/retries
anyway the __must_check doesn't result in spurious warnings, even though the
@@ -115,36 +117,36 @@ expect the number of simultaneous competing transactions to be typically small,
and you want to reduce the number of rollbacks.
Three different ways to acquire locks within the same w/w class. Common
-definitions for methods #1 and #2:
+definitions for methods #1 and #2::
-static DEFINE_WW_CLASS(ww_class);
+ static DEFINE_WW_CLASS(ww_class);
-struct obj {
+ struct obj {
struct ww_mutex lock;
/* obj data */
-};
+ };
-struct obj_entry {
+ struct obj_entry {
struct list_head head;
struct obj *obj;
-};
+ };
Method 1, using a list in execbuf->buffers that's not allowed to be reordered.
This is useful if a list of required objects is already tracked somewhere.
Furthermore the lock helper can use propagate the -EALREADY return code back to
the caller as a signal that an object is twice on the list. This is useful if
the list is constructed from userspace input and the ABI requires userspace to
-not have duplicate entries (e.g. for a gpu commandbuffer submission ioctl).
+not have duplicate entries (e.g. for a gpu commandbuffer submission ioctl)::
-int lock_objs(struct list_head *list, struct ww_acquire_ctx *ctx)
-{
+ int lock_objs(struct list_head *list, struct ww_acquire_ctx *ctx)
+ {
struct obj *res_obj = NULL;
struct obj_entry *contended_entry = NULL;
struct obj_entry *entry;
ww_acquire_init(ctx, &ww_class);
-retry:
+ retry:
list_for_each_entry (entry, list, head) {
if (entry->obj == res_obj) {
res_obj = NULL;
@@ -160,7 +162,7 @@ retry:
ww_acquire_done(ctx);
return 0;
-err:
+ err:
list_for_each_entry_continue_reverse (entry, list, head)
ww_mutex_unlock(&entry->obj->lock);
@@ -176,14 +178,14 @@ err:
ww_acquire_fini(ctx);
return ret;
-}
+ }
Method 2, using a list in execbuf->buffers that can be reordered. Same semantics
of duplicate entry detection using -EALREADY as method 1 above. But the
-list-reordering allows for a bit more idiomatic code.
+list-reordering allows for a bit more idiomatic code::
-int lock_objs(struct list_head *list, struct ww_acquire_ctx *ctx)
-{
+ int lock_objs(struct list_head *list, struct ww_acquire_ctx *ctx)
+ {
struct obj_entry *entry, *entry2;
ww_acquire_init(ctx, &ww_class);
@@ -216,24 +218,25 @@ int lock_objs(struct list_head *list, struct ww_acquire_ctx *ctx)
ww_acquire_done(ctx);
return 0;
-}
+ }
-Unlocking works the same way for both methods #1 and #2:
+Unlocking works the same way for both methods #1 and #2::
-void unlock_objs(struct list_head *list, struct ww_acquire_ctx *ctx)
-{
+ void unlock_objs(struct list_head *list, struct ww_acquire_ctx *ctx)
+ {
struct obj_entry *entry;
list_for_each_entry (entry, list, head)
ww_mutex_unlock(&entry->obj->lock);
ww_acquire_fini(ctx);
-}
+ }
Method 3 is useful if the list of objects is constructed ad-hoc and not upfront,
e.g. when adjusting edges in a graph where each node has its own ww_mutex lock,
and edges can only be changed when holding the locks of all involved nodes. w/w
mutexes are a natural fit for such a case for two reasons:
+
- They can handle lock-acquisition in any order which allows us to start walking
a graph from a starting point and then iteratively discovering new edges and
locking down the nodes those edges connect to.
@@ -243,6 +246,7 @@ mutexes are a natural fit for such a case for two reasons:
as a starting point).
Note that this approach differs in two important ways from the above methods:
+
- Since the list of objects is dynamically constructed (and might very well be
different when retrying due to hitting the -EDEADLK die condition) there's
no need to keep any object on a persistent list when it's not locked. We can
@@ -260,17 +264,17 @@ any interface misuse for these cases.
Also, method 3 can't fail the lock acquisition step since it doesn't return
-EALREADY. Of course this would be different when using the _interruptible
-variants, but that's outside of the scope of these examples here.
+variants, but that's outside of the scope of these examples here::
-struct obj {
+ struct obj {
struct ww_mutex ww_mutex;
struct list_head locked_list;
-};
+ };
-static DEFINE_WW_CLASS(ww_class);
+ static DEFINE_WW_CLASS(ww_class);
-void __unlock_objs(struct list_head *list)
-{
+ void __unlock_objs(struct list_head *list)
+ {
struct obj *entry, *temp;
list_for_each_entry_safe (entry, temp, list, locked_list) {
@@ -279,15 +283,15 @@ void __unlock_objs(struct list_head *list)
list_del(&entry->locked_list);
ww_mutex_unlock(entry->ww_mutex)
}
-}
+ }
-void lock_objs(struct list_head *list, struct ww_acquire_ctx *ctx)
-{
+ void lock_objs(struct list_head *list, struct ww_acquire_ctx *ctx)
+ {
struct obj *obj;
ww_acquire_init(ctx, &ww_class);
-retry:
+ retry:
/* re-init loop start state */
loop {
/* magic code which walks over a graph and decides which objects
@@ -312,13 +316,13 @@ retry:
ww_acquire_done(ctx);
return 0;
-}
+ }
-void unlock_objs(struct list_head *list, struct ww_acquire_ctx *ctx)
-{
+ void unlock_objs(struct list_head *list, struct ww_acquire_ctx *ctx)
+ {
__unlock_objs(list);
ww_acquire_fini(ctx);
-}
+ }
Method 4: Only lock one single objects. In that case deadlock detection and
prevention is obviously overkill, since with grabbing just one lock you can't
@@ -329,11 +333,14 @@ Implementation Details
----------------------
Design:
+^^^^^^^
+
ww_mutex currently encapsulates a struct mutex, this means no extra overhead for
normal mutex locks, which are far more common. As such there is only a small
increase in code size if wait/wound mutexes are not used.
We maintain the following invariants for the wait list:
+
(1) Waiters with an acquire context are sorted by stamp order; waiters
without an acquire context are interspersed in FIFO order.
(2) For Wait-Die, among waiters with contexts, only the first one can have
@@ -355,6 +362,8 @@ Design:
therefore be directed towards the uncontended cases.
Lockdep:
+^^^^^^^^
+
Special care has been taken to warn for as many cases of api abuse
as possible. Some common api abuses will be caught with
CONFIG_DEBUG_MUTEXES, but CONFIG_PROVE_LOCKING is recommended.
@@ -379,5 +388,6 @@ Lockdep:
having called ww_acquire_fini on the first.
- 'normal' deadlocks that can occur.
-FIXME: Update this section once we have the TASK_DEADLOCK task state flag magic
-implemented.
+FIXME:
+ Update this section once we have the TASK_DEADLOCK task state flag magic
+ implemented.
diff --git a/Documentation/pi-futex.txt b/Documentation/pi-futex.txt
index b154f6c0c36e..c33ba2befbf8 100644
--- a/Documentation/pi-futex.txt
+++ b/Documentation/pi-futex.txt
@@ -119,4 +119,4 @@ properties of futexes, and all four combinations are possible: futex,
robust-futex, PI-futex, robust+PI-futex.
More details about priority inheritance can be found in
-Documentation/locking/rt-mutex.txt.
+Documentation/locking/rt-mutex.rst.
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/kernel-hacking/locking.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/kernel-hacking/locking.rst
index 5fd8a1abd2be..b9a6be4b8499 100644
--- a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/kernel-hacking/locking.rst
+++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/kernel-hacking/locking.rst
@@ -1404,7 +1404,7 @@ Riferimento per l'API dei Futex
Approfondimenti
===============
-- ``Documentation/locking/spinlocks.txt``: la guida di Linus Torvalds agli
+- ``Documentation/locking/spinlocks.rst``: la guida di Linus Torvalds agli
spinlock del kernel.
- Unix Systems for Modern Architectures: Symmetric Multiprocessing and
diff --git a/drivers/gpu/drm/drm_modeset_lock.c b/drivers/gpu/drm/drm_modeset_lock.c
index 53187821df01..fcfe1a03c4a1 100644
--- a/drivers/gpu/drm/drm_modeset_lock.c
+++ b/drivers/gpu/drm/drm_modeset_lock.c
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@
* of extra utility/tracking out of our acquire-ctx. This is provided
* by &struct drm_modeset_lock and &struct drm_modeset_acquire_ctx.
*
- * For basic principles of &ww_mutex, see: Documentation/locking/ww-mutex-design.txt
+ * For basic principles of &ww_mutex, see: Documentation/locking/ww-mutex-design.rst
*
* The basic usage pattern is to::
*
diff --git a/include/linux/lockdep.h b/include/linux/lockdep.h
index 57baa27f238c..0b0d7259276d 100644
--- a/include/linux/lockdep.h
+++ b/include/linux/lockdep.h
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
* Copyright (C) 2006,2007 Red Hat, Inc., Ingo Molnar <mingo@redhat.com>
* Copyright (C) 2007 Red Hat, Inc., Peter Zijlstra
*
- * see Documentation/locking/lockdep-design.txt for more details.
+ * see Documentation/locking/lockdep-design.rst for more details.
*/
#ifndef __LINUX_LOCKDEP_H
#define __LINUX_LOCKDEP_H
diff --git a/include/linux/mutex.h b/include/linux/mutex.h
index 3093dd162424..dcd03fee6e01 100644
--- a/include/linux/mutex.h
+++ b/include/linux/mutex.h
@@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ static inline bool mutex_is_locked(struct mutex *lock)
/*
* See kernel/locking/mutex.c for detailed documentation of these APIs.
- * Also see Documentation/locking/mutex-design.txt.
+ * Also see Documentation/locking/mutex-design.rst.
*/
#ifdef CONFIG_DEBUG_LOCK_ALLOC
extern void mutex_lock_nested(struct mutex *lock, unsigned int subclass);
diff --git a/include/linux/rwsem.h b/include/linux/rwsem.h
index e401358c4e7e..9d9c663987d8 100644
--- a/include/linux/rwsem.h
+++ b/include/linux/rwsem.h
@@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ extern void downgrade_write(struct rw_semaphore *sem);
* static then another method for expressing nested locking is
* the explicit definition of lock class keys and the use of
* lockdep_set_class() at lock initialization time.
- * See Documentation/locking/lockdep-design.txt for more details.)
+ * See Documentation/locking/lockdep-design.rst for more details.)
*/
extern void down_read_nested(struct rw_semaphore *sem, int subclass);
extern void down_write_nested(struct rw_semaphore *sem, int subclass);
diff --git a/kernel/locking/mutex.c b/kernel/locking/mutex.c
index 0c601ae072b3..edd1c082dbf5 100644
--- a/kernel/locking/mutex.c
+++ b/kernel/locking/mutex.c
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@
* by Steven Rostedt, based on work by Gregory Haskins, Peter Morreale
* and Sven Dietrich.
*
- * Also see Documentation/locking/mutex-design.txt.
+ * Also see Documentation/locking/mutex-design.rst.
*/
#include <linux/mutex.h>
#include <linux/ww_mutex.h>
diff --git a/kernel/locking/rtmutex.c b/kernel/locking/rtmutex.c
index 38fbf9fa7f1b..fa83d36e30c6 100644
--- a/kernel/locking/rtmutex.c
+++ b/kernel/locking/rtmutex.c
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
* Copyright (C) 2005 Kihon Technologies Inc., Steven Rostedt
* Copyright (C) 2006 Esben Nielsen
*
- * See Documentation/locking/rt-mutex-design.txt for details.
+ * See Documentation/locking/rt-mutex-design.rst for details.
*/
#include <linux/spinlock.h>
#include <linux/export.h>
diff --git a/lib/Kconfig.debug b/lib/Kconfig.debug
index 6d2799190fba..18e8c180a874 100644
--- a/lib/Kconfig.debug
+++ b/lib/Kconfig.debug
@@ -1139,7 +1139,7 @@ config PROVE_LOCKING
the proof of observed correctness is also maintained for an
arbitrary combination of these separate locking variants.
- For more details, see Documentation/locking/lockdep-design.txt.
+ For more details, see Documentation/locking/lockdep-design.rst.
config LOCK_STAT
bool "Lock usage statistics"
@@ -1153,7 +1153,7 @@ config LOCK_STAT
help
This feature enables tracking lock contention points
- For more details, see Documentation/locking/lockstat.txt
+ For more details, see Documentation/locking/lockstat.rst
This also enables lock events required by "perf lock",
subcommand of perf.
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related
* [PATCH 35/43] docs: thermal: convert to ReST
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-28 12:20 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet, Kukjin Kim, Krzysztof Kozlowski, Zhang Rui,
Eduardo Valentin, Daniel Lezcano, linux-arm-kernel,
linux-samsung-soc, linux-pm, Arjan van de Ven
In-Reply-To: <cover.1561723979.git.mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
Rename the thermal documentation files to ReST, add an
index for them and adjust in order to produce a nice html
output via the Sphinx build system.
At its new index.rst, let's add a :orphan: while this is not linked to
the main index.rst file, in order to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
...pu-cooling-api.txt => cpu-cooling-api.rst} | 39 +-
.../{exynos_thermal => exynos_thermal.rst} | 47 +-
.../thermal/exynos_thermal_emulation | 53 --
.../thermal/exynos_thermal_emulation.rst | 61 +++
Documentation/thermal/index.rst | 18 +
...el_powerclamp.txt => intel_powerclamp.rst} | 177 +++----
.../{nouveau_thermal => nouveau_thermal.rst} | 54 +-
...ower_allocator.txt => power_allocator.rst} | 140 ++---
.../thermal/{sysfs-api.txt => sysfs-api.rst} | 490 ++++++++++++------
...hermal => x86_pkg_temperature_thermal.rst} | 28 +-
MAINTAINERS | 2 +-
include/linux/thermal.h | 4 +-
12 files changed, 689 insertions(+), 424 deletions(-)
rename Documentation/thermal/{cpu-cooling-api.txt => cpu-cooling-api.rst} (82%)
rename Documentation/thermal/{exynos_thermal => exynos_thermal.rst} (67%)
delete mode 100644 Documentation/thermal/exynos_thermal_emulation
create mode 100644 Documentation/thermal/exynos_thermal_emulation.rst
create mode 100644 Documentation/thermal/index.rst
rename Documentation/thermal/{intel_powerclamp.txt => intel_powerclamp.rst} (76%)
rename Documentation/thermal/{nouveau_thermal => nouveau_thermal.rst} (64%)
rename Documentation/thermal/{power_allocator.txt => power_allocator.rst} (74%)
rename Documentation/thermal/{sysfs-api.txt => sysfs-api.rst} (66%)
rename Documentation/thermal/{x86_pkg_temperature_thermal => x86_pkg_temperature_thermal.rst} (80%)
diff --git a/Documentation/thermal/cpu-cooling-api.txt b/Documentation/thermal/cpu-cooling-api.rst
similarity index 82%
rename from Documentation/thermal/cpu-cooling-api.txt
rename to Documentation/thermal/cpu-cooling-api.rst
index 7df567eaea1a..645d914c45a6 100644
--- a/Documentation/thermal/cpu-cooling-api.txt
+++ b/Documentation/thermal/cpu-cooling-api.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
+=======================
CPU cooling APIs How To
-===================================
+=======================
Written by Amit Daniel Kachhap <amit.kachhap@linaro.org>
@@ -8,40 +9,54 @@ Updated: 6 Jan 2015
Copyright (c) 2012 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd(http://www.samsung.com)
0. Introduction
+===============
The generic cpu cooling(freq clipping) provides registration/unregistration APIs
to the caller. The binding of the cooling devices to the trip point is left for
the user. The registration APIs returns the cooling device pointer.
1. cpu cooling APIs
+===================
1.1 cpufreq registration/unregistration APIs
-1.1.1 struct thermal_cooling_device *cpufreq_cooling_register(
- struct cpumask *clip_cpus)
+--------------------------------------------
+
+ ::
+
+ struct thermal_cooling_device
+ *cpufreq_cooling_register(struct cpumask *clip_cpus)
This interface function registers the cpufreq cooling device with the name
"thermal-cpufreq-%x". This api can support multiple instances of cpufreq
cooling devices.
- clip_cpus: cpumask of cpus where the frequency constraints will happen.
+ clip_cpus:
+ cpumask of cpus where the frequency constraints will happen.
-1.1.2 struct thermal_cooling_device *of_cpufreq_cooling_register(
- struct cpufreq_policy *policy)
+ ::
+
+ struct thermal_cooling_device
+ *of_cpufreq_cooling_register(struct cpufreq_policy *policy)
This interface function registers the cpufreq cooling device with
the name "thermal-cpufreq-%x" linking it with a device tree node, in
order to bind it via the thermal DT code. This api can support multiple
instances of cpufreq cooling devices.
- policy: CPUFreq policy.
+ policy:
+ CPUFreq policy.
-1.1.3 void cpufreq_cooling_unregister(struct thermal_cooling_device *cdev)
+
+ ::
+
+ void cpufreq_cooling_unregister(struct thermal_cooling_device *cdev)
This interface function unregisters the "thermal-cpufreq-%x" cooling device.
cdev: Cooling device pointer which has to be unregistered.
2. Power models
+===============
The power API registration functions provide a simple power model for
CPUs. The current power is calculated as dynamic power (static power isn't
@@ -65,9 +80,9 @@ For a given processor implementation the primary factors are:
variation. In pathological cases this variation can be significant,
but typically it is of a much lesser impact than the factors above.
-A high level dynamic power consumption model may then be represented as:
+A high level dynamic power consumption model may then be represented as::
-Pdyn = f(run) * Voltage^2 * Frequency * Utilisation
+ Pdyn = f(run) * Voltage^2 * Frequency * Utilisation
f(run) here represents the described execution behaviour and its
result has a units of Watts/Hz/Volt^2 (this often expressed in
@@ -80,9 +95,9 @@ factors. Therefore, in initial implementation that contribution is
represented as a constant coefficient. This is a simplification
consistent with the relative contribution to overall power variation.
-In this simplified representation our model becomes:
+In this simplified representation our model becomes::
-Pdyn = Capacitance * Voltage^2 * Frequency * Utilisation
+ Pdyn = Capacitance * Voltage^2 * Frequency * Utilisation
Where `capacitance` is a constant that represents an indicative
running time dynamic power coefficient in fundamental units of
diff --git a/Documentation/thermal/exynos_thermal b/Documentation/thermal/exynos_thermal.rst
similarity index 67%
rename from Documentation/thermal/exynos_thermal
rename to Documentation/thermal/exynos_thermal.rst
index 9010c4416967..5bd556566c70 100644
--- a/Documentation/thermal/exynos_thermal
+++ b/Documentation/thermal/exynos_thermal.rst
@@ -1,8 +1,11 @@
+========================
Kernel driver exynos_tmu
-=================
+========================
Supported chips:
+
* ARM SAMSUNG EXYNOS4, EXYNOS5 series of SoC
+
Datasheet: Not publicly available
Authors: Donggeun Kim <dg77.kim@samsung.com>
@@ -19,32 +22,39 @@ Temperature can be taken from the temperature code.
There are three equations converting from temperature to temperature code.
The three equations are:
- 1. Two point trimming
+ 1. Two point trimming::
+
Tc = (T - 25) * (TI2 - TI1) / (85 - 25) + TI1
- 2. One point trimming
+ 2. One point trimming::
+
Tc = T + TI1 - 25
- 3. No trimming
+ 3. No trimming::
+
Tc = T + 50
- Tc: Temperature code, T: Temperature,
- TI1: Trimming info for 25 degree Celsius (stored at TRIMINFO register)
+ Tc:
+ Temperature code, T: Temperature,
+ TI1:
+ Trimming info for 25 degree Celsius (stored at TRIMINFO register)
Temperature code measured at 25 degree Celsius which is unchanged
- TI2: Trimming info for 85 degree Celsius (stored at TRIMINFO register)
+ TI2:
+ Trimming info for 85 degree Celsius (stored at TRIMINFO register)
Temperature code measured at 85 degree Celsius which is unchanged
TMU(Thermal Management Unit) in EXYNOS4/5 generates interrupt
when temperature exceeds pre-defined levels.
The maximum number of configurable threshold is five.
-The threshold levels are defined as follows:
+The threshold levels are defined as follows::
+
Level_0: current temperature > trigger_level_0 + threshold
Level_1: current temperature > trigger_level_1 + threshold
Level_2: current temperature > trigger_level_2 + threshold
Level_3: current temperature > trigger_level_3 + threshold
- The threshold and each trigger_level are set
- through the corresponding registers.
+The threshold and each trigger_level are set
+through the corresponding registers.
When an interrupt occurs, this driver notify kernel thermal framework
with the function exynos_report_trigger.
@@ -54,24 +64,27 @@ it can be used to synchronize the cooling action.
TMU driver description:
-----------------------
-The exynos thermal driver is structured as,
+The exynos thermal driver is structured as::
Kernel Core thermal framework
(thermal_core.c, step_wise.c, cpu_cooling.c)
^
|
|
-TMU configuration data -------> TMU Driver <------> Exynos Core thermal wrapper
-(exynos_tmu_data.c) (exynos_tmu.c) (exynos_thermal_common.c)
-(exynos_tmu_data.h) (exynos_tmu.h) (exynos_thermal_common.h)
+ TMU configuration data -----> TMU Driver <----> Exynos Core thermal wrapper
+ (exynos_tmu_data.c) (exynos_tmu.c) (exynos_thermal_common.c)
+ (exynos_tmu_data.h) (exynos_tmu.h) (exynos_thermal_common.h)
-a) TMU configuration data: This consist of TMU register offsets/bitfields
+a) TMU configuration data:
+ This consist of TMU register offsets/bitfields
described through structure exynos_tmu_registers. Also several
other platform data (struct exynos_tmu_platform_data) members
are used to configure the TMU.
-b) TMU driver: This component initialises the TMU controller and sets different
+b) TMU driver:
+ This component initialises the TMU controller and sets different
thresholds. It invokes core thermal implementation with the call
exynos_report_trigger.
-c) Exynos Core thermal wrapper: This provides 3 wrapper function to use the
+c) Exynos Core thermal wrapper:
+ This provides 3 wrapper function to use the
Kernel core thermal framework. They are exynos_unregister_thermal,
exynos_register_thermal and exynos_report_trigger.
diff --git a/Documentation/thermal/exynos_thermal_emulation b/Documentation/thermal/exynos_thermal_emulation
deleted file mode 100644
index b15efec6ca28..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/thermal/exynos_thermal_emulation
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,53 +0,0 @@
-EXYNOS EMULATION MODE
-========================
-
-Copyright (C) 2012 Samsung Electronics
-
-Written by Jonghwa Lee <jonghwa3.lee@samsung.com>
-
-Description
------------
-
-Exynos 4x12 (4212, 4412) and 5 series provide emulation mode for thermal management unit.
-Thermal emulation mode supports software debug for TMU's operation. User can set temperature
-manually with software code and TMU will read current temperature from user value not from
-sensor's value.
-
-Enabling CONFIG_THERMAL_EMULATION option will make this support available.
-When it's enabled, sysfs node will be created as
-/sys/devices/virtual/thermal/thermal_zone'zone id'/emul_temp.
-
-The sysfs node, 'emul_node', will contain value 0 for the initial state. When you input any
-temperature you want to update to sysfs node, it automatically enable emulation mode and
-current temperature will be changed into it.
-(Exynos also supports user changeable delay time which would be used to delay of
- changing temperature. However, this node only uses same delay of real sensing time, 938us.)
-
-Exynos emulation mode requires synchronous of value changing and enabling. It means when you
-want to update the any value of delay or next temperature, then you have to enable emulation
-mode at the same time. (Or you have to keep the mode enabling.) If you don't, it fails to
-change the value to updated one and just use last succeessful value repeatedly. That's why
-this node gives users the right to change termerpature only. Just one interface makes it more
-simply to use.
-
-Disabling emulation mode only requires writing value 0 to sysfs node.
-
-
-TEMP 120 |
- |
- 100 |
- |
- 80 |
- | +-----------
- 60 | | |
- | +-------------| |
- 40 | | | |
- | | | |
- 20 | | | +----------
- | | | | |
- 0 |______________|_____________|__________|__________|_________
- A A A A TIME
- |<----->| |<----->| |<----->| |
- | 938us | | | | | |
-emulation : 0 50 | 70 | 20 | 0
-current temp : sensor 50 70 20 sensor
diff --git a/Documentation/thermal/exynos_thermal_emulation.rst b/Documentation/thermal/exynos_thermal_emulation.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c21d10838bc5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/thermal/exynos_thermal_emulation.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
+=====================
+Exynos Emulation Mode
+=====================
+
+Copyright (C) 2012 Samsung Electronics
+
+Written by Jonghwa Lee <jonghwa3.lee@samsung.com>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+Exynos 4x12 (4212, 4412) and 5 series provide emulation mode for thermal
+management unit. Thermal emulation mode supports software debug for
+TMU's operation. User can set temperature manually with software code
+and TMU will read current temperature from user value not from sensor's
+value.
+
+Enabling CONFIG_THERMAL_EMULATION option will make this support
+available. When it's enabled, sysfs node will be created as
+/sys/devices/virtual/thermal/thermal_zone'zone id'/emul_temp.
+
+The sysfs node, 'emul_node', will contain value 0 for the initial state.
+When you input any temperature you want to update to sysfs node, it
+automatically enable emulation mode and current temperature will be
+changed into it.
+
+(Exynos also supports user changeable delay time which would be used to
+delay of changing temperature. However, this node only uses same delay
+of real sensing time, 938us.)
+
+Exynos emulation mode requires synchronous of value changing and
+enabling. It means when you want to update the any value of delay or
+next temperature, then you have to enable emulation mode at the same
+time. (Or you have to keep the mode enabling.) If you don't, it fails to
+change the value to updated one and just use last succeessful value
+repeatedly. That's why this node gives users the right to change
+termerpature only. Just one interface makes it more simply to use.
+
+Disabling emulation mode only requires writing value 0 to sysfs node.
+
+::
+
+
+ TEMP 120 |
+ |
+ 100 |
+ |
+ 80 |
+ | +-----------
+ 60 | | |
+ | +-------------| |
+ 40 | | | |
+ | | | |
+ 20 | | | +----------
+ | | | | |
+ 0 |______________|_____________|__________|__________|_________
+ A A A A TIME
+ |<----->| |<----->| |<----->| |
+ | 938us | | | | | |
+ emulation : 0 50 | 70 | 20 | 0
+ current temp: sensor 50 70 20 sensor
diff --git a/Documentation/thermal/index.rst b/Documentation/thermal/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8c1c00146cad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/thermal/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+:orphan:
+
+=======
+Thermal
+=======
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 1
+
+ cpu-cooling-api
+ sysfs-api
+ power_allocator
+
+ exynos_thermal
+ exynos_thermal_emulation
+ intel_powerclamp
+ nouveau_thermal
+ x86_pkg_temperature_thermal
diff --git a/Documentation/thermal/intel_powerclamp.txt b/Documentation/thermal/intel_powerclamp.rst
similarity index 76%
rename from Documentation/thermal/intel_powerclamp.txt
rename to Documentation/thermal/intel_powerclamp.rst
index b5df21168fbc..3f6dfb0b3ea6 100644
--- a/Documentation/thermal/intel_powerclamp.txt
+++ b/Documentation/thermal/intel_powerclamp.rst
@@ -1,10 +1,13 @@
- =======================
- INTEL POWERCLAMP DRIVER
- =======================
-By: Arjan van de Ven <arjan@linux.intel.com>
- Jacob Pan <jacob.jun.pan@linux.intel.com>
+=======================
+Intel Powerclamp Driver
+=======================
+
+By:
+ - Arjan van de Ven <arjan@linux.intel.com>
+ - Jacob Pan <jacob.jun.pan@linux.intel.com>
+
+.. Contents:
-Contents:
(*) Introduction
- Goals and Objectives
@@ -23,7 +26,6 @@ Contents:
- Generic Thermal Layer (sysfs)
- Kernel APIs (TBD)
-============
INTRODUCTION
============
@@ -47,7 +49,6 @@ scalability, and user experience. In many cases, clear advantage is
shown over taking the CPU offline or modulating the CPU clock.
-===================
THEORY OF OPERATION
===================
@@ -57,11 +58,12 @@ Idle Injection
On modern Intel processors (Nehalem or later), package level C-state
residency is available in MSRs, thus also available to the kernel.
-These MSRs are:
- #define MSR_PKG_C2_RESIDENCY 0x60D
- #define MSR_PKG_C3_RESIDENCY 0x3F8
- #define MSR_PKG_C6_RESIDENCY 0x3F9
- #define MSR_PKG_C7_RESIDENCY 0x3FA
+These MSRs are::
+
+ #define MSR_PKG_C2_RESIDENCY 0x60D
+ #define MSR_PKG_C3_RESIDENCY 0x3F8
+ #define MSR_PKG_C6_RESIDENCY 0x3F9
+ #define MSR_PKG_C7_RESIDENCY 0x3FA
If the kernel can also inject idle time to the system, then a
closed-loop control system can be established that manages package
@@ -96,19 +98,21 @@ are not masked. Tests show that the extra wakeups from scheduler tick
have a dramatic impact on the effectiveness of the powerclamp driver
on large scale systems (Westmere system with 80 processors).
-CPU0
- ____________ ____________
-kidle_inject/0 | sleep | mwait | sleep |
- _________| |________| |_______
- duration
-CPU1
- ____________ ____________
-kidle_inject/1 | sleep | mwait | sleep |
- _________| |________| |_______
- ^
- |
- |
- roundup(jiffies, interval)
+::
+
+ CPU0
+ ____________ ____________
+ kidle_inject/0 | sleep | mwait | sleep |
+ _________| |________| |_______
+ duration
+ CPU1
+ ____________ ____________
+ kidle_inject/1 | sleep | mwait | sleep |
+ _________| |________| |_______
+ ^
+ |
+ |
+ roundup(jiffies, interval)
Only one CPU is allowed to collect statistics and update global
control parameters. This CPU is referred to as the controlling CPU in
@@ -148,7 +152,7 @@ b) determine the amount of compensation needed at each target ratio
Compensation to each target ratio consists of two parts:
- a) steady state error compensation
+ a) steady state error compensation
This is to offset the error occurring when the system can
enter idle without extra wakeups (such as external interrupts).
@@ -158,41 +162,42 @@ Compensation to each target ratio consists of two parts:
slowing down CPU activities.
A debugfs file is provided for the user to examine compensation
-progress and results, such as on a Westmere system.
-[jacob@nex01 ~]$ cat
-/sys/kernel/debug/intel_powerclamp/powerclamp_calib
-controlling cpu: 0
-pct confidence steady dynamic (compensation)
-0 0 0 0
-1 1 0 0
-2 1 1 0
-3 3 1 0
-4 3 1 0
-5 3 1 0
-6 3 1 0
-7 3 1 0
-8 3 1 0
-...
-30 3 2 0
-31 3 2 0
-32 3 1 0
-33 3 2 0
-34 3 1 0
-35 3 2 0
-36 3 1 0
-37 3 2 0
-38 3 1 0
-39 3 2 0
-40 3 3 0
-41 3 1 0
-42 3 2 0
-43 3 1 0
-44 3 1 0
-45 3 2 0
-46 3 3 0
-47 3 0 0
-48 3 2 0
-49 3 3 0
+progress and results, such as on a Westmere system::
+
+ [jacob@nex01 ~]$ cat
+ /sys/kernel/debug/intel_powerclamp/powerclamp_calib
+ controlling cpu: 0
+ pct confidence steady dynamic (compensation)
+ 0 0 0 0
+ 1 1 0 0
+ 2 1 1 0
+ 3 3 1 0
+ 4 3 1 0
+ 5 3 1 0
+ 6 3 1 0
+ 7 3 1 0
+ 8 3 1 0
+ ...
+ 30 3 2 0
+ 31 3 2 0
+ 32 3 1 0
+ 33 3 2 0
+ 34 3 1 0
+ 35 3 2 0
+ 36 3 1 0
+ 37 3 2 0
+ 38 3 1 0
+ 39 3 2 0
+ 40 3 3 0
+ 41 3 1 0
+ 42 3 2 0
+ 43 3 1 0
+ 44 3 1 0
+ 45 3 2 0
+ 46 3 3 0
+ 47 3 0 0
+ 48 3 2 0
+ 49 3 3 0
Calibration occurs during runtime. No offline method is available.
Steady state compensation is used only when confidence levels of all
@@ -217,9 +222,8 @@ keeps track of clamping kernel threads, even after they are migrated
to other CPUs, after a CPU offline event.
-=====================
Performance Analysis
-=====================
+====================
This section describes the general performance data collected on
multiple systems, including Westmere (80P) and Ivy Bridge (4P, 8P).
@@ -257,16 +261,15 @@ achieve up to 40% better performance per watt. (measured by a spin
counter summed over per CPU counting threads spawned for all running
CPUs).
-====================
Usage and Interfaces
====================
The powerclamp driver is registered to the generic thermal layer as a
-cooling device. Currently, it’s not bound to any thermal zones.
+cooling device. Currently, it’s not bound to any thermal zones::
-jacob@chromoly:/sys/class/thermal/cooling_device14$ grep . *
-cur_state:0
-max_state:50
-type:intel_powerclamp
+ jacob@chromoly:/sys/class/thermal/cooling_device14$ grep . *
+ cur_state:0
+ max_state:50
+ type:intel_powerclamp
cur_state allows user to set the desired idle percentage. Writing 0 to
cur_state will stop idle injection. Writing a value between 1 and
@@ -278,9 +281,9 @@ cur_state returns value -1 instead of 0 which is to avoid confusing
100% busy state with the disabled state.
Example usage:
-- To inject 25% idle time
-$ sudo sh -c "echo 25 > /sys/class/thermal/cooling_device80/cur_state
-"
+- To inject 25% idle time::
+
+ $ sudo sh -c "echo 25 > /sys/class/thermal/cooling_device80/cur_state
If the system is not busy and has more than 25% idle time already,
then the powerclamp driver will not start idle injection. Using Top
@@ -292,23 +295,23 @@ idle time is accounted as normal idle in that common code path is
taken as the idle task.
In this example, 24.1% idle is shown. This helps the system admin or
-user determine the cause of slowdown, when a powerclamp driver is in action.
+user determine the cause of slowdown, when a powerclamp driver is in action::
-Tasks: 197 total, 1 running, 196 sleeping, 0 stopped, 0 zombie
-Cpu(s): 71.2%us, 4.7%sy, 0.0%ni, 24.1%id, 0.0%wa, 0.0%hi, 0.0%si, 0.0%st
-Mem: 3943228k total, 1689632k used, 2253596k free, 74960k buffers
-Swap: 4087804k total, 0k used, 4087804k free, 945336k cached
+ Tasks: 197 total, 1 running, 196 sleeping, 0 stopped, 0 zombie
+ Cpu(s): 71.2%us, 4.7%sy, 0.0%ni, 24.1%id, 0.0%wa, 0.0%hi, 0.0%si, 0.0%st
+ Mem: 3943228k total, 1689632k used, 2253596k free, 74960k buffers
+ Swap: 4087804k total, 0k used, 4087804k free, 945336k cached
- PID USER PR NI VIRT RES SHR S %CPU %MEM TIME+ COMMAND
- 3352 jacob 20 0 262m 644 428 S 286 0.0 0:17.16 spin
- 3341 root -51 0 0 0 0 D 25 0.0 0:01.62 kidle_inject/0
- 3344 root -51 0 0 0 0 D 25 0.0 0:01.60 kidle_inject/3
- 3342 root -51 0 0 0 0 D 25 0.0 0:01.61 kidle_inject/1
- 3343 root -51 0 0 0 0 D 25 0.0 0:01.60 kidle_inject/2
- 2935 jacob 20 0 696m 125m 35m S 5 3.3 0:31.11 firefox
- 1546 root 20 0 158m 20m 6640 S 3 0.5 0:26.97 Xorg
- 2100 jacob 20 0 1223m 88m 30m S 3 2.3 0:23.68 compiz
+ PID USER PR NI VIRT RES SHR S %CPU %MEM TIME+ COMMAND
+ 3352 jacob 20 0 262m 644 428 S 286 0.0 0:17.16 spin
+ 3341 root -51 0 0 0 0 D 25 0.0 0:01.62 kidle_inject/0
+ 3344 root -51 0 0 0 0 D 25 0.0 0:01.60 kidle_inject/3
+ 3342 root -51 0 0 0 0 D 25 0.0 0:01.61 kidle_inject/1
+ 3343 root -51 0 0 0 0 D 25 0.0 0:01.60 kidle_inject/2
+ 2935 jacob 20 0 696m 125m 35m S 5 3.3 0:31.11 firefox
+ 1546 root 20 0 158m 20m 6640 S 3 0.5 0:26.97 Xorg
+ 2100 jacob 20 0 1223m 88m 30m S 3 2.3 0:23.68 compiz
Tests have shown that by using the powerclamp driver as a cooling
device, a PID based userspace thermal controller can manage to
diff --git a/Documentation/thermal/nouveau_thermal b/Documentation/thermal/nouveau_thermal.rst
similarity index 64%
rename from Documentation/thermal/nouveau_thermal
rename to Documentation/thermal/nouveau_thermal.rst
index 6e17a11efcb0..37255fd6735d 100644
--- a/Documentation/thermal/nouveau_thermal
+++ b/Documentation/thermal/nouveau_thermal.rst
@@ -1,13 +1,15 @@
+=====================
Kernel driver nouveau
-===================
+=====================
Supported chips:
+
* NV43+
Authors: Martin Peres (mupuf) <martin.peres@free.fr>
Description
----------
+-----------
This driver allows to read the GPU core temperature, drive the GPU fan and
set temperature alarms.
@@ -19,20 +21,25 @@ interface is likely not to work. This document may then not cover your situation
entirely.
Temperature management
---------------------
+----------------------
Temperature is exposed under as a read-only HWMON attribute temp1_input.
In order to protect the GPU from overheating, Nouveau supports 4 configurable
temperature thresholds:
- * Fan_boost: Fan speed is set to 100% when reaching this temperature;
- * Downclock: The GPU will be downclocked to reduce its power dissipation;
- * Critical: The GPU is put on hold to further lower power dissipation;
- * Shutdown: Shut the computer down to protect your GPU.
+ * Fan_boost:
+ Fan speed is set to 100% when reaching this temperature;
+ * Downclock:
+ The GPU will be downclocked to reduce its power dissipation;
+ * Critical:
+ The GPU is put on hold to further lower power dissipation;
+ * Shutdown:
+ Shut the computer down to protect your GPU.
-WARNING: Some of these thresholds may not be used by Nouveau depending
-on your chipset.
+WARNING:
+ Some of these thresholds may not be used by Nouveau depending
+ on your chipset.
The default value for these thresholds comes from the GPU's vbios. These
thresholds can be configured thanks to the following HWMON attributes:
@@ -46,19 +53,24 @@ NOTE: Remember that the values are stored as milli degrees Celsius. Don't forget
to multiply!
Fan management
-------------
+--------------
Not all cards have a drivable fan. If you do, then the following HWMON
attributes should be available:
- * pwm1_enable: Current fan management mode (NONE, MANUAL or AUTO);
- * pwm1: Current PWM value (power percentage);
- * pwm1_min: The minimum PWM speed allowed;
- * pwm1_max: The maximum PWM speed allowed (bypassed when hitting Fan_boost);
+ * pwm1_enable:
+ Current fan management mode (NONE, MANUAL or AUTO);
+ * pwm1:
+ Current PWM value (power percentage);
+ * pwm1_min:
+ The minimum PWM speed allowed;
+ * pwm1_max:
+ The maximum PWM speed allowed (bypassed when hitting Fan_boost);
You may also have the following attribute:
- * fan1_input: Speed in RPM of your fan.
+ * fan1_input:
+ Speed in RPM of your fan.
Your fan can be driven in different modes:
@@ -66,14 +78,16 @@ Your fan can be driven in different modes:
* 1: The fan can be driven in manual (use pwm1 to change the speed);
* 2; The fan is driven automatically depending on the temperature.
-NOTE: Be sure to use the manual mode if you want to drive the fan speed manually
+NOTE:
+ Be sure to use the manual mode if you want to drive the fan speed manually
-NOTE2: When operating in manual mode outside the vbios-defined
-[PWM_min, PWM_max] range, the reported fan speed (RPM) may not be accurate
-depending on your hardware.
+NOTE2:
+ When operating in manual mode outside the vbios-defined
+ [PWM_min, PWM_max] range, the reported fan speed (RPM) may not be accurate
+ depending on your hardware.
Bug reports
----------
+-----------
Thermal management on Nouveau is new and may not work on all cards. If you have
inquiries, please ping mupuf on IRC (#nouveau, freenode).
diff --git a/Documentation/thermal/power_allocator.txt b/Documentation/thermal/power_allocator.rst
similarity index 74%
rename from Documentation/thermal/power_allocator.txt
rename to Documentation/thermal/power_allocator.rst
index 9fb0ff06dca9..67b6a3297238 100644
--- a/Documentation/thermal/power_allocator.txt
+++ b/Documentation/thermal/power_allocator.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+=================================
Power allocator governor tunables
=================================
@@ -25,36 +26,36 @@ temperature as the control input and power as the controlled output:
P_max = k_p * e + k_i * err_integral + k_d * diff_err + sustainable_power
where
- e = desired_temperature - current_temperature
- err_integral is the sum of previous errors
- diff_err = e - previous_error
+ - e = desired_temperature - current_temperature
+ - err_integral is the sum of previous errors
+ - diff_err = e - previous_error
-It is similar to the one depicted below:
+It is similar to the one depicted below::
- k_d
- |
-current_temp |
- | v
- | +----------+ +---+
- | +----->| diff_err |-->| X |------+
- | | +----------+ +---+ |
- | | | tdp actor
- | | k_i | | get_requested_power()
- | | | | | | |
- | | | | | | | ...
- v | v v v v v
- +---+ | +-------+ +---+ +---+ +---+ +----------+
- | S |-------+----->| sum e |----->| X |--->| S |-->| S |-->|power |
- +---+ | +-------+ +---+ +---+ +---+ |allocation|
- ^ | ^ +----------+
- | | | | |
- | | +---+ | | |
- | +------->| X |-------------------+ v v
- | +---+ granted performance
-desired_temperature ^
- |
- |
- k_po/k_pu
+ k_d
+ |
+ current_temp |
+ | v
+ | +----------+ +---+
+ | +----->| diff_err |-->| X |------+
+ | | +----------+ +---+ |
+ | | | tdp actor
+ | | k_i | | get_requested_power()
+ | | | | | | |
+ | | | | | | | ...
+ v | v v v v v
+ +---+ | +-------+ +---+ +---+ +---+ +----------+
+ | S |-----+----->| sum e |----->| X |--->| S |-->| S |-->|power |
+ +---+ | +-------+ +---+ +---+ +---+ |allocation|
+ ^ | ^ +----------+
+ | | | | |
+ | | +---+ | | |
+ | +------->| X |-------------------+ v v
+ | +---+ granted performance
+ desired_temperature ^
+ |
+ |
+ k_po/k_pu
Sustainable power
-----------------
@@ -73,7 +74,7 @@ is typically 2000mW, while on a 10" tablet is around 4500mW (may vary
depending on screen size).
If you are using device tree, do add it as a property of the
-thermal-zone. For example:
+thermal-zone. For example::
thermal-zones {
soc_thermal {
@@ -85,7 +86,7 @@ thermal-zone. For example:
Instead, if the thermal zone is registered from the platform code, pass a
`thermal_zone_params` that has a `sustainable_power`. If no
`thermal_zone_params` were being passed, then something like below
-will suffice:
+will suffice::
static const struct thermal_zone_params tz_params = {
.sustainable_power = 3500,
@@ -112,18 +113,18 @@ available capacity at a low temperature. On the other hand, a high
value of `k_pu` will result in the governor granting very high power
while temperature is low, and may lead to temperature overshooting.
-The default value for `k_pu` is:
+The default value for `k_pu` is::
2 * sustainable_power / (desired_temperature - switch_on_temp)
This means that at `switch_on_temp` the output of the controller's
proportional term will be 2 * `sustainable_power`. The default value
-for `k_po` is:
+for `k_po` is::
sustainable_power / (desired_temperature - switch_on_temp)
Focusing on the proportional and feed forward values of the PID
-controller equation we have:
+controller equation we have::
P_max = k_p * e + sustainable_power
@@ -134,21 +135,23 @@ is the desired one, then the proportional component is zero and
thermal equilibrium under constant load. `sustainable_power` is only
an estimate, which is the reason for closed-loop control such as this.
-Expanding `k_pu` we get:
+Expanding `k_pu` we get::
+
P_max = 2 * sustainable_power * (T_set - T) / (T_set - T_on) +
- sustainable_power
+ sustainable_power
-where
- T_set is the desired temperature
- T is the current temperature
- T_on is the switch on temperature
+where:
+
+ - T_set is the desired temperature
+ - T is the current temperature
+ - T_on is the switch on temperature
When the current temperature is the switch_on temperature, the above
-formula becomes:
+formula becomes::
P_max = 2 * sustainable_power * (T_set - T_on) / (T_set - T_on) +
- sustainable_power = 2 * sustainable_power + sustainable_power =
- 3 * sustainable_power
+ sustainable_power = 2 * sustainable_power + sustainable_power =
+ 3 * sustainable_power
Therefore, the proportional term alone linearly decreases power from
3 * `sustainable_power` to `sustainable_power` as the temperature
@@ -178,11 +181,18 @@ Cooling device power API
Cooling devices controlled by this governor must supply the additional
"power" API in their `cooling_device_ops`. It consists on three ops:
-1. int get_requested_power(struct thermal_cooling_device *cdev,
- struct thermal_zone_device *tz, u32 *power);
-@cdev: The `struct thermal_cooling_device` pointer
-@tz: thermal zone in which we are currently operating
-@power: pointer in which to store the calculated power
+1. ::
+
+ int get_requested_power(struct thermal_cooling_device *cdev,
+ struct thermal_zone_device *tz, u32 *power);
+
+
+@cdev:
+ The `struct thermal_cooling_device` pointer
+@tz:
+ thermal zone in which we are currently operating
+@power:
+ pointer in which to store the calculated power
`get_requested_power()` calculates the power requested by the device
in milliwatts and stores it in @power . It should return 0 on
@@ -190,23 +200,37 @@ success, -E* on failure. This is currently used by the power
allocator governor to calculate how much power to give to each cooling
device.
-2. int state2power(struct thermal_cooling_device *cdev, struct
- thermal_zone_device *tz, unsigned long state, u32 *power);
-@cdev: The `struct thermal_cooling_device` pointer
-@tz: thermal zone in which we are currently operating
-@state: A cooling device state
-@power: pointer in which to store the equivalent power
+2. ::
+
+ int state2power(struct thermal_cooling_device *cdev, struct
+ thermal_zone_device *tz, unsigned long state,
+ u32 *power);
+
+@cdev:
+ The `struct thermal_cooling_device` pointer
+@tz:
+ thermal zone in which we are currently operating
+@state:
+ A cooling device state
+@power:
+ pointer in which to store the equivalent power
Convert cooling device state @state into power consumption in
milliwatts and store it in @power. It should return 0 on success, -E*
on failure. This is currently used by thermal core to calculate the
maximum power that an actor can consume.
-3. int power2state(struct thermal_cooling_device *cdev, u32 power,
- unsigned long *state);
-@cdev: The `struct thermal_cooling_device` pointer
-@power: power in milliwatts
-@state: pointer in which to store the resulting state
+3. ::
+
+ int power2state(struct thermal_cooling_device *cdev, u32 power,
+ unsigned long *state);
+
+@cdev:
+ The `struct thermal_cooling_device` pointer
+@power:
+ power in milliwatts
+@state:
+ pointer in which to store the resulting state
Calculate a cooling device state that would make the device consume at
most @power mW and store it in @state. It should return 0 on success,
diff --git a/Documentation/thermal/sysfs-api.txt b/Documentation/thermal/sysfs-api.rst
similarity index 66%
rename from Documentation/thermal/sysfs-api.txt
rename to Documentation/thermal/sysfs-api.rst
index c3fa500df92c..e4930761d3e5 100644
--- a/Documentation/thermal/sysfs-api.txt
+++ b/Documentation/thermal/sysfs-api.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+===================================
Generic Thermal Sysfs driver How To
===================================
@@ -9,6 +10,7 @@ Copyright (c) 2008 Intel Corporation
0. Introduction
+===============
The generic thermal sysfs provides a set of interfaces for thermal zone
devices (sensors) and thermal cooling devices (fan, processor...) to register
@@ -25,59 +27,90 @@ An intelligent thermal management application can make decisions based on
inputs from thermal zone attributes (the current temperature and trip point
temperature) and throttle appropriate devices.
-[0-*] denotes any positive number starting from 0
-[1-*] denotes any positive number starting from 1
+- `[0-*]` denotes any positive number starting from 0
+- `[1-*]` denotes any positive number starting from 1
1. thermal sysfs driver interface functions
+===========================================
1.1 thermal zone device interface
-1.1.1 struct thermal_zone_device *thermal_zone_device_register(char *type,
- int trips, int mask, void *devdata,
- struct thermal_zone_device_ops *ops,
- const struct thermal_zone_params *tzp,
- int passive_delay, int polling_delay))
+---------------------------------
+
+ ::
+
+ struct thermal_zone_device
+ *thermal_zone_device_register(char *type,
+ int trips, int mask, void *devdata,
+ struct thermal_zone_device_ops *ops,
+ const struct thermal_zone_params *tzp,
+ int passive_delay, int polling_delay))
This interface function adds a new thermal zone device (sensor) to
- /sys/class/thermal folder as thermal_zone[0-*]. It tries to bind all the
+ /sys/class/thermal folder as `thermal_zone[0-*]`. It tries to bind all the
thermal cooling devices registered at the same time.
- type: the thermal zone type.
- trips: the total number of trip points this thermal zone supports.
- mask: Bit string: If 'n'th bit is set, then trip point 'n' is writeable.
- devdata: device private data
- ops: thermal zone device call-backs.
- .bind: bind the thermal zone device with a thermal cooling device.
- .unbind: unbind the thermal zone device with a thermal cooling device.
- .get_temp: get the current temperature of the thermal zone.
- .set_trips: set the trip points window. Whenever the current temperature
+ type:
+ the thermal zone type.
+ trips:
+ the total number of trip points this thermal zone supports.
+ mask:
+ Bit string: If 'n'th bit is set, then trip point 'n' is writeable.
+ devdata:
+ device private data
+ ops:
+ thermal zone device call-backs.
+
+ .bind:
+ bind the thermal zone device with a thermal cooling device.
+ .unbind:
+ unbind the thermal zone device with a thermal cooling device.
+ .get_temp:
+ get the current temperature of the thermal zone.
+ .set_trips:
+ set the trip points window. Whenever the current temperature
is updated, the trip points immediately below and above the
current temperature are found.
- .get_mode: get the current mode (enabled/disabled) of the thermal zone.
- - "enabled" means the kernel thermal management is enabled.
- - "disabled" will prevent kernel thermal driver action upon trip points
- so that user applications can take charge of thermal management.
- .set_mode: set the mode (enabled/disabled) of the thermal zone.
- .get_trip_type: get the type of certain trip point.
- .get_trip_temp: get the temperature above which the certain trip point
+ .get_mode:
+ get the current mode (enabled/disabled) of the thermal zone.
+
+ - "enabled" means the kernel thermal management is
+ enabled.
+ - "disabled" will prevent kernel thermal driver action
+ upon trip points so that user applications can take
+ charge of thermal management.
+ .set_mode:
+ set the mode (enabled/disabled) of the thermal zone.
+ .get_trip_type:
+ get the type of certain trip point.
+ .get_trip_temp:
+ get the temperature above which the certain trip point
will be fired.
- .set_emul_temp: set the emulation temperature which helps in debugging
+ .set_emul_temp:
+ set the emulation temperature which helps in debugging
different threshold temperature points.
- tzp: thermal zone platform parameters.
- passive_delay: number of milliseconds to wait between polls when
+ tzp:
+ thermal zone platform parameters.
+ passive_delay:
+ number of milliseconds to wait between polls when
performing passive cooling.
- polling_delay: number of milliseconds to wait between polls when checking
+ polling_delay:
+ number of milliseconds to wait between polls when checking
whether trip points have been crossed (0 for interrupt driven systems).
+ ::
-1.1.2 void thermal_zone_device_unregister(struct thermal_zone_device *tz)
+ void thermal_zone_device_unregister(struct thermal_zone_device *tz)
This interface function removes the thermal zone device.
It deletes the corresponding entry from /sys/class/thermal folder and
unbinds all the thermal cooling devices it uses.
-1.1.3 struct thermal_zone_device *thermal_zone_of_sensor_register(
- struct device *dev, int sensor_id, void *data,
- const struct thermal_zone_of_device_ops *ops)
+ ::
+
+ struct thermal_zone_device
+ *thermal_zone_of_sensor_register(struct device *dev, int sensor_id,
+ void *data,
+ const struct thermal_zone_of_device_ops *ops)
This interface adds a new sensor to a DT thermal zone.
This function will search the list of thermal zones described in
@@ -87,25 +120,33 @@ temperature) and throttle appropriate devices.
thermal zone device.
The parameters for this interface are:
- dev: Device node of sensor containing valid node pointer in
+
+ dev:
+ Device node of sensor containing valid node pointer in
dev->of_node.
- sensor_id: a sensor identifier, in case the sensor IP has more
+ sensor_id:
+ a sensor identifier, in case the sensor IP has more
than one sensors
- data: a private pointer (owned by the caller) that will be
+ data:
+ a private pointer (owned by the caller) that will be
passed back, when a temperature reading is needed.
- ops: struct thermal_zone_of_device_ops *.
+ ops:
+ `struct thermal_zone_of_device_ops *`.
- get_temp: a pointer to a function that reads the
+ ============== =======================================
+ get_temp a pointer to a function that reads the
sensor temperature. This is mandatory
callback provided by sensor driver.
- set_trips: a pointer to a function that sets a
+ set_trips a pointer to a function that sets a
temperature window. When this window is
left the driver must inform the thermal
core via thermal_zone_device_update.
- get_trend: a pointer to a function that reads the
+ get_trend a pointer to a function that reads the
sensor temperature trend.
- set_emul_temp: a pointer to a function that sets
+ set_emul_temp a pointer to a function that sets
sensor emulated temperature.
+ ============== =======================================
+
The thermal zone temperature is provided by the get_temp() function
pointer of thermal_zone_of_device_ops. When called, it will
have the private pointer @data back.
@@ -114,8 +155,10 @@ temperature) and throttle appropriate devices.
handle. Caller should check the return handle with IS_ERR() for finding
whether success or not.
-1.1.4 void thermal_zone_of_sensor_unregister(struct device *dev,
- struct thermal_zone_device *tzd)
+ ::
+
+ void thermal_zone_of_sensor_unregister(struct device *dev,
+ struct thermal_zone_device *tzd)
This interface unregisters a sensor from a DT thermal zone which was
successfully added by interface thermal_zone_of_sensor_register().
@@ -124,21 +167,29 @@ temperature) and throttle appropriate devices.
interface. It will also silent the zone by remove the .get_temp() and
get_trend() thermal zone device callbacks.
-1.1.5 struct thermal_zone_device *devm_thermal_zone_of_sensor_register(
- struct device *dev, int sensor_id,
- void *data, const struct thermal_zone_of_device_ops *ops)
+ ::
+
+ struct thermal_zone_device
+ *devm_thermal_zone_of_sensor_register(struct device *dev,
+ int sensor_id,
+ void *data,
+ const struct thermal_zone_of_device_ops *ops)
This interface is resource managed version of
thermal_zone_of_sensor_register().
+
All details of thermal_zone_of_sensor_register() described in
section 1.1.3 is applicable here.
+
The benefit of using this interface to register sensor is that it
is not require to explicitly call thermal_zone_of_sensor_unregister()
in error path or during driver unbinding as this is done by driver
resource manager.
-1.1.6 void devm_thermal_zone_of_sensor_unregister(struct device *dev,
- struct thermal_zone_device *tzd)
+ ::
+
+ void devm_thermal_zone_of_sensor_unregister(struct device *dev,
+ struct thermal_zone_device *tzd)
This interface is resource managed version of
thermal_zone_of_sensor_unregister().
@@ -147,123 +198,186 @@ temperature) and throttle appropriate devices.
Normally this function will not need to be called and the resource
management code will ensure that the resource is freed.
-1.1.7 int thermal_zone_get_slope(struct thermal_zone_device *tz)
+ ::
+
+ int thermal_zone_get_slope(struct thermal_zone_device *tz)
This interface is used to read the slope attribute value
for the thermal zone device, which might be useful for platform
drivers for temperature calculations.
-1.1.8 int thermal_zone_get_offset(struct thermal_zone_device *tz)
+ ::
+
+ int thermal_zone_get_offset(struct thermal_zone_device *tz)
This interface is used to read the offset attribute value
for the thermal zone device, which might be useful for platform
drivers for temperature calculations.
1.2 thermal cooling device interface
-1.2.1 struct thermal_cooling_device *thermal_cooling_device_register(char *name,
- void *devdata, struct thermal_cooling_device_ops *)
+------------------------------------
+
+
+ ::
+
+ struct thermal_cooling_device
+ *thermal_cooling_device_register(char *name,
+ void *devdata, struct thermal_cooling_device_ops *)
This interface function adds a new thermal cooling device (fan/processor/...)
- to /sys/class/thermal/ folder as cooling_device[0-*]. It tries to bind itself
+ to /sys/class/thermal/ folder as `cooling_device[0-*]`. It tries to bind itself
to all the thermal zone devices registered at the same time.
- name: the cooling device name.
- devdata: device private data.
- ops: thermal cooling devices call-backs.
- .get_max_state: get the Maximum throttle state of the cooling device.
- .get_cur_state: get the Currently requested throttle state of the cooling device.
- .set_cur_state: set the Current throttle state of the cooling device.
-
-1.2.2 void thermal_cooling_device_unregister(struct thermal_cooling_device *cdev)
+
+ name:
+ the cooling device name.
+ devdata:
+ device private data.
+ ops:
+ thermal cooling devices call-backs.
+
+ .get_max_state:
+ get the Maximum throttle state of the cooling device.
+ .get_cur_state:
+ get the Currently requested throttle state of the
+ cooling device.
+ .set_cur_state:
+ set the Current throttle state of the cooling device.
+
+ ::
+
+ void thermal_cooling_device_unregister(struct thermal_cooling_device *cdev)
This interface function removes the thermal cooling device.
It deletes the corresponding entry from /sys/class/thermal folder and
unbinds itself from all the thermal zone devices using it.
1.3 interface for binding a thermal zone device with a thermal cooling device
-1.3.1 int thermal_zone_bind_cooling_device(struct thermal_zone_device *tz,
- int trip, struct thermal_cooling_device *cdev,
- unsigned long upper, unsigned long lower, unsigned int weight);
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+ ::
+
+ int thermal_zone_bind_cooling_device(struct thermal_zone_device *tz,
+ int trip, struct thermal_cooling_device *cdev,
+ unsigned long upper, unsigned long lower, unsigned int weight);
This interface function binds a thermal cooling device to a particular trip
point of a thermal zone device.
+
This function is usually called in the thermal zone device .bind callback.
- tz: the thermal zone device
- cdev: thermal cooling device
- trip: indicates which trip point in this thermal zone the cooling device
- is associated with.
- upper:the Maximum cooling state for this trip point.
- THERMAL_NO_LIMIT means no upper limit,
+
+ tz:
+ the thermal zone device
+ cdev:
+ thermal cooling device
+ trip:
+ indicates which trip point in this thermal zone the cooling device
+ is associated with.
+ upper:
+ the Maximum cooling state for this trip point.
+ THERMAL_NO_LIMIT means no upper limit,
and the cooling device can be in max_state.
- lower:the Minimum cooling state can be used for this trip point.
- THERMAL_NO_LIMIT means no lower limit,
+ lower:
+ the Minimum cooling state can be used for this trip point.
+ THERMAL_NO_LIMIT means no lower limit,
and the cooling device can be in cooling state 0.
- weight: the influence of this cooling device in this thermal
- zone. See 1.4.1 below for more information.
+ weight:
+ the influence of this cooling device in this thermal
+ zone. See 1.4.1 below for more information.
-1.3.2 int thermal_zone_unbind_cooling_device(struct thermal_zone_device *tz,
- int trip, struct thermal_cooling_device *cdev);
+ ::
+
+ int thermal_zone_unbind_cooling_device(struct thermal_zone_device *tz,
+ int trip, struct thermal_cooling_device *cdev);
This interface function unbinds a thermal cooling device from a particular
trip point of a thermal zone device. This function is usually called in
the thermal zone device .unbind callback.
- tz: the thermal zone device
- cdev: thermal cooling device
- trip: indicates which trip point in this thermal zone the cooling device
- is associated with.
+
+ tz:
+ the thermal zone device
+ cdev:
+ thermal cooling device
+ trip:
+ indicates which trip point in this thermal zone the cooling device
+ is associated with.
1.4 Thermal Zone Parameters
-1.4.1 struct thermal_bind_params
+---------------------------
+
+ ::
+
+ struct thermal_bind_params
+
This structure defines the following parameters that are used to bind
a zone with a cooling device for a particular trip point.
- .cdev: The cooling device pointer
- .weight: The 'influence' of a particular cooling device on this
- zone. This is relative to the rest of the cooling
- devices. For example, if all cooling devices have a
- weight of 1, then they all contribute the same. You can
- use percentages if you want, but it's not mandatory. A
- weight of 0 means that this cooling device doesn't
- contribute to the cooling of this zone unless all cooling
- devices have a weight of 0. If all weights are 0, then
- they all contribute the same.
- .trip_mask:This is a bit mask that gives the binding relation between
- this thermal zone and cdev, for a particular trip point.
- If nth bit is set, then the cdev and thermal zone are bound
- for trip point n.
- .binding_limits: This is an array of cooling state limits. Must have
- exactly 2 * thermal_zone.number_of_trip_points. It is an
- array consisting of tuples <lower-state upper-state> of
- state limits. Each trip will be associated with one state
- limit tuple when binding. A NULL pointer means
- <THERMAL_NO_LIMITS THERMAL_NO_LIMITS> on all trips.
- These limits are used when binding a cdev to a trip point.
- .match: This call back returns success(0) if the 'tz and cdev' need to
+
+ .cdev:
+ The cooling device pointer
+ .weight:
+ The 'influence' of a particular cooling device on this
+ zone. This is relative to the rest of the cooling
+ devices. For example, if all cooling devices have a
+ weight of 1, then they all contribute the same. You can
+ use percentages if you want, but it's not mandatory. A
+ weight of 0 means that this cooling device doesn't
+ contribute to the cooling of this zone unless all cooling
+ devices have a weight of 0. If all weights are 0, then
+ they all contribute the same.
+ .trip_mask:
+ This is a bit mask that gives the binding relation between
+ this thermal zone and cdev, for a particular trip point.
+ If nth bit is set, then the cdev and thermal zone are bound
+ for trip point n.
+ .binding_limits:
+ This is an array of cooling state limits. Must have
+ exactly 2 * thermal_zone.number_of_trip_points. It is an
+ array consisting of tuples <lower-state upper-state> of
+ state limits. Each trip will be associated with one state
+ limit tuple when binding. A NULL pointer means
+ <THERMAL_NO_LIMITS THERMAL_NO_LIMITS> on all trips.
+ These limits are used when binding a cdev to a trip point.
+ .match:
+ This call back returns success(0) if the 'tz and cdev' need to
be bound, as per platform data.
-1.4.2 struct thermal_zone_params
+
+ ::
+
+ struct thermal_zone_params
+
This structure defines the platform level parameters for a thermal zone.
This data, for each thermal zone should come from the platform layer.
This is an optional feature where some platforms can choose not to
provide this data.
- .governor_name: Name of the thermal governor used for this zone
- .no_hwmon: a boolean to indicate if the thermal to hwmon sysfs interface
- is required. when no_hwmon == false, a hwmon sysfs interface
- will be created. when no_hwmon == true, nothing will be done.
- In case the thermal_zone_params is NULL, the hwmon interface
- will be created (for backward compatibility).
- .num_tbps: Number of thermal_bind_params entries for this zone
- .tbp: thermal_bind_params entries
+
+ .governor_name:
+ Name of the thermal governor used for this zone
+ .no_hwmon:
+ a boolean to indicate if the thermal to hwmon sysfs interface
+ is required. when no_hwmon == false, a hwmon sysfs interface
+ will be created. when no_hwmon == true, nothing will be done.
+ In case the thermal_zone_params is NULL, the hwmon interface
+ will be created (for backward compatibility).
+ .num_tbps:
+ Number of thermal_bind_params entries for this zone
+ .tbp:
+ thermal_bind_params entries
2. sysfs attributes structure
+=============================
+== ================
RO read only value
WO write only value
RW read/write value
+== ================
Thermal sysfs attributes will be represented under /sys/class/thermal.
Hwmon sysfs I/F extension is also available under /sys/class/hwmon
if hwmon is compiled in or built as a module.
-Thermal zone device sys I/F, created once it's registered:
-/sys/class/thermal/thermal_zone[0-*]:
+Thermal zone device sys I/F, created once it's registered::
+
+ /sys/class/thermal/thermal_zone[0-*]:
|---type: Type of the thermal zone
|---temp: Current temperature
|---mode: Working mode of the thermal zone
@@ -282,8 +396,9 @@ Thermal zone device sys I/F, created once it's registered:
|---slope: Slope constant applied as linear extrapolation
|---offset: Offset constant applied as linear extrapolation
-Thermal cooling device sys I/F, created once it's registered:
-/sys/class/thermal/cooling_device[0-*]:
+Thermal cooling device sys I/F, created once it's registered::
+
+ /sys/class/thermal/cooling_device[0-*]:
|---type: Type of the cooling device(processor/fan/...)
|---max_state: Maximum cooling state of the cooling device
|---cur_state: Current cooling state of the cooling device
@@ -299,11 +414,13 @@ the relationship between a thermal zone and its associated cooling device.
They are created/removed for each successful execution of
thermal_zone_bind_cooling_device/thermal_zone_unbind_cooling_device.
-/sys/class/thermal/thermal_zone[0-*]:
+::
+
+ /sys/class/thermal/thermal_zone[0-*]:
|---cdev[0-*]: [0-*]th cooling device in current thermal zone
|---cdev[0-*]_trip_point: Trip point that cdev[0-*] is associated with
|---cdev[0-*]_weight: Influence of the cooling device in
- this thermal zone
+ this thermal zone
Besides the thermal zone device sysfs I/F and cooling device sysfs I/F,
the generic thermal driver also creates a hwmon sysfs I/F for each _type_
@@ -311,16 +428,17 @@ of thermal zone device. E.g. the generic thermal driver registers one hwmon
class device and build the associated hwmon sysfs I/F for all the registered
ACPI thermal zones.
-/sys/class/hwmon/hwmon[0-*]:
+::
+
+ /sys/class/hwmon/hwmon[0-*]:
|---name: The type of the thermal zone devices
|---temp[1-*]_input: The current temperature of thermal zone [1-*]
|---temp[1-*]_critical: The critical trip point of thermal zone [1-*]
Please read Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface.rst for additional information.
-***************************
-* Thermal zone attributes *
-***************************
+Thermal zone attributes
+-----------------------
type
Strings which represent the thermal zone type.
@@ -340,54 +458,67 @@ mode
This file gives information about the algorithm that is currently
managing the thermal zone. It can be either default kernel based
algorithm or user space application.
- enabled = enable Kernel Thermal management.
- disabled = Preventing kernel thermal zone driver actions upon
+
+ enabled
+ enable Kernel Thermal management.
+ disabled
+ Preventing kernel thermal zone driver actions upon
trip points so that user application can take full
charge of the thermal management.
+
RW, Optional
policy
One of the various thermal governors used for a particular zone.
+
RW, Required
available_policies
Available thermal governors which can be used for a particular zone.
+
RO, Required
-trip_point_[0-*]_temp
+`trip_point_[0-*]_temp`
The temperature above which trip point will be fired.
+
Unit: millidegree Celsius
+
RO, Optional
-trip_point_[0-*]_type
+`trip_point_[0-*]_type`
Strings which indicate the type of the trip point.
- E.g. it can be one of critical, hot, passive, active[0-*] for ACPI
+
+ E.g. it can be one of critical, hot, passive, `active[0-*]` for ACPI
thermal zone.
+
RO, Optional
-trip_point_[0-*]_hyst
+`trip_point_[0-*]_hyst`
The hysteresis value for a trip point, represented as an integer
Unit: Celsius
RW, Optional
-cdev[0-*]
+`cdev[0-*]`
Sysfs link to the thermal cooling device node where the sys I/F
for cooling device throttling control represents.
+
RO, Optional
-cdev[0-*]_trip_point
- The trip point in this thermal zone which cdev[0-*] is associated
+`cdev[0-*]_trip_point`
+ The trip point in this thermal zone which `cdev[0-*]` is associated
with; -1 means the cooling device is not associated with any trip
point.
+
RO, Optional
-cdev[0-*]_weight
- The influence of cdev[0-*] in this thermal zone. This value
- is relative to the rest of cooling devices in the thermal
- zone. For example, if a cooling device has a weight double
- than that of other, it's twice as effective in cooling the
- thermal zone.
- RW, Optional
+`cdev[0-*]_weight`
+ The influence of `cdev[0-*]` in this thermal zone. This value
+ is relative to the rest of cooling devices in the thermal
+ zone. For example, if a cooling device has a weight double
+ than that of other, it's twice as effective in cooling the
+ thermal zone.
+
+ RW, Optional
passive
Attribute is only present for zones in which the passive cooling
@@ -395,8 +526,11 @@ passive
and can be set to a temperature (in millidegrees) to enable a
passive trip point for the zone. Activation is done by polling with
an interval of 1 second.
+
Unit: millidegrees Celsius
+
Valid values: 0 (disabled) or greater than 1000
+
RW, Optional
emul_temp
@@ -407,17 +541,21 @@ emul_temp
threshold and its associated cooling action. This is write only node
and writing 0 on this node should disable emulation.
Unit: millidegree Celsius
+
WO, Optional
- WARNING: Be careful while enabling this option on production systems,
- because userland can easily disable the thermal policy by simply
- flooding this sysfs node with low temperature values.
+ WARNING:
+ Be careful while enabling this option on production systems,
+ because userland can easily disable the thermal policy by simply
+ flooding this sysfs node with low temperature values.
sustainable_power
An estimate of the sustained power that can be dissipated by
the thermal zone. Used by the power allocator governor. For
- more information see Documentation/thermal/power_allocator.txt
+ more information see Documentation/thermal/power_allocator.rst
+
Unit: milliwatts
+
RW, Optional
k_po
@@ -425,7 +563,8 @@ k_po
controller during temperature overshoot. Temperature overshoot
is when the current temperature is above the "desired
temperature" trip point. For more information see
- Documentation/thermal/power_allocator.txt
+ Documentation/thermal/power_allocator.rst
+
RW, Optional
k_pu
@@ -433,20 +572,23 @@ k_pu
controller during temperature undershoot. Temperature undershoot
is when the current temperature is below the "desired
temperature" trip point. For more information see
- Documentation/thermal/power_allocator.txt
+ Documentation/thermal/power_allocator.rst
+
RW, Optional
k_i
The integral term of the power allocator governor's PID
controller. This term allows the PID controller to compensate
for long term drift. For more information see
- Documentation/thermal/power_allocator.txt
+ Documentation/thermal/power_allocator.rst
+
RW, Optional
k_d
The derivative term of the power allocator governor's PID
controller. For more information see
- Documentation/thermal/power_allocator.txt
+ Documentation/thermal/power_allocator.rst
+
RW, Optional
integral_cutoff
@@ -456,8 +598,10 @@ integral_cutoff
example, if integral_cutoff is 0, then the integral term only
accumulates error when temperature is above the desired
temperature trip point. For more information see
- Documentation/thermal/power_allocator.txt
+ Documentation/thermal/power_allocator.rst
+
Unit: millidegree Celsius
+
RW, Optional
slope
@@ -465,6 +609,7 @@ slope
to determine a hotspot temperature based off the sensor's
raw readings. It is up to the device driver to determine
the usage of these values.
+
RW, Optional
offset
@@ -472,28 +617,33 @@ offset
to determine a hotspot temperature based off the sensor's
raw readings. It is up to the device driver to determine
the usage of these values.
+
RW, Optional
-*****************************
-* Cooling device attributes *
-*****************************
+Cooling device attributes
+-------------------------
type
String which represents the type of device, e.g:
+
- for generic ACPI: should be "Fan", "Processor" or "LCD"
- for memory controller device on intel_menlow platform:
should be "Memory controller".
+
RO, Required
max_state
The maximum permissible cooling state of this cooling device.
+
RO, Required
cur_state
The current cooling state of this cooling device.
The value can any integer numbers between 0 and max_state:
+
- cur_state == 0 means no cooling
- cur_state == max_state means the maximum cooling.
+
RW, Required
stats/reset
@@ -508,9 +658,11 @@ stats/time_in_state_ms:
units here is 10mS (similar to other time exported in /proc).
RO, Required
+
stats/total_trans:
A single positive value showing the total number of times the state of a
cooling device is changed.
+
RO, Required
stats/trans_table:
@@ -522,6 +674,7 @@ stats/trans_table:
RO, Required
3. A simple implementation
+==========================
ACPI thermal zone may support multiple trip points like critical, hot,
passive, active. If an ACPI thermal zone supports critical, passive,
@@ -532,11 +685,10 @@ thermal_cooling_device. Both are considered to have the same
effectiveness in cooling the thermal zone.
If the processor is listed in _PSL method, and the fan is listed in _AL0
-method, the sys I/F structure will be built like this:
+method, the sys I/F structure will be built like this::
-/sys/class/thermal:
-
-|thermal_zone1:
+ /sys/class/thermal:
+ |thermal_zone1:
|---type: acpitz
|---temp: 37000
|---mode: enabled
@@ -557,24 +709,24 @@ method, the sys I/F structure will be built like this:
|---cdev1_trip_point: 2 /* cdev1 can be used for active[0]*/
|---cdev1_weight: 1024
-|cooling_device0:
+ |cooling_device0:
|---type: Processor
|---max_state: 8
|---cur_state: 0
-|cooling_device3:
+ |cooling_device3:
|---type: Fan
|---max_state: 2
|---cur_state: 0
-/sys/class/hwmon:
-
-|hwmon0:
+ /sys/class/hwmon:
+ |hwmon0:
|---name: acpitz
|---temp1_input: 37000
|---temp1_crit: 100000
4. Event Notification
+=====================
The framework includes a simple notification mechanism, in the form of a
netlink event. Netlink socket initialization is done during the _init_
@@ -587,21 +739,28 @@ event will be one of:{THERMAL_AUX0, THERMAL_AUX1, THERMAL_CRITICAL,
THERMAL_DEV_FAULT}. Notification can be sent when the current temperature
crosses any of the configured thresholds.
-5. Export Symbol APIs:
+5. Export Symbol APIs
+=====================
+
+5.1. get_tz_trend
+-----------------
-5.1: get_tz_trend:
This function returns the trend of a thermal zone, i.e the rate of change
of temperature of the thermal zone. Ideally, the thermal sensor drivers
are supposed to implement the callback. If they don't, the thermal
framework calculated the trend by comparing the previous and the current
temperature values.
-5.2:get_thermal_instance:
+5.2. get_thermal_instance
+-------------------------
+
This function returns the thermal_instance corresponding to a given
{thermal_zone, cooling_device, trip_point} combination. Returns NULL
if such an instance does not exist.
-5.3:thermal_notify_framework:
+5.3. thermal_notify_framework
+-----------------------------
+
This function handles the trip events from sensor drivers. It starts
throttling the cooling devices according to the policy configured.
For CRITICAL and HOT trip points, this notifies the respective drivers,
@@ -609,12 +768,15 @@ and does actual throttling for other trip points i.e ACTIVE and PASSIVE.
The throttling policy is based on the configured platform data; if no
platform data is provided, this uses the step_wise throttling policy.
-5.4:thermal_cdev_update:
+5.4. thermal_cdev_update
+------------------------
+
This function serves as an arbitrator to set the state of a cooling
device. It sets the cooling device to the deepest cooling state if
possible.
-6. thermal_emergency_poweroff:
+6. thermal_emergency_poweroff
+=============================
On an event of critical trip temperature crossing. Thermal framework
allows the system to shutdown gracefully by calling orderly_poweroff().
diff --git a/Documentation/thermal/x86_pkg_temperature_thermal b/Documentation/thermal/x86_pkg_temperature_thermal.rst
similarity index 80%
rename from Documentation/thermal/x86_pkg_temperature_thermal
rename to Documentation/thermal/x86_pkg_temperature_thermal.rst
index 17a3a4c0a0ca..f134dbd3f5a9 100644
--- a/Documentation/thermal/x86_pkg_temperature_thermal
+++ b/Documentation/thermal/x86_pkg_temperature_thermal.rst
@@ -1,19 +1,23 @@
+===================================
Kernel driver: x86_pkg_temp_thermal
-===================
+===================================
Supported chips:
+
* x86: with package level thermal management
+
(Verify using: CPUID.06H:EAX[bit 6] =1)
Authors: Srinivas Pandruvada <srinivas.pandruvada@linux.intel.com>
Reference
----
+---------
+
Intel® 64 and IA-32 Architectures Software Developer’s Manual (Jan, 2013):
Chapter 14.6: PACKAGE LEVEL THERMAL MANAGEMENT
Description
----------
+-----------
This driver register CPU digital temperature package level sensor as a thermal
zone with maximum two user mode configurable trip points. Number of trip points
@@ -25,23 +29,27 @@ take any action to control temperature.
Threshold management
--------------------
Each package will register as a thermal zone under /sys/class/thermal.
-Example:
-/sys/class/thermal/thermal_zone1
+
+Example::
+
+ /sys/class/thermal/thermal_zone1
This contains two trip points:
+
- trip_point_0_temp
- trip_point_1_temp
User can set any temperature between 0 to TJ-Max temperature. Temperature units
-are in milli-degree Celsius. Refer to "Documentation/thermal/sysfs-api.txt" for
+are in milli-degree Celsius. Refer to "Documentation/thermal/sysfs-api.rst" for
thermal sys-fs details.
Any value other than 0 in these trip points, can trigger thermal notifications.
Setting 0, stops sending thermal notifications.
-Thermal notifications: To get kobject-uevent notifications, set the thermal zone
-policy to "user_space". For example: echo -n "user_space" > policy
-
-
+Thermal notifications:
+To get kobject-uevent notifications, set the thermal zone
+policy to "user_space".
+For example::
+ echo -n "user_space" > policy
diff --git a/MAINTAINERS b/MAINTAINERS
index 8aa3d0bd5b80..85648a944446 100644
--- a/MAINTAINERS
+++ b/MAINTAINERS
@@ -15762,7 +15762,7 @@ M: Viresh Kumar <viresh.kumar@linaro.org>
M: Javi Merino <javi.merino@kernel.org>
L: linux-pm@vger.kernel.org
S: Supported
-F: Documentation/thermal/cpu-cooling-api.txt
+F: Documentation/thermal/cpu-cooling-api.rst
F: drivers/thermal/cpu_cooling.c
F: include/linux/cpu_cooling.h
diff --git a/include/linux/thermal.h b/include/linux/thermal.h
index 15a4ca5d7099..681047f8cc05 100644
--- a/include/linux/thermal.h
+++ b/include/linux/thermal.h
@@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ struct thermal_bind_params {
* platform characterization. This value is relative to the
* rest of the weights so a cooling device whose weight is
* double that of another cooling device is twice as
- * effective. See Documentation/thermal/sysfs-api.txt for more
+ * effective. See Documentation/thermal/sysfs-api.rst for more
* information.
*/
int weight;
@@ -259,7 +259,7 @@ struct thermal_bind_params {
/*
* This is a bit mask that gives the binding relation between this
* thermal zone and cdev, for a particular trip point.
- * See Documentation/thermal/sysfs-api.txt for more information.
+ * See Documentation/thermal/sysfs-api.rst for more information.
*/
int trip_mask;
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related
* [PATCH 37/43] docs: blockdev: convert to ReST
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-28 12:20 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet, Jens Axboe, Jiri Kosina, Minchan Kim,
Nitin Gupta, Sergey Senozhatsky, Shuah Khan, linux-block,
linux-kselftest
In-Reply-To: <cover.1561723979.git.mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
Rename the blockdev documentation files to ReST, add an
index for them and adjust in order to produce a nice html
output via the Sphinx build system.
The drbd sub-directory contains some graphs and data flows.
Add those too to the documentation.
At its new index.rst, let's add a :orphan: while this is not linked to
the main index.rst file, in order to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
.../admin-guide/kernel-parameters.txt | 18 +-
...structure-v9.txt => data-structure-v9.rst} | 6 +-
Documentation/blockdev/drbd/figures.rst | 28 +++
.../blockdev/drbd/{README.txt => index.rst} | 15 +-
.../blockdev/{floppy.txt => floppy.rst} | 88 ++++----
Documentation/blockdev/index.rst | 16 ++
Documentation/blockdev/{nbd.txt => nbd.rst} | 2 +-
.../blockdev/{paride.txt => paride.rst} | 194 +++++++++--------
.../blockdev/{ramdisk.txt => ramdisk.rst} | 55 ++---
Documentation/blockdev/{zram.txt => zram.rst} | 195 ++++++++++++------
MAINTAINERS | 8 +-
drivers/block/Kconfig | 8 +-
drivers/block/floppy.c | 2 +-
drivers/block/zram/Kconfig | 6 +-
tools/testing/selftests/zram/README | 2 +-
15 files changed, 398 insertions(+), 245 deletions(-)
rename Documentation/blockdev/drbd/{data-structure-v9.txt => data-structure-v9.rst} (94%)
create mode 100644 Documentation/blockdev/drbd/figures.rst
rename Documentation/blockdev/drbd/{README.txt => index.rst} (55%)
rename Documentation/blockdev/{floppy.txt => floppy.rst} (81%)
create mode 100644 Documentation/blockdev/index.rst
rename Documentation/blockdev/{nbd.txt => nbd.rst} (96%)
rename Documentation/blockdev/{paride.txt => paride.rst} (81%)
rename Documentation/blockdev/{ramdisk.txt => ramdisk.rst} (84%)
rename Documentation/blockdev/{zram.txt => zram.rst} (76%)
diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.txt
index 92d335837c52..7ed94527a4a0 100644
--- a/Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.txt
+++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.txt
@@ -1249,7 +1249,7 @@
See also Documentation/fault-injection/.
floppy= [HW]
- See Documentation/blockdev/floppy.txt.
+ See Documentation/blockdev/floppy.rst.
force_pal_cache_flush
[IA-64] Avoid check_sal_cache_flush which may hang on
@@ -2247,7 +2247,7 @@
memblock=debug [KNL] Enable memblock debug messages.
load_ramdisk= [RAM] List of ramdisks to load from floppy
- See Documentation/blockdev/ramdisk.txt.
+ See Documentation/blockdev/ramdisk.rst.
lockd.nlm_grace_period=P [NFS] Assign grace period.
Format: <integer>
@@ -3294,7 +3294,7 @@
pcd. [PARIDE]
See header of drivers/block/paride/pcd.c.
- See also Documentation/blockdev/paride.txt.
+ See also Documentation/blockdev/paride.rst.
pci=option[,option...] [PCI] various PCI subsystem options.
@@ -3538,7 +3538,7 @@
needed on a platform with proper driver support.
pd. [PARIDE]
- See Documentation/blockdev/paride.txt.
+ See Documentation/blockdev/paride.rst.
pdcchassis= [PARISC,HW] Disable/Enable PDC Chassis Status codes at
boot time.
@@ -3553,10 +3553,10 @@
and performance comparison.
pf. [PARIDE]
- See Documentation/blockdev/paride.txt.
+ See Documentation/blockdev/paride.rst.
pg. [PARIDE]
- See Documentation/blockdev/paride.txt.
+ See Documentation/blockdev/paride.rst.
pirq= [SMP,APIC] Manual mp-table setup
See Documentation/x86/i386/IO-APIC.rst.
@@ -3668,7 +3668,7 @@
prompt_ramdisk= [RAM] List of RAM disks to prompt for floppy disk
before loading.
- See Documentation/blockdev/ramdisk.txt.
+ See Documentation/blockdev/ramdisk.rst.
psi= [KNL] Enable or disable pressure stall information
tracking.
@@ -3690,7 +3690,7 @@
pstore.backend= Specify the name of the pstore backend to use
pt. [PARIDE]
- See Documentation/blockdev/paride.txt.
+ See Documentation/blockdev/paride.rst.
pti= [X86_64] Control Page Table Isolation of user and
kernel address spaces. Disabling this feature
@@ -3719,7 +3719,7 @@
See Documentation/admin-guide/md.rst.
ramdisk_size= [RAM] Sizes of RAM disks in kilobytes
- See Documentation/blockdev/ramdisk.txt.
+ See Documentation/blockdev/ramdisk.rst.
random.trust_cpu={on,off}
[KNL] Enable or disable trusting the use of the
diff --git a/Documentation/blockdev/drbd/data-structure-v9.txt b/Documentation/blockdev/drbd/data-structure-v9.rst
similarity index 94%
rename from Documentation/blockdev/drbd/data-structure-v9.txt
rename to Documentation/blockdev/drbd/data-structure-v9.rst
index 1e52a0e32624..66036b901644 100644
--- a/Documentation/blockdev/drbd/data-structure-v9.txt
+++ b/Documentation/blockdev/drbd/data-structure-v9.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+================================
+kernel data structure for DRBD-9
+================================
+
This describes the in kernel data structure for DRBD-9. Starting with
Linux v3.14 we are reorganizing DRBD to use this data structure.
@@ -10,7 +14,7 @@ device is represented by a block device locally.
The DRBD objects are interconnected to form a matrix as depicted below; a
drbd_peer_device object sits at each intersection between a drbd_device and a
-drbd_connection:
+drbd_connection::
/--------------+---------------+.....+---------------\
| resource | device | | device |
diff --git a/Documentation/blockdev/drbd/figures.rst b/Documentation/blockdev/drbd/figures.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3e3fd4b8a478
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/blockdev/drbd/figures.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+.. The here included files are intended to help understand the implementation
+
+Data flows that Relate some functions, and write packets
+========================================================
+
+.. kernel-figure:: DRBD-8.3-data-packets.svg
+ :alt: DRBD-8.3-data-packets.svg
+ :align: center
+
+.. kernel-figure:: DRBD-data-packets.svg
+ :alt: DRBD-data-packets.svg
+ :align: center
+
+
+Sub graphs of DRBD's state transitions
+======================================
+
+.. kernel-figure:: conn-states-8.dot
+ :alt: conn-states-8.dot
+ :align: center
+
+.. kernel-figure:: disk-states-8.dot
+ :alt: disk-states-8.dot
+ :align: center
+
+.. kernel-figure:: node-states-8.dot
+ :alt: node-states-8.dot
+ :align: center
diff --git a/Documentation/blockdev/drbd/README.txt b/Documentation/blockdev/drbd/index.rst
similarity index 55%
rename from Documentation/blockdev/drbd/README.txt
rename to Documentation/blockdev/drbd/index.rst
index 627b0a1bf35e..68ecd5c113e9 100644
--- a/Documentation/blockdev/drbd/README.txt
+++ b/Documentation/blockdev/drbd/index.rst
@@ -1,4 +1,9 @@
+==========================================
+Distributed Replicated Block Device - DRBD
+==========================================
+
Description
+===========
DRBD is a shared-nothing, synchronously replicated block device. It
is designed to serve as a building block for high availability
@@ -7,10 +12,8 @@ Description
Please visit http://www.drbd.org to find out more.
-The here included files are intended to help understand the implementation
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 1
-DRBD-8.3-data-packets.svg, DRBD-data-packets.svg
- relates some functions, and write packets.
-
-conn-states-8.dot, disk-states-8.dot, node-states-8.dot
- The sub graphs of DRBD's state transitions
+ data-structure-v9
+ figures
diff --git a/Documentation/blockdev/floppy.txt b/Documentation/blockdev/floppy.rst
similarity index 81%
rename from Documentation/blockdev/floppy.txt
rename to Documentation/blockdev/floppy.rst
index e2240f5ab64d..4a8f31cf4139 100644
--- a/Documentation/blockdev/floppy.txt
+++ b/Documentation/blockdev/floppy.rst
@@ -1,35 +1,37 @@
-This file describes the floppy driver.
+=============
+Floppy Driver
+=============
FAQ list:
=========
- A FAQ list may be found in the fdutils package (see below), and also
+A FAQ list may be found in the fdutils package (see below), and also
at <http://fdutils.linux.lu/faq.html>.
LILO configuration options (Thinkpad users, read this)
======================================================
- The floppy driver is configured using the 'floppy=' option in
+The floppy driver is configured using the 'floppy=' option in
lilo. This option can be typed at the boot prompt, or entered in the
lilo configuration file.
- Example: If your kernel is called linux-2.6.9, type the following line
-at the lilo boot prompt (if you have a thinkpad):
+Example: If your kernel is called linux-2.6.9, type the following line
+at the lilo boot prompt (if you have a thinkpad)::
linux-2.6.9 floppy=thinkpad
You may also enter the following line in /etc/lilo.conf, in the description
-of linux-2.6.9:
+of linux-2.6.9::
append = "floppy=thinkpad"
- Several floppy related options may be given, example:
+Several floppy related options may be given, example::
linux-2.6.9 floppy=daring floppy=two_fdc
append = "floppy=daring floppy=two_fdc"
- If you give options both in the lilo config file and on the boot
+If you give options both in the lilo config file and on the boot
prompt, the option strings of both places are concatenated, the boot
prompt options coming last. That's why there are also options to
restore the default behavior.
@@ -38,21 +40,23 @@ restore the default behavior.
Module configuration options
============================
- If you use the floppy driver as a module, use the following syntax:
-modprobe floppy floppy="<options>"
+If you use the floppy driver as a module, use the following syntax::
-Example:
- modprobe floppy floppy="omnibook messages"
+ modprobe floppy floppy="<options>"
- If you need certain options enabled every time you load the floppy driver,
-you can put:
+Example::
- options floppy floppy="omnibook messages"
+ modprobe floppy floppy="omnibook messages"
+
+If you need certain options enabled every time you load the floppy driver,
+you can put::
+
+ options floppy floppy="omnibook messages"
in a configuration file in /etc/modprobe.d/.
- The floppy driver related options are:
+The floppy driver related options are:
floppy=asus_pci
Sets the bit mask to allow only units 0 and 1. (default)
@@ -70,8 +74,7 @@ in a configuration file in /etc/modprobe.d/.
Tells the floppy driver that you have only one floppy controller.
(default)
- floppy=two_fdc
- floppy=<address>,two_fdc
+ floppy=two_fdc / floppy=<address>,two_fdc
Tells the floppy driver that you have two floppy controllers.
The second floppy controller is assumed to be at <address>.
This option is not needed if the second controller is at address
@@ -84,8 +87,7 @@ in a configuration file in /etc/modprobe.d/.
floppy=0,thinkpad
Tells the floppy driver that you don't have a Thinkpad.
- floppy=omnibook
- floppy=nodma
+ floppy=omnibook / floppy=nodma
Tells the floppy driver not to use Dma for data transfers.
This is needed on HP Omnibooks, which don't have a workable
DMA channel for the floppy driver. This option is also useful
@@ -144,14 +146,16 @@ in a configuration file in /etc/modprobe.d/.
described in the physical CMOS), or if your BIOS uses
non-standard CMOS types. The CMOS types are:
- 0 - Use the value of the physical CMOS
- 1 - 5 1/4 DD
- 2 - 5 1/4 HD
- 3 - 3 1/2 DD
- 4 - 3 1/2 HD
- 5 - 3 1/2 ED
- 6 - 3 1/2 ED
- 16 - unknown or not installed
+ == ==================================
+ 0 Use the value of the physical CMOS
+ 1 5 1/4 DD
+ 2 5 1/4 HD
+ 3 3 1/2 DD
+ 4 3 1/2 HD
+ 5 3 1/2 ED
+ 6 3 1/2 ED
+ 16 unknown or not installed
+ == ==================================
(Note: there are two valid types for ED drives. This is because 5 was
initially chosen to represent floppy *tapes*, and 6 for ED drives.
@@ -162,8 +166,7 @@ in a configuration file in /etc/modprobe.d/.
Print a warning message when an unexpected interrupt is received.
(default)
- floppy=no_unexpected_interrupts
- floppy=L40SX
+ floppy=no_unexpected_interrupts / floppy=L40SX
Don't print a message when an unexpected interrupt is received. This
is needed on IBM L40SX laptops in certain video modes. (There seems
to be an interaction between video and floppy. The unexpected
@@ -199,47 +202,54 @@ in a configuration file in /etc/modprobe.d/.
Sets the floppy DMA channel to <nr> instead of 2.
floppy=slow
- Use PS/2 stepping rate:
- " PS/2 floppies have much slower step rates than regular floppies.
+ Use PS/2 stepping rate::
+
+ PS/2 floppies have much slower step rates than regular floppies.
It's been recommended that take about 1/4 of the default speed
- in some more extreme cases."
+ in some more extreme cases.
Supporting utilities and additional documentation:
==================================================
- Additional parameters of the floppy driver can be configured at
+Additional parameters of the floppy driver can be configured at
runtime. Utilities which do this can be found in the fdutils package.
This package also contains a new version of mtools which allows to
access high capacity disks (up to 1992K on a high density 3 1/2 disk!).
It also contains additional documentation about the floppy driver.
The latest version can be found at fdutils homepage:
+
http://fdutils.linux.lu
The fdutils releases can be found at:
+
http://fdutils.linux.lu/download.html
+
http://www.tux.org/pub/knaff/fdutils/
+
ftp://metalab.unc.edu/pub/Linux/utils/disk-management/
Reporting problems about the floppy driver
==========================================
- If you have a question or a bug report about the floppy driver, mail
+If you have a question or a bug report about the floppy driver, mail
me at Alain.Knaff@poboxes.com . If you post to Usenet, preferably use
comp.os.linux.hardware. As the volume in these groups is rather high,
be sure to include the word "floppy" (or "FLOPPY") in the subject
line. If the reported problem happens when mounting floppy disks, be
sure to mention also the type of the filesystem in the subject line.
- Be sure to read the FAQ before mailing/posting any bug reports!
+Be sure to read the FAQ before mailing/posting any bug reports!
- Alain
+Alain
Changelog
=========
-10-30-2004 : Cleanup, updating, add reference to module configuration.
+10-30-2004 :
+ Cleanup, updating, add reference to module configuration.
James Nelson <james4765@gmail.com>
-6-3-2000 : Original Document
+6-3-2000 :
+ Original Document
diff --git a/Documentation/blockdev/index.rst b/Documentation/blockdev/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a9af6ed8b4aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/blockdev/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+:orphan:
+
+===========================
+The Linux RapidIO Subsystem
+===========================
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 1
+
+ floppy
+ nbd
+ paride
+ ramdisk
+ zram
+
+ drbd/index
diff --git a/Documentation/blockdev/nbd.txt b/Documentation/blockdev/nbd.rst
similarity index 96%
rename from Documentation/blockdev/nbd.txt
rename to Documentation/blockdev/nbd.rst
index db242ea2bce8..d78dfe559dcf 100644
--- a/Documentation/blockdev/nbd.txt
+++ b/Documentation/blockdev/nbd.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+==================================
Network Block Device (TCP version)
==================================
@@ -28,4 +29,3 @@ max_part
nbds_max
Number of block devices that should be initialized (default: 16).
-
diff --git a/Documentation/blockdev/paride.txt b/Documentation/blockdev/paride.rst
similarity index 81%
rename from Documentation/blockdev/paride.txt
rename to Documentation/blockdev/paride.rst
index ee6717e3771d..87b4278bf314 100644
--- a/Documentation/blockdev/paride.txt
+++ b/Documentation/blockdev/paride.rst
@@ -1,15 +1,17 @@
-
- Linux and parallel port IDE devices
+===================================
+Linux and parallel port IDE devices
+===================================
PARIDE v1.03 (c) 1997-8 Grant Guenther <grant@torque.net>
1. Introduction
+===============
Owing to the simplicity and near universality of the parallel port interface
to personal computers, many external devices such as portable hard-disk,
CD-ROM, LS-120 and tape drives use the parallel port to connect to their
host computer. While some devices (notably scanners) use ad-hoc methods
-to pass commands and data through the parallel port interface, most
+to pass commands and data through the parallel port interface, most
external devices are actually identical to an internal model, but with
a parallel-port adapter chip added in. Some of the original parallel port
adapters were little more than mechanisms for multiplexing a SCSI bus.
@@ -28,47 +30,50 @@ were to open up a parallel port CD-ROM drive, for instance, one would
find a standard ATAPI CD-ROM drive, a power supply, and a single adapter
that interconnected a standard PC parallel port cable and a standard
IDE cable. It is usually possible to exchange the CD-ROM device with
-any other device using the IDE interface.
+any other device using the IDE interface.
The document describes the support in Linux for parallel port IDE
devices. It does not cover parallel port SCSI devices, "ditto" tape
-drives or scanners. Many different devices are supported by the
+drives or scanners. Many different devices are supported by the
parallel port IDE subsystem, including:
- MicroSolutions backpack CD-ROM
- MicroSolutions backpack PD/CD
- MicroSolutions backpack hard-drives
- MicroSolutions backpack 8000t tape drive
- SyQuest EZ-135, EZ-230 & SparQ drives
- Avatar Shark
- Imation Superdisk LS-120
- Maxell Superdisk LS-120
- FreeCom Power CD
- Hewlett-Packard 5GB and 8GB tape drives
- Hewlett-Packard 7100 and 7200 CD-RW drives
+ - MicroSolutions backpack CD-ROM
+ - MicroSolutions backpack PD/CD
+ - MicroSolutions backpack hard-drives
+ - MicroSolutions backpack 8000t tape drive
+ - SyQuest EZ-135, EZ-230 & SparQ drives
+ - Avatar Shark
+ - Imation Superdisk LS-120
+ - Maxell Superdisk LS-120
+ - FreeCom Power CD
+ - Hewlett-Packard 5GB and 8GB tape drives
+ - Hewlett-Packard 7100 and 7200 CD-RW drives
as well as most of the clone and no-name products on the market.
To support such a wide range of devices, PARIDE, the parallel port IDE
subsystem, is actually structured in three parts. There is a base
paride module which provides a registry and some common methods for
-accessing the parallel ports. The second component is a set of
-high-level drivers for each of the different types of supported devices:
+accessing the parallel ports. The second component is a set of
+high-level drivers for each of the different types of supported devices:
+ === =============
pd IDE disk
pcd ATAPI CD-ROM
pf ATAPI disk
pt ATAPI tape
pg ATAPI generic
+ === =============
(Currently, the pg driver is only used with CD-R drives).
The high-level drivers function according to the relevant standards.
The third component of PARIDE is a set of low-level protocol drivers
for each of the parallel port IDE adapter chips. Thanks to the interest
-and encouragement of Linux users from many parts of the world,
+and encouragement of Linux users from many parts of the world,
support is available for almost all known adapter protocols:
+ ==== ====================================== ====
aten ATEN EH-100 (HK)
bpck Microsolutions backpack (US)
comm DataStor (old-type) "commuter" adapter (TW)
@@ -83,9 +88,11 @@ support is available for almost all known adapter protocols:
ktti KT Technology PHd adapter (SG)
on20 OnSpec 90c20 (US)
on26 OnSpec 90c26 (US)
+ ==== ====================================== ====
2. Using the PARIDE subsystem
+=============================
While configuring the Linux kernel, you may choose either to build
the PARIDE drivers into your kernel, or to build them as modules.
@@ -94,10 +101,10 @@ In either case, you will need to select "Parallel port IDE device support"
as well as at least one of the high-level drivers and at least one
of the parallel port communication protocols. If you do not know
what kind of parallel port adapter is used in your drive, you could
-begin by checking the file names and any text files on your DOS
+begin by checking the file names and any text files on your DOS
installation floppy. Alternatively, you can look at the markings on
the adapter chip itself. That's usually sufficient to identify the
-correct device.
+correct device.
You can actually select all the protocol modules, and allow the PARIDE
subsystem to try them all for you.
@@ -105,8 +112,9 @@ subsystem to try them all for you.
For the "brand-name" products listed above, here are the protocol
and high-level drivers that you would use:
+ ================ ============ ====== ========
Manufacturer Model Driver Protocol
-
+ ================ ============ ====== ========
MicroSolutions CD-ROM pcd bpck
MicroSolutions PD drive pf bpck
MicroSolutions hard-drive pd bpck
@@ -119,8 +127,10 @@ and high-level drivers that you would use:
Hewlett-Packard 5GB Tape pt epat
Hewlett-Packard 7200e (CD) pcd epat
Hewlett-Packard 7200e (CD-R) pg epat
+ ================ ============ ====== ========
2.1 Configuring built-in drivers
+---------------------------------
We recommend that you get to know how the drivers work and how to
configure them as loadable modules, before attempting to compile a
@@ -143,7 +153,7 @@ protocol identification number and, for some devices, the drive's
chain ID. While your system is booting, a number of messages are
displayed on the console. Like all such messages, they can be
reviewed with the 'dmesg' command. Among those messages will be
-some lines like:
+some lines like::
paride: bpck registered as protocol 0
paride: epat registered as protocol 1
@@ -158,10 +168,10 @@ the last two digits of the drive's serial number (but read MicroSolutions'
documentation about this).
As an example, let's assume that you have a MicroSolutions PD/CD drive
-with unit ID number 36 connected to the parallel port at 0x378, a SyQuest
-EZ-135 connected to the chained port on the PD/CD drive and also an
-Imation Superdisk connected to port 0x278. You could give the following
-options on your boot command:
+with unit ID number 36 connected to the parallel port at 0x378, a SyQuest
+EZ-135 connected to the chained port on the PD/CD drive and also an
+Imation Superdisk connected to port 0x278. You could give the following
+options on your boot command::
pd.drive0=0x378,1 pf.drive0=0x278,1 pf.drive1=0x378,0,36
@@ -169,24 +179,27 @@ In the last option, pf.drive1 configures device /dev/pf1, the 0x378
is the parallel port base address, the 0 is the protocol registration
number and 36 is the chain ID.
-Please note: while PARIDE will work both with and without the
+Please note: while PARIDE will work both with and without the
PARPORT parallel port sharing system that is included by the
"Parallel port support" option, PARPORT must be included and enabled
if you want to use chains of devices on the same parallel port.
2.2 Loading and configuring PARIDE as modules
+----------------------------------------------
It is much faster and simpler to get to understand the PARIDE drivers
-if you use them as loadable kernel modules.
+if you use them as loadable kernel modules.
-Note 1: using these drivers with the "kerneld" automatic module loading
-system is not recommended for beginners, and is not documented here.
+Note 1:
+ using these drivers with the "kerneld" automatic module loading
+ system is not recommended for beginners, and is not documented here.
-Note 2: if you build PARPORT support as a loadable module, PARIDE must
-also be built as loadable modules, and PARPORT must be loaded before the
-PARIDE modules.
+Note 2:
+ if you build PARPORT support as a loadable module, PARIDE must
+ also be built as loadable modules, and PARPORT must be loaded before
+ the PARIDE modules.
-To use PARIDE, you must begin by
+To use PARIDE, you must begin by::
insmod paride
@@ -195,8 +208,8 @@ among other tasks.
Then, load as many of the protocol modules as you think you might need.
As you load each module, it will register the protocols that it supports,
-and print a log message to your kernel log file and your console. For
-example:
+and print a log message to your kernel log file and your console. For
+example::
# insmod epat
paride: epat registered as protocol 0
@@ -205,22 +218,22 @@ example:
paride: k971 registered as protocol 2
Finally, you can load high-level drivers for each kind of device that
-you have connected. By default, each driver will autoprobe for a single
+you have connected. By default, each driver will autoprobe for a single
device, but you can support up to four similar devices by giving their
individual co-ordinates when you load the driver.
For example, if you had two no-name CD-ROM drives both using the
KingByte KBIC-951A adapter, one on port 0x378 and the other on 0x3bc
-you could give the following command:
+you could give the following command::
# insmod pcd drive0=0x378,1 drive1=0x3bc,1
For most adapters, giving a port address and protocol number is sufficient,
-but check the source files in linux/drivers/block/paride for more
+but check the source files in linux/drivers/block/paride for more
information. (Hopefully someone will write some man pages one day !).
As another example, here's what happens when PARPORT is installed, and
-a SyQuest EZ-135 is attached to port 0x378:
+a SyQuest EZ-135 is attached to port 0x378::
# insmod paride
paride: version 1.0 installed
@@ -237,46 +250,47 @@ Note that the last line is the output from the generic partition table
scanner - in this case it reports that it has found a disk with one partition.
2.3 Using a PARIDE device
+--------------------------
Once the drivers have been loaded, you can access PARIDE devices in the
same way as their traditional counterparts. You will probably need to
create the device "special files". Here is a simple script that you can
-cut to a file and execute:
+cut to a file and execute::
-#!/bin/bash
-#
-# mkd -- a script to create the device special files for the PARIDE subsystem
-#
-function mkdev {
- mknod $1 $2 $3 $4 ; chmod 0660 $1 ; chown root:disk $1
-}
-#
-function pd {
- D=$( printf \\$( printf "x%03x" $[ $1 + 97 ] ) )
- mkdev pd$D b 45 $[ $1 * 16 ]
- for P in 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
- do mkdev pd$D$P b 45 $[ $1 * 16 + $P ]
- done
-}
-#
-cd /dev
-#
-for u in 0 1 2 3 ; do pd $u ; done
-for u in 0 1 2 3 ; do mkdev pcd$u b 46 $u ; done
-for u in 0 1 2 3 ; do mkdev pf$u b 47 $u ; done
-for u in 0 1 2 3 ; do mkdev pt$u c 96 $u ; done
-for u in 0 1 2 3 ; do mkdev npt$u c 96 $[ $u + 128 ] ; done
-for u in 0 1 2 3 ; do mkdev pg$u c 97 $u ; done
-#
-# end of mkd
+ #!/bin/bash
+ #
+ # mkd -- a script to create the device special files for the PARIDE subsystem
+ #
+ function mkdev {
+ mknod $1 $2 $3 $4 ; chmod 0660 $1 ; chown root:disk $1
+ }
+ #
+ function pd {
+ D=$( printf \\$( printf "x%03x" $[ $1 + 97 ] ) )
+ mkdev pd$D b 45 $[ $1 * 16 ]
+ for P in 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
+ do mkdev pd$D$P b 45 $[ $1 * 16 + $P ]
+ done
+ }
+ #
+ cd /dev
+ #
+ for u in 0 1 2 3 ; do pd $u ; done
+ for u in 0 1 2 3 ; do mkdev pcd$u b 46 $u ; done
+ for u in 0 1 2 3 ; do mkdev pf$u b 47 $u ; done
+ for u in 0 1 2 3 ; do mkdev pt$u c 96 $u ; done
+ for u in 0 1 2 3 ; do mkdev npt$u c 96 $[ $u + 128 ] ; done
+ for u in 0 1 2 3 ; do mkdev pg$u c 97 $u ; done
+ #
+ # end of mkd
With the device files and drivers in place, you can access PARIDE devices
-like any other Linux device. For example, to mount a CD-ROM in pcd0, use:
+like any other Linux device. For example, to mount a CD-ROM in pcd0, use::
mount /dev/pcd0 /cdrom
If you have a fresh Avatar Shark cartridge, and the drive is pda, you
-might do something like:
+might do something like::
fdisk /dev/pda -- make a new partition table with
partition 1 of type 83
@@ -289,41 +303,46 @@ might do something like:
Devices like the Imation superdisk work in the same way, except that
they do not have a partition table. For example to make a 120MB
-floppy that you could share with a DOS system:
+floppy that you could share with a DOS system::
mkdosfs /dev/pf0
mount /dev/pf0 /mnt
2.4 The pf driver
+------------------
The pf driver is intended for use with parallel port ATAPI disk
devices. The most common devices in this category are PD drives
and LS-120 drives. Traditionally, media for these devices are not
partitioned. Consequently, the pf driver does not support partitioned
-media. This may be changed in a future version of the driver.
+media. This may be changed in a future version of the driver.
2.5 Using the pt driver
+------------------------
The pt driver for parallel port ATAPI tape drives is a minimal driver.
-It does not yet support many of the standard tape ioctl operations.
+It does not yet support many of the standard tape ioctl operations.
For best performance, a block size of 32KB should be used. You will
probably want to set the parallel port delay to 0, if you can.
2.6 Using the pg driver
+------------------------
The pg driver can be used in conjunction with the cdrecord program
to create CD-ROMs. Please get cdrecord version 1.6.1 or later
-from ftp://ftp.fokus.gmd.de/pub/unix/cdrecord/ . To record CD-R media
-your parallel port should ideally be set to EPP mode, and the "port delay"
-should be set to 0. With those settings it is possible to record at 2x
+from ftp://ftp.fokus.gmd.de/pub/unix/cdrecord/ . To record CD-R media
+your parallel port should ideally be set to EPP mode, and the "port delay"
+should be set to 0. With those settings it is possible to record at 2x
speed without any buffer underruns. If you cannot get the driver to work
in EPP mode, try to use "bidirectional" or "PS/2" mode and 1x speeds only.
3. Troubleshooting
+==================
3.1 Use EPP mode if you can
+----------------------------
The most common problems that people report with the PARIDE drivers
concern the parallel port CMOS settings. At this time, none of the
@@ -332,6 +351,7 @@ If you are able to do so, please set your parallel port into EPP mode
using your CMOS setup procedure.
3.2 Check the port delay
+-------------------------
Some parallel ports cannot reliably transfer data at full speed. To
offset the errors, the PARIDE protocol modules introduce a "port
@@ -347,23 +367,25 @@ read the comments at the beginning of the driver source files in
linux/drivers/block/paride.
3.3 Some drives need a printer reset
+-------------------------------------
There appear to be a number of "noname" external drives on the market
that do not always power up correctly. We have noticed this with some
drives based on OnSpec and older Freecom adapters. In these rare cases,
the adapter can often be reinitialised by issuing a "printer reset" on
-the parallel port. As the reset operation is potentially disruptive in
-multiple device environments, the PARIDE drivers will not do it
-automatically. You can however, force a printer reset by doing:
+the parallel port. As the reset operation is potentially disruptive in
+multiple device environments, the PARIDE drivers will not do it
+automatically. You can however, force a printer reset by doing::
insmod lp reset=1
rmmod lp
If you have one of these marginal cases, you should probably build
your paride drivers as modules, and arrange to do the printer reset
-before loading the PARIDE drivers.
+before loading the PARIDE drivers.
3.4 Use the verbose option and dmesg if you need help
+------------------------------------------------------
While a lot of testing has gone into these drivers to make them work
as smoothly as possible, problems will arise. If you do have problems,
@@ -373,7 +395,7 @@ clues, then please make sure that only one drive is hooked to your system,
and that either (a) PARPORT is enabled or (b) no other device driver
is using your parallel port (check in /proc/ioports). Then, load the
appropriate drivers (you can load several protocol modules if you want)
-as in:
+as in::
# insmod paride
# insmod epat
@@ -394,12 +416,14 @@ by e-mail to grant@torque.net, or join the linux-parport mailing list
and post your report there.
3.5 For more information or help
+---------------------------------
You can join the linux-parport mailing list by sending a mail message
-to
+to:
+
linux-parport-request@torque.net
-with the single word
+with the single word::
subscribe
@@ -412,6 +436,4 @@ have in your mail headers, when sending mail to the list server.
You might also find some useful information on the linux-parport
web pages (although they are not always up to date) at
- http://web.archive.org/web/*/http://www.torque.net/parport/
-
-
+ http://web.archive.org/web/%2E/http://www.torque.net/parport/
diff --git a/Documentation/blockdev/ramdisk.txt b/Documentation/blockdev/ramdisk.rst
similarity index 84%
rename from Documentation/blockdev/ramdisk.txt
rename to Documentation/blockdev/ramdisk.rst
index 501e12e0323e..b7c2268f8dec 100644
--- a/Documentation/blockdev/ramdisk.txt
+++ b/Documentation/blockdev/ramdisk.rst
@@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
+==========================================
Using the RAM disk block device with Linux
-------------------------------------------
+==========================================
-Contents:
+.. Contents:
1) Overview
2) Kernel Command Line Parameters
@@ -42,7 +43,7 @@ rescue floppy disk.
2a) Kernel Command Line Parameters
ramdisk_size=N
- ==============
+ Size of the ramdisk.
This parameter tells the RAM disk driver to set up RAM disks of N k size. The
default is 4096 (4 MB).
@@ -50,16 +51,13 @@ default is 4096 (4 MB).
2b) Module parameters
rd_nr
- =====
- /dev/ramX devices created.
+ /dev/ramX devices created.
max_part
- ========
- Maximum partition number.
+ Maximum partition number.
rd_size
- =======
- See ramdisk_size.
+ See ramdisk_size.
3) Using "rdev -r"
------------------
@@ -71,11 +69,11 @@ to 2 MB (2^11) of where to find the RAM disk (this used to be the size). Bit
prompt/wait sequence is to be given before trying to read the RAM disk. Since
the RAM disk dynamically grows as data is being written into it, a size field
is not required. Bits 11 to 13 are not currently used and may as well be zero.
-These numbers are no magical secrets, as seen below:
+These numbers are no magical secrets, as seen below::
-./arch/x86/kernel/setup.c:#define RAMDISK_IMAGE_START_MASK 0x07FF
-./arch/x86/kernel/setup.c:#define RAMDISK_PROMPT_FLAG 0x8000
-./arch/x86/kernel/setup.c:#define RAMDISK_LOAD_FLAG 0x4000
+ ./arch/x86/kernel/setup.c:#define RAMDISK_IMAGE_START_MASK 0x07FF
+ ./arch/x86/kernel/setup.c:#define RAMDISK_PROMPT_FLAG 0x8000
+ ./arch/x86/kernel/setup.c:#define RAMDISK_LOAD_FLAG 0x4000
Consider a typical two floppy disk setup, where you will have the
kernel on disk one, and have already put a RAM disk image onto disk #2.
@@ -92,20 +90,23 @@ sequence so that you have a chance to switch floppy disks.
The command line equivalent is: "prompt_ramdisk=1"
Putting that together gives 2^15 + 2^14 + 0 = 49152 for an rdev word.
-So to create disk one of the set, you would do:
+So to create disk one of the set, you would do::
/usr/src/linux# cat arch/x86/boot/zImage > /dev/fd0
/usr/src/linux# rdev /dev/fd0 /dev/fd0
/usr/src/linux# rdev -r /dev/fd0 49152
-If you make a boot disk that has LILO, then for the above, you would use:
+If you make a boot disk that has LILO, then for the above, you would use::
+
append = "ramdisk_start=0 load_ramdisk=1 prompt_ramdisk=1"
-Since the default start = 0 and the default prompt = 1, you could use:
+
+Since the default start = 0 and the default prompt = 1, you could use::
+
append = "load_ramdisk=1"
4) An Example of Creating a Compressed RAM Disk
-----------------------------------------------
+-----------------------------------------------
To create a RAM disk image, you will need a spare block device to
construct it on. This can be the RAM disk device itself, or an
@@ -120,11 +121,11 @@ a) Decide on the RAM disk size that you want. Say 2 MB for this example.
Create it by writing to the RAM disk device. (This step is not currently
required, but may be in the future.) It is wise to zero out the
area (esp. for disks) so that maximal compression is achieved for
- the unused blocks of the image that you are about to create.
+ the unused blocks of the image that you are about to create::
dd if=/dev/zero of=/dev/ram0 bs=1k count=2048
-b) Make a filesystem on it. Say ext2fs for this example.
+b) Make a filesystem on it. Say ext2fs for this example::
mke2fs -vm0 /dev/ram0 2048
@@ -133,11 +134,11 @@ c) Mount it, copy the files you want to it (eg: /etc/* /dev/* ...)
d) Compress the contents of the RAM disk. The level of compression
will be approximately 50% of the space used by the files. Unused
- space on the RAM disk will compress to almost nothing.
+ space on the RAM disk will compress to almost nothing::
dd if=/dev/ram0 bs=1k count=2048 | gzip -v9 > /tmp/ram_image.gz
-e) Put the kernel onto the floppy
+e) Put the kernel onto the floppy::
dd if=zImage of=/dev/fd0 bs=1k
@@ -146,13 +147,13 @@ f) Put the RAM disk image onto the floppy, after the kernel. Use an offset
(possibly larger) kernel onto the same floppy later without overlapping
the RAM disk image. An offset of 400 kB for kernels about 350 kB in
size would be reasonable. Make sure offset+size of ram_image.gz is
- not larger than the total space on your floppy (usually 1440 kB).
+ not larger than the total space on your floppy (usually 1440 kB)::
dd if=/tmp/ram_image.gz of=/dev/fd0 bs=1k seek=400
g) Use "rdev" to set the boot device, RAM disk offset, prompt flag, etc.
For prompt_ramdisk=1, load_ramdisk=1, ramdisk_start=400, one would
- have 2^15 + 2^14 + 400 = 49552.
+ have 2^15 + 2^14 + 400 = 49552::
rdev /dev/fd0 /dev/fd0
rdev -r /dev/fd0 49552
@@ -160,15 +161,17 @@ g) Use "rdev" to set the boot device, RAM disk offset, prompt flag, etc.
That is it. You now have your boot/root compressed RAM disk floppy. Some
users may wish to combine steps (d) and (f) by using a pipe.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
Paul Gortmaker 12/95
Changelog:
----------
-10-22-04 : Updated to reflect changes in command line options, remove
+10-22-04 :
+ Updated to reflect changes in command line options, remove
obsolete references, general cleanup.
James Nelson (james4765@gmail.com)
-12-95 : Original Document
+12-95 :
+ Original Document
diff --git a/Documentation/blockdev/zram.txt b/Documentation/blockdev/zram.rst
similarity index 76%
rename from Documentation/blockdev/zram.txt
rename to Documentation/blockdev/zram.rst
index 4df0ce271085..2111231c9c0f 100644
--- a/Documentation/blockdev/zram.txt
+++ b/Documentation/blockdev/zram.rst
@@ -1,7 +1,9 @@
+========================================
zram: Compressed RAM based block devices
-----------------------------------------
+========================================
-* Introduction
+Introduction
+============
The zram module creates RAM based block devices named /dev/zram<id>
(<id> = 0, 1, ...). Pages written to these disks are compressed and stored
@@ -12,9 +14,11 @@ use as swap disks, various caches under /var and maybe many more :)
Statistics for individual zram devices are exported through sysfs nodes at
/sys/block/zram<id>/
-* Usage
+Usage
+=====
There are several ways to configure and manage zram device(-s):
+
a) using zram and zram_control sysfs attributes
b) using zramctl utility, provided by util-linux (util-linux@vger.kernel.org).
@@ -22,7 +26,7 @@ In this document we will describe only 'manual' zram configuration steps,
IOW, zram and zram_control sysfs attributes.
In order to get a better idea about zramctl please consult util-linux
-documentation, zramctl man-page or `zramctl --help'. Please be informed
+documentation, zramctl man-page or `zramctl --help`. Please be informed
that zram maintainers do not develop/maintain util-linux or zramctl, should
you have any questions please contact util-linux@vger.kernel.org
@@ -30,19 +34,23 @@ Following shows a typical sequence of steps for using zram.
WARNING
=======
+
For the sake of simplicity we skip error checking parts in most of the
examples below. However, it is your sole responsibility to handle errors.
zram sysfs attributes always return negative values in case of errors.
The list of possible return codes:
--EBUSY -- an attempt to modify an attribute that cannot be changed once
-the device has been initialised. Please reset device first;
--ENOMEM -- zram was not able to allocate enough memory to fulfil your
-needs;
--EINVAL -- invalid input has been provided.
+
+======== =============================================================
+-EBUSY an attempt to modify an attribute that cannot be changed once
+ the device has been initialised. Please reset device first;
+-ENOMEM zram was not able to allocate enough memory to fulfil your
+ needs;
+-EINVAL invalid input has been provided.
+======== =============================================================
If you use 'echo', the returned value that is changed by 'echo' utility,
-and, in general case, something like:
+and, in general case, something like::
echo 3 > /sys/block/zram0/max_comp_streams
if [ $? -ne 0 ];
@@ -51,7 +59,11 @@ and, in general case, something like:
should suffice.
-1) Load Module:
+1) Load Module
+==============
+
+::
+
modprobe zram num_devices=4
This creates 4 devices: /dev/zram{0,1,2,3}
@@ -59,6 +71,8 @@ num_devices parameter is optional and tells zram how many devices should be
pre-created. Default: 1.
2) Set max number of compression streams
+========================================
+
Regardless the value passed to this attribute, ZRAM will always
allocate multiple compression streams - one per online CPUs - thus
allowing several concurrent compression operations. The number of
@@ -66,16 +80,20 @@ allocated compression streams goes down when some of the CPUs
become offline. There is no single-compression-stream mode anymore,
unless you are running a UP system or has only 1 CPU online.
-To find out how many streams are currently available:
+To find out how many streams are currently available::
+
cat /sys/block/zram0/max_comp_streams
3) Select compression algorithm
+===============================
+
Using comp_algorithm device attribute one can see available and
currently selected (shown in square brackets) compression algorithms,
change selected compression algorithm (once the device is initialised
there is no way to change compression algorithm).
-Examples:
+Examples::
+
#show supported compression algorithms
cat /sys/block/zram0/comp_algorithm
lzo [lz4]
@@ -83,20 +101,23 @@ Examples:
#select lzo compression algorithm
echo lzo > /sys/block/zram0/comp_algorithm
-For the time being, the `comp_algorithm' content does not necessarily
+For the time being, the `comp_algorithm` content does not necessarily
show every compression algorithm supported by the kernel. We keep this
list primarily to simplify device configuration and one can configure
a new device with a compression algorithm that is not listed in
-`comp_algorithm'. The thing is that, internally, ZRAM uses Crypto API
+`comp_algorithm`. The thing is that, internally, ZRAM uses Crypto API
and, if some of the algorithms were built as modules, it's impossible
to list all of them using, for instance, /proc/crypto or any other
method. This, however, has an advantage of permitting the usage of
custom crypto compression modules (implementing S/W or H/W compression).
4) Set Disksize
+===============
+
Set disk size by writing the value to sysfs node 'disksize'.
The value can be either in bytes or you can use mem suffixes.
-Examples:
+Examples::
+
# Initialize /dev/zram0 with 50MB disksize
echo $((50*1024*1024)) > /sys/block/zram0/disksize
@@ -111,10 +132,13 @@ since we expect a 2:1 compression ratio. Note that zram uses about 0.1% of the
size of the disk when not in use so a huge zram is wasteful.
5) Set memory limit: Optional
+=============================
+
Set memory limit by writing the value to sysfs node 'mem_limit'.
The value can be either in bytes or you can use mem suffixes.
In addition, you could change the value in runtime.
-Examples:
+Examples::
+
# limit /dev/zram0 with 50MB memory
echo $((50*1024*1024)) > /sys/block/zram0/mem_limit
@@ -126,7 +150,11 @@ Examples:
# To disable memory limit
echo 0 > /sys/block/zram0/mem_limit
-6) Activate:
+6) Activate
+===========
+
+::
+
mkswap /dev/zram0
swapon /dev/zram0
@@ -134,6 +162,7 @@ Examples:
mount /dev/zram1 /tmp
7) Add/remove zram devices
+==========================
zram provides a control interface, which enables dynamic (on-demand) device
addition and removal.
@@ -142,37 +171,44 @@ In order to add a new /dev/zramX device, perform read operation on hot_add
attribute. This will return either new device's device id (meaning that you
can use /dev/zram<id>) or error code.
-Example:
+Example::
+
cat /sys/class/zram-control/hot_add
1
To remove the existing /dev/zramX device (where X is a device id)
-execute
+execute::
+
echo X > /sys/class/zram-control/hot_remove
-8) Stats:
+8) Stats
+========
+
Per-device statistics are exported as various nodes under /sys/block/zram<id>/
A brief description of exported device attributes. For more details please
read Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block-zram.
+====================== ====== ===============================================
Name access description
----- ------ -----------
+====================== ====== ===============================================
disksize RW show and set the device's disk size
initstate RO shows the initialization state of the device
reset WO trigger device reset
-mem_used_max WO reset the `mem_used_max' counter (see later)
-mem_limit WO specifies the maximum amount of memory ZRAM can use
- to store the compressed data
-writeback_limit WO specifies the maximum amount of write IO zram can
- write out to backing device as 4KB unit
+mem_used_max WO reset the `mem_used_max` counter (see later)
+mem_limit WO specifies the maximum amount of memory ZRAM can
+ use to store the compressed data
+writeback_limit WO specifies the maximum amount of write IO zram
+ can write out to backing device as 4KB unit
writeback_limit_enable RW show and set writeback_limit feature
-max_comp_streams RW the number of possible concurrent compress operations
+max_comp_streams RW the number of possible concurrent compress
+ operations
comp_algorithm RW show and change the compression algorithm
compact WO trigger memory compaction
debug_stat RO this file is used for zram debugging purposes
backing_dev RW set up backend storage for zram to write out
idle WO mark allocated slot as idle
+====================== ====== ===============================================
User space is advised to use the following files to read the device statistics.
@@ -188,23 +224,31 @@ The stat file represents device's I/O statistics not accounted by block
layer and, thus, not available in zram<id>/stat file. It consists of a
single line of text and contains the following stats separated by
whitespace:
- failed_reads the number of failed reads
- failed_writes the number of failed writes
- invalid_io the number of non-page-size-aligned I/O requests
+
+ ============= =============================================================
+ failed_reads The number of failed reads
+ failed_writes The number of failed writes
+ invalid_io The number of non-page-size-aligned I/O requests
notify_free Depending on device usage scenario it may account
+
a) the number of pages freed because of swap slot free
- notifications or b) the number of pages freed because of
- REQ_OP_DISCARD requests sent by bio. The former ones are
- sent to a swap block device when a swap slot is freed,
- which implies that this disk is being used as a swap disk.
+ notifications
+ b) the number of pages freed because of
+ REQ_OP_DISCARD requests sent by bio. The former ones are
+ sent to a swap block device when a swap slot is freed,
+ which implies that this disk is being used as a swap disk.
+
The latter ones are sent by filesystem mounted with
discard option, whenever some data blocks are getting
discarded.
+ ============= =============================================================
File /sys/block/zram<id>/mm_stat
The stat file represents device's mm statistics. It consists of a single
line of text and contains the following stats separated by whitespace:
+
+ ================ =============================================================
orig_data_size uncompressed size of data stored in this disk.
This excludes same-element-filled pages (same_pages) since
no memory is allocated for them.
@@ -223,58 +267,71 @@ line of text and contains the following stats separated by whitespace:
No memory is allocated for such pages.
pages_compacted the number of pages freed during compaction
huge_pages the number of incompressible pages
+ ================ =============================================================
File /sys/block/zram<id>/bd_stat
The stat file represents device's backing device statistics. It consists of
a single line of text and contains the following stats separated by whitespace:
+
+ ============== =============================================================
bd_count size of data written in backing device.
Unit: 4K bytes
bd_reads the number of reads from backing device
Unit: 4K bytes
bd_writes the number of writes to backing device
Unit: 4K bytes
+ ============== =============================================================
+
+9) Deactivate
+=============
+
+::
-9) Deactivate:
swapoff /dev/zram0
umount /dev/zram1
-10) Reset:
- Write any positive value to 'reset' sysfs node
- echo 1 > /sys/block/zram0/reset
- echo 1 > /sys/block/zram1/reset
+10) Reset
+=========
+
+ Write any positive value to 'reset' sysfs node::
+
+ echo 1 > /sys/block/zram0/reset
+ echo 1 > /sys/block/zram1/reset
This frees all the memory allocated for the given device and
resets the disksize to zero. You must set the disksize again
before reusing the device.
-* Optional Feature
+Optional Feature
+================
-= writeback
+writeback
+---------
With CONFIG_ZRAM_WRITEBACK, zram can write idle/incompressible page
to backing storage rather than keeping it in memory.
-To use the feature, admin should set up backing device via
+To use the feature, admin should set up backing device via::
- "echo /dev/sda5 > /sys/block/zramX/backing_dev"
+ echo /dev/sda5 > /sys/block/zramX/backing_dev
before disksize setting. It supports only partition at this moment.
-If admin want to use incompressible page writeback, they could do via
+If admin want to use incompressible page writeback, they could do via::
- "echo huge > /sys/block/zramX/write"
+ echo huge > /sys/block/zramX/write
To use idle page writeback, first, user need to declare zram pages
-as idle.
+as idle::
- "echo all > /sys/block/zramX/idle"
+ echo all > /sys/block/zramX/idle
From now on, any pages on zram are idle pages. The idle mark
will be removed until someone request access of the block.
IOW, unless there is access request, those pages are still idle pages.
-Admin can request writeback of those idle pages at right timing via
+Admin can request writeback of those idle pages at right timing via::
- "echo idle > /sys/block/zramX/writeback"
+ echo idle > /sys/block/zramX/writeback
With the command, zram writeback idle pages from memory to the storage.
@@ -285,7 +342,7 @@ to guarantee storage health for entire product life.
To overcome the concern, zram supports "writeback_limit" feature.
The "writeback_limit_enable"'s default value is 0 so that it doesn't limit
any writeback. IOW, if admin want to apply writeback budget, he should
-enable writeback_limit_enable via
+enable writeback_limit_enable via::
$ echo 1 > /sys/block/zramX/writeback_limit_enable
@@ -296,7 +353,7 @@ until admin set the budget via /sys/block/zramX/writeback_limit.
assigned via /sys/block/zramX/writeback_limit is meaninless.)
If admin want to limit writeback as per-day 400M, he could do it
-like below.
+like below::
$ MB_SHIFT=20
$ 4K_SHIFT=12
@@ -305,16 +362,16 @@ like below.
$ echo 1 > /sys/block/zram0/writeback_limit_enable
If admin want to allow further write again once the bugdet is exausted,
-he could do it like below
+he could do it like below::
$ echo $((400<<MB_SHIFT>>4K_SHIFT)) > \
/sys/block/zram0/writeback_limit
-If admin want to see remaining writeback budget since he set,
+If admin want to see remaining writeback budget since he set::
$ cat /sys/block/zramX/writeback_limit
-If admin want to disable writeback limit, he could do
+If admin want to disable writeback limit, he could do::
$ echo 0 > /sys/block/zramX/writeback_limit_enable
@@ -326,25 +383,35 @@ budget in next setting is user's job.
If admin want to measure writeback count in a certain period, he could
know it via /sys/block/zram0/bd_stat's 3rd column.
-= memory tracking
+memory tracking
+===============
With CONFIG_ZRAM_MEMORY_TRACKING, user can know information of the
zram block. It could be useful to catch cold or incompressible
pages of the process with*pagemap.
+
If you enable the feature, you could see block state via
-/sys/kernel/debug/zram/zram0/block_state". The output is as follows,
+/sys/kernel/debug/zram/zram0/block_state". The output is as follows::
300 75.033841 .wh.
301 63.806904 s...
302 63.806919 ..hi
-First column is zram's block index.
-Second column is access time since the system was booted
-Third column is state of the block.
-(s: same page
-w: written page to backing store
-h: huge page
-i: idle page)
+First column
+ zram's block index.
+Second column
+ access time since the system was booted
+Third column
+ state of the block:
+
+ s:
+ same page
+ w:
+ written page to backing store
+ h:
+ huge page
+ i:
+ idle page
First line of above example says 300th block is accessed at 75.033841sec
and the block's state is huge so it is written back to the backing
diff --git a/MAINTAINERS b/MAINTAINERS
index 85648a944446..808f65e06ad8 100644
--- a/MAINTAINERS
+++ b/MAINTAINERS
@@ -11024,7 +11024,7 @@ M: Josef Bacik <josef@toxicpanda.com>
S: Maintained
L: linux-block@vger.kernel.org
L: nbd@other.debian.org
-F: Documentation/blockdev/nbd.txt
+F: Documentation/blockdev/nbd.rst
F: drivers/block/nbd.c
F: include/trace/events/nbd.h
F: include/uapi/linux/nbd.h
@@ -12028,7 +12028,7 @@ PARIDE DRIVERS FOR PARALLEL PORT IDE DEVICES
M: Tim Waugh <tim@cyberelk.net>
L: linux-parport@lists.infradead.org (subscribers-only)
S: Maintained
-F: Documentation/blockdev/paride.txt
+F: Documentation/blockdev/paride.rst
F: drivers/block/paride/
PARISC ARCHITECTURE
@@ -13310,7 +13310,7 @@ F: drivers/net/wireless/ralink/rt2x00/
RAMDISK RAM BLOCK DEVICE DRIVER
M: Jens Axboe <axboe@kernel.dk>
S: Maintained
-F: Documentation/blockdev/ramdisk.txt
+F: Documentation/blockdev/ramdisk.rst
F: drivers/block/brd.c
RANCHU VIRTUAL BOARD FOR MIPS
@@ -17672,7 +17672,7 @@ R: Sergey Senozhatsky <sergey.senozhatsky.work@gmail.com>
L: linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org
S: Maintained
F: drivers/block/zram/
-F: Documentation/blockdev/zram.txt
+F: Documentation/blockdev/zram.rst
ZS DECSTATION Z85C30 SERIAL DRIVER
M: "Maciej W. Rozycki" <macro@linux-mips.org>
diff --git a/drivers/block/Kconfig b/drivers/block/Kconfig
index 96ec7e0fc1ea..c43690b973d8 100644
--- a/drivers/block/Kconfig
+++ b/drivers/block/Kconfig
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ config BLK_DEV_FD
If you want to use the floppy disk drive(s) of your PC under Linux,
say Y. Information about this driver, especially important for IBM
Thinkpad users, is contained in
- <file:Documentation/blockdev/floppy.txt>.
+ <file:Documentation/blockdev/floppy.rst>.
That file also contains the location of the Floppy driver FAQ as
well as location of the fdutils package used to configure additional
parameters of the driver at run time.
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ config PARIDE
your computer's parallel port. Most of them are actually IDE devices
using a parallel port IDE adapter. This option enables the PARIDE
subsystem which contains drivers for many of these external drives.
- Read <file:Documentation/blockdev/paride.txt> for more information.
+ Read <file:Documentation/blockdev/paride.rst> for more information.
If you have said Y to the "Parallel-port support" configuration
option, you may share a single port between your printer and other
@@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ config BLK_DEV_NBD
userland (making server and client physically the same computer,
communicating using the loopback network device).
- Read <file:Documentation/blockdev/nbd.txt> for more information,
+ Read <file:Documentation/blockdev/nbd.rst> for more information,
especially about where to find the server code, which runs in user
space and does not need special kernel support.
@@ -303,7 +303,7 @@ config BLK_DEV_RAM
during the initial install of Linux.
Note that the kernel command line option "ramdisk=XX" is now obsolete.
- For details, read <file:Documentation/blockdev/ramdisk.txt>.
+ For details, read <file:Documentation/blockdev/ramdisk.rst>.
To compile this driver as a module, choose M here: the
module will be called brd. An alias "rd" has been defined
diff --git a/drivers/block/floppy.c b/drivers/block/floppy.c
index b933a7eea52b..5c99e52f9dc1 100644
--- a/drivers/block/floppy.c
+++ b/drivers/block/floppy.c
@@ -4424,7 +4424,7 @@ static int __init floppy_setup(char *str)
pr_cont("\n");
} else
DPRINT("botched floppy option\n");
- DPRINT("Read Documentation/blockdev/floppy.txt\n");
+ DPRINT("Read Documentation/blockdev/floppy.rst\n");
return 0;
}
diff --git a/drivers/block/zram/Kconfig b/drivers/block/zram/Kconfig
index 1ffc64770643..e06b99d54816 100644
--- a/drivers/block/zram/Kconfig
+++ b/drivers/block/zram/Kconfig
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ config ZRAM
It has several use cases, for example: /tmp storage, use as swap
disks and maybe many more.
- See Documentation/blockdev/zram.txt for more information.
+ See Documentation/blockdev/zram.rst for more information.
config ZRAM_WRITEBACK
bool "Write back incompressible or idle page to backing device"
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ config ZRAM_WRITEBACK
With /sys/block/zramX/{idle,writeback}, application could ask
idle page's writeback to the backing device to save in memory.
- See Documentation/blockdev/zram.txt for more information.
+ See Documentation/blockdev/zram.rst for more information.
config ZRAM_MEMORY_TRACKING
bool "Track zRam block status"
@@ -36,4 +36,4 @@ config ZRAM_MEMORY_TRACKING
of zRAM. Admin could see the information via
/sys/kernel/debug/zram/zramX/block_state.
- See Documentation/blockdev/zram.txt for more information.
+ See Documentation/blockdev/zram.rst for more information.
diff --git a/tools/testing/selftests/zram/README b/tools/testing/selftests/zram/README
index 7972cc512408..5fa378391d3b 100644
--- a/tools/testing/selftests/zram/README
+++ b/tools/testing/selftests/zram/README
@@ -37,4 +37,4 @@ Commands required for testing:
- mkfs/ mkfs.ext4
For more information please refer:
-kernel-source-tree/Documentation/blockdev/zram.txt
+kernel-source-tree/Documentation/blockdev/zram.rst
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related
page: next (older) | prev (newer) | latest
- recent:[subjects (threaded)|topics (new)|topics (active)]
This is a public inbox, see mirroring instructions
for how to clone and mirror all data and code used for this inbox